Optional Parts Manual
Back to Index page
Optional Parts
Optional parts list................................... E-2
System controls sample........................ E-6
Model Name
●Optional Parts for outdoor unit
MSDD-50TR-E....................................... E-148
MSDD-50WR-E...................................... E-150
MSDF-111R-E....................................... E-152
MSDF-1111R-E....................................... E-154
MSDD-50AR-E....................................... E-156
MSDD-50BR-E....................................... E-158
PAC-SG72RJ-E...................................... E-160
PAC-SG73RJ-E...................................... E-161
PAC-SG74RJ-E...................................... E-162
PAC-SG75RJ-E...................................... E-163
PAC-SG76RJ-E...................................... E-164
PAC-493PI.............................................. E-165
MAC-A454JP-E..................................... E-166
MAC-A455JP-E..................................... E-167
MAC-A456JP-E..................................... E-168
PAC-SG81DR-E..................................... E-169
PAC-SG82DR-E..................................... E-172
PAC-SG85DR-E..................................... E-175
PAC-AK350CVR-E................................. E-178
MAC-889SG........................................... E-180
MAC-856SG........................................... E-183
PAC-SG58SG-E..................................... E-184
PAC-SG59SG-E..................................... E-187
PAC-SH96SG-E..................................... E-189
PAC-SG56AG-E..................................... E-191
PAC-SH63AG-E..................................... E-193
PAC-SH95AG-E..................................... E-196
PAC-SF37DS-E..................................... E-199
PAC-SG61DS-E..................................... E-201
PAC-SG63DP-E..................................... E-203
PAC-SG64DP-E..................................... E-205
PAC-SH97DP-E..................................... E-207
PAC-SF81MA-E..................................... E-209
PAC-SK52ST......................................... E-223
PAC-SC36NA......................................... E-224
PAC-IF010-E.......................................... E-225
PAC-IF011B-E........................................ E-225
PAC-IF012B-E........................................ E-225
PARTS
MAC-1300FT......................................... E-8
MAC-1700FT......................................... E-9
MAC-307FT-E........................................ E-10
MAC-2300FT......................................... E-11
MAC-415FT-E........................................ E-12
MAC-408FT-E........................................ E-13
MAC-171FT-E........................................ E-14
MAC-417FT-E........................................ E-15
MAC-3003CF........................................ E-16
MAC-3004CF-E...................................... E-17
PAC-SG38KF-E..................................... E-18
PAC-SH59KF-E..................................... E-20
PAC-SH88KF-E..................................... E-22
PAC-SH89KF-E..................................... E-22
PAC-SH90KF-E..................................... E-22
PAC-KE92TB-E..................................... E-23
PAC-KE93TB-E..................................... E-23
PAC-KE94TB-E..................................... E-23
PAC-KE95TB-E..................................... E-23
PAC-SA1ME-E..................................... E-24
PAC-SH51SP-E..................................... E-26
PAC-SH53TM-E..................................... E-28
PAC-SH65OF-E..................................... E-33
PAC-SF28OF-E..................................... E-35
PAC-SH48AS-E..................................... E-36
MAC-093SS-E..................................... E-38
PAC-SH94DM-E..................................... E-40
PAC-SH75DM-E..................................... E-44
PAC-SH83DM-E..................................... E-48
PAC-SH84DM-E..................................... E-48
PAC-SH85DM-E..................................... E-48
PAC-KE07DM-E..................................... E-54
PAC-SF81KC-E..................................... E-60
PAC-SF82KC-E..................................... E-62
MAC-397IF-E......................................... E-64
MAC-399IF-E......................................... E-76
MAC-821SC-E........................................ E-84
PAC-SG94HR-E..................................... E-90
PAC-SG96HR-E..................................... E-93
PAC-SG97HR-E..................................... E-94
PAC-SH52HR-E..................................... E-99
PAR-21MAA-J..................................... E-102
PAR-21MAAT-E..................................... E-110
PAR-SL97A-E..................................... E-122
PAR-SA9CA-E..................................... E-123
PAR-SA9FA-E..................................... E-127
PAR-SL94B-E..................................... E-129
MAC-1200RC..................................... E-137
PAC-SE41TS-E..................................... E-138
PAC-SE55RA-E..................................... E-140
PAC-SF40RM-E..................................... E-142
PAC-SA88HA-E..................................... E-146
OPTIONAL
●Optional Parts for indoor unit
Optional Parts List <Indoor>
Option part
Filter
Air cleaning
filter
Indoor unit
Page
Wall
Mounted
Platinum
catalyst
deodrizing
filter
Anti-allergy
enzyme filter
Anti-allergen
Oil mist
Catechin air
eletric
filter
filter
enzyme filter
element
MAC1300
FT
MAC1700
FT
MAC307
FT-E
MAC- MAC- MAC- MAC2300 415 408 171
FT FT-E FT-E FT-E
P.8
P.9
P.10
P.11
P.12
P.13
P.14
MAC417FT-E
MAC3003
CF
MAC3004
CF-E
PACSG38
KF-E
P.15
P.16
P.17
P.18
High efficiency
filter element
i-see
Multi- Duct flange
Quick
sensor Shutter functional for fresh air Space clean
panel
corner plate casement
intake
kit
panel
Fileter Box
PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PACSH59 SH88 SH89 SH90 KE92 KE93 KE94 KE95 SA1
KF-E KF-E KF-E KF-E TB-E TB-E TB-E TB-E ME-E
PACSH51
SP-E
PACSH53
TM-E
PAC- PACSH65 SF28
OF-E OF-E
PACSH48
AS-E
MAC093
SS-E
P.20
P.26
P.28
P.33
P.36
P.38
P.22
P.22
P.22
P.23
P.23
P.23
P.23
P.24
MSZ-FD25VA(S)
MSZ-FD35VA(S)
MSZ-FD50VA(S)
MSZ-GE22VA
MSZ-GE25VA
MSZ-GE35VA
MSZ-GE42VA
MSZ-GE50VA
MSZ-GA60VA
MSZ-GA71VA
MSZ-HC25VA
MSZ-HC35VA
M series
MSZ-HC35VAB
MSC-GE20VB
MSC-GE25VB
MSC-GE35VB
MSH-GE50VB
MSH-GA60VB
MSH-GD80VB
MS-GE50VB
MS-GA60VB
MS-GD80VB
Floor
Standing
MFZ-KA25VA
1-way
Cassette
MLZ-KA25VA
4-way
Cassette
SLZ-KA25VA
MFZ-KA35VA
MFZ-KA50VA
MLZ-KA35VA
MLZ-KA50VA
SLZ-KA25VAL
SLZ-KA35VA
SLZ-KA35VAL
SLZ-KA50VA
S series
SLZ-KA50VAL
Ceiling
Conceald
SEZ-KD25VA
SEZ-KD25VAL
SEZ-KD35VA
SEZ-KD35VAL
SEZ-KD50VA
SEZ-KD50VAL
SEZ-KD60VA
SEZ-KD60VAL
SEZ-KD71VA
SEZ-KD71VAL
4-way
Cassette
PLA-RP35BA
PLA-RP50BA
PLA-RP60BA
PLA-RP71BA2
PLA-RP71BA
PLA-RP100BA3
PLA-RP100BA
PLA-RP125BA2
PLA-RP125BA
PLA-RP140BA2
Ceiling
Conceald
PEAD-RP35JA(L)
PEAD-RP50JA(L)
PEAD-RP60JA(L)
PEAD-RP71JA(L)
PEAD-RP100JA(L)
PEAD-RP125JA(L)
PEAD-RP140JA(L)
P series
PEA-RP200GA
PEA-RP250GA
PEA-RP400GA
PEA-RP500GA
Wall
Mounted
PKA-RP35HAL
PKA-RP50HAL
PKA-RP60KAL
PKA-RP71KAL
PKA-RP100KAL
Ceiling
PCA-RP50KA
Suspended
PCA-RP60KA
PCA-RP71KA
PCA-RP100KA
PCA-RP125KA
PCA-RP140KA
PCA-RP71HA
PCA-RP125HA
Floor
Standing
PSA-RP71GA
PSA-RP100GA
PSA-RP125GA
PSA-RP140GA
*1:In the case the outdoor unit is SUZ or MXZ, the indoor unit of P-series can be connected
*4:Unable to use with wireless remote controller
*2:In the case the outdoor unit is SUZ or MXZ,the indoor unit of P-series can be connected (MAC-397IF-E required)
*5:2 pieces of interface is necessary for 1 indoor unit.
*3:MAC-397IF-E is required
E-2
P.35
Decoration
cover
Drain pump
Wired remote contoller
MA &
Centralized
Contact M-NET
on/off
terminal interface remote
interface
controller
Power supply
terminal kit
Controller
Wireless remote controller
Controller
kit for Signal
sender
PKA(H)
Signal
receiver
Connector
Remote Remote cable for
Remote
Controller kit
on/off operation remote
(Sender & Controller sensor adapter adapter
holder
display
receiver)
PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PAC- PACPAC- PAC- PAC- PACPAR- PAR- PARMAC- SG94 SG96 SG97 SH52
PARPARPARMACSH94 SH75 SH83 SH84 SH85 KE07 SF81 SF82 MAC- MACSL97 SA9C SA9F
397IF-E 399IF-E 821SC-E
21MAA-J 21MAAT-E
SL94B-E 1200RC
DM-E DM-E DM-E DM-E DM-E DM-E KC-E KC-E
HR-E HR-E HR-E HR-E
A-E
A-E
A-E
P.40
P.44
P.48
P.48
P.48
P.54
P.60
P.62
P.67
P.76
P.84
P.90
P.93
P.94
P.99
P.102
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
P.110
P.122
P.123
P.127
P.129
P.137
*3
PACSE41
TS-E
PACSE55
RA-E
PACSF40
RM-E
PACSA88HA-E
P.138
P.140
P.142
P.146
*4
*3
*3
*4
*3
*3
*4
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*5
*2
*5
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1:In the case the outdoor unit is SUZ or MXZ, the indoor unit of P-series can be connected
*2:In the case the outdoor unit is SUZ or MXZ,the indoor unit of P-series can be connected (MAC-397IF-E required)
*3:MAC-397IF-E is required
*4:Unable to use with wireless remote controller
*5:2 pieces of interface is necessary for 1 indoor unit.
E-3
Optional Parts List <Outdoor>
Option part
Distribution pipe
For twin use
(50:50)
MSDD- MSDD50TR-E 50WR-E
Outdoor unit
Page
F series
P.148
MUZ-FD25VA
MUZ-FD25VABH
MUZ-FD35VA
MUZ-FD35VABH
MUZ-FD50VA
MUZ-FD50VABH
G series
MUZ-GE25VA
MUZ-GE25VAH
MUZ-GE35VA
MUZ-GE35VAH
MUZ-GE42VA
MUZ-GE42VAH
M series
MUZ-GE50VA
MUZ-GE50VAH
H series
MUZ-HC25VA
MUZ-HC35VA
MUZ-HC35VAB
Fixed Speed
MUH-GA20VB
(Heating&Cooling)
MUH-GA25VB
MUH-GA35VB
MUH-GE50VB
MUH-GA60VB
MUH-GD80VB
Fixed Speed
(Cooling Only)
MU-GA20VB
MU-GA25VB
MU-GA35VB
MU-GE50VB
MU-GA60VB
MU-GD80VB
S series
SUZ-KA25VA
SUZ-KA25VAH
SUZ-KA35VA
SUZ-KA35VAH
SUZ-KA50VA
SUZ-KA60VA
SUZ-KA71VA
ZUBADAN
PUHZ-HRP71VHA2
PUHZ-HRP100VHA2
PUHZ-HRP100YHA2
PUHZ-HRP125YHA2
Power
Inverter
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
P series
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
Standard
Inverter
PUHZ-P100VHA3
PUHZ-P125VHA3
PUHZ-P140VHA3
PUHZ-P200YHA3
PUHZ-P250YHA3
Fixed Speed
PUH-P71VHA
(Heating&Cooling)
PUH-P71YHA
PUH-P100VHA
PUH-P100YHA
PUH-P125YHA
PUH-P140YHA
Fixed Speed
(Cooling Only)
PU-P71VHA
PU-P71YHA
PU-P100VHA
PU-P100YHA
PU-P125YHA
PU-P140YHA
MXZ series
MXZ-2A30VA
MXZ-2A40VA
MXZ-2A52VA
MXZ-3A54VA
MXZ-4A71VA
MXZ-4A80VA
MXZ-5A100VA
MXZ-8A140VA
E-4
P.150
MSDT111R-E
MSDF1111R-E
P.152
P.154
Filter dryer for
liquid pipe
Joint pipe
For
For triple quadruple
Flare
use
connection Brazing
use
type
(33:33:33) (25:25:25:25)
type
MSDD- MSDD50AR-E 50BR-E
P.156
P.158
Unit Φ6.35 Unit Φ9.52 Unit Φ12.7 Unit Φ15.88 Unit Φ9.52 Unit Φ6.35 Unit Φ9.52 Unit Φ12.7 Unit Φ12.7
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
-->
Pipe Φ9.52 Pipe Φ12.7 Pipe Φ15.88 Pipe Φ19.05 Pipe Φ15.88 Pipe Φ9.52 Pipe Φ12.7 Pipe Φ9.52 Pipe Φ15.88
For
pipe
Φ6.35
For
pipe
Φ9.52
For pipe
Φ12.7
PACSG72
RJ-E
PACSG73
RJ-E
PACSG74
RJ-E
PACSG75
RJ-E
PACSG76
RJ-E
PAC493
PI
MACA454
JP-E
MACA455
JP-E
MACA456
JP-E
PACSG81
DR-E
PACSG82
DR-E
PACSG85
DR-E
P.160
P.161
P.162
P.163
P.164
P.165
P.166
P.167
P.168
P.169
P.172
P.175
Step Interface
Branch
box
outer
cover
PACAK350
CVR-E
P.178
Air outlet guide
MAC- MAC889SG 856SG
P.180
P.183
Air protect guide
Drain socket
Centralized drain pan
M-NET
converter
Control/
service tool
Remote On/Off
Input Signal
adaptor
10 PC boards
1 PC boards
1 PC boards
W/0
W/0
W/0
attachiment kit attachiment kit attachiment kit
PACSG58
SG-E
PACSG59
SG-E
PACSH96
SG-E
PACSG56
AG-E
PACSH63
AG-E
PACSH95
AG-E
PACSF37
DS-E
PACSG61
DS-E
PACSG63
DP-E
PACSG64
DP-E
PACSH97
DP-E
PACSF81
MA-E
PACSK52ST
PACSC36NA
PACIF010-E
PACIF011B-E
PACIF012B-E
P.184
P.187
P.189
P.191
P.193
P.196
P.199
P.201
P.203
P.205
P.207
P.209
P.223
P.224
P.225
P.225
P.225
E-5
SYSTEM CONTROL
Versatile system controls can be realised using optional parts, relay circuits, control panels, etc.
MAJOR SYSTEM CONTROL
Indoor Unit
Outdoor Unit
M Series Indoor Unit
M Series and MXZ Series Outdoor
System Examples
S Series & P Series Indoor Unit
S Series and MXZ Series Outdoor
P Series Indoor Unit
P Series Outdoor
MAC397IF-E
Indoor unit
PAR-21MAA Control
PAR-21MAA
Outdoor unit
Details
PAR-21MAA
Standard equipment (for indoor units compatible with wired remote controllers)
indoor unit
Major Optional
Parts Required
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
MAC-397IF-E
System Group Control
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
MAC-397IF-E
PAR-21MAA
PAR-21MAA
PAR-21MAA
Details
Major Optional
Parts Required
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Centralised On/Off
Control
Indoor unit
MAC-821SC-E
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
MAC-821SC-E
Indoor unit
MAC-397IF-E
Outdoor unit
MAC-397IF-E
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Details
Major Optional
Parts Required
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
City Multi
indoor unit
M-NET Connections
MAC-399IF-E
ME remote controller
(PAR-F27MEA)
Details
Major Optional
Parts Required
E-6
system controller
etc)
Power supply
unit
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
PAR-21MAA
MAC-399IF-E
PAR-21MAA
Power supply
kit
City Multi
indoor unit
Indoor unit
PAR21MAA
Indoor unit
PAR21MAA
system controller
Power supply
unit
system controller
PAC-SF81MA-E
OTHERS
For M Series Indoor Units (New A-control Models Only)
System Examples
On/Off
1 Remote
Operation
stopped remotely.
( 1 and 2 can be used in
combination)
MAC-397IF-E
MAC-397IF-E
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Control Details
Connect the interface to the air
conditioner. Then connect the
locally purchased remote controller
to the terminal in the interface.
On/Off operation is possible from
a remote location.
MAC-397IF (Interface)
box, lead wire, etc. (to be
purchased locally)
Remote control section
(to be purchased locally)
Outdoor unit
Display of
2 Remote
Operation Status
conditioners can be confirmed
remotely.
( 1 and 2 can be used in
combination)
Switch
Indoor unit
Major Optional
Parts Required
Connection Details
Power supply Connect the interface to the air
conditioner. Then connect the
locally purchased remote controller
to the terminal in the interface.
Resistance LED
The operation status
(On/Off) or error signals can be
monitored from a remote location.
MAC-397IF-E (Interface)
purchased locally (DC power
source needed)
Remote monitor section
(to be purchased locally)
For P Series and S Series Indoor Units
System Examples
Major Optional
Parts Required
Details
Wired remote controller Wireless remote controller
Controller
A 2-remote
Control
connected to one group.
With two remote controllers, control
can be performed locally and
remotely from two locations.
PAR-21MAA
* Set "Main" and "Sub"
remote controllers.
(Example of 1 : 1 system)
Control by
B Operation
Level Signal
PAR-SL99B-E
(Example of Simultaneous Twin)
Adapter for
remote
On/Off
Wired remote
controller
Adapter for
remote
On/Off
Remote
control
panel
ment of temperature, fan speed, and airflow)
can be performed even when remote
controller operation is prohibited.
PAC-SE55RA-E
locally)
PAR-SL97A-E
timer.
(Example of 1 : 1 system x 2)
(Example of 1 : 1 system x 2)
Relay box (to be purchased) locally) Relay box (to be purchased locally)
Connector
cable for
remote
display
Remote
control
panel
Wired remote
controller
(Example of 1 : 1 system x 2)
Display of
D Remote
Operating Status
PAR-SL97A-E (Except for SLZ)
can be used in combination.
Relay box (to be purchased) locally) Relay box (to be purchased locally)
Air conditioner can be started/
stopped remotely. In addition,
On/Off operation by local remote
Remote
controller can be prohibited/permitted. control
panel
Control by
C Operation
Pulse Signal
PAR-21MAA
* When using wired and
wireless remote controllers
PAR-21MAA
PAR-21MAAT-E
PAR-SL97A-E
Connector
cable for
remote
display
Remote
control
panel
PAC-SA88HA-E / PAC-725AD
(10 pcs. x PAC-SA88HA-E)
locally)
PAR-SL97A-E
(Example of 1 : 1 system x 2)
Remote operation adapter/
Remote operation adapter/
Connector cable for remote display + Connector cable for remote display +
Relay box
Relay box
Operating status can be
displayed at a remote location.
Remote
display
panel
received at a remote location.
Remote
display
panel
received at a remote location (when
channeled through the PAC-SF40RM
no-voltage signal, when channeled through
the PAC-SA88HA-E DC 12V signal).
locally)
PAC-SA88HA-E / PAC-725AD
(10 pcs. x PAC-SA88HA-E)
PAC-SF40RM
*Unable to use with wireless remote controller
PAR-SL97A-E
PAR-21MAA
(Example of 1 : 1 system)
E Timer Operation
Allows On/Off operation with
timer
*For control by an external
timer, refer to B Operation
Control by Level Signal.
PAR-21MAA
(Example of 1 : 1 system)
locally)
(Example of Simultaneous Twin)
Weekly Timer:
On/Off and up to 8 pattern temperatures can
be set for each calendar day. (Initial setting)
Simple Timer:
On/Off can be set once each within 72 hr in
intervals of one hour.
Auto-off Timer:
Operation will be switched off after a certain
time elapse. Set time can be changed from
30 min. to 4 hr. at 30 min. intervals.
*Simple Timer and Auto-off Timer
cannot be used at the same time.
Standard functions of PAR-21MAA
E-7
Air Cleaning Filter
MAC-1300FT
Descriptions
Photo
• Air Cleaning Filter removes fine dust of 0.01 micron from air
by means of static electricity.
• DO NOT reuse Air Cleaning Filter even if it is washed.
Applicable Models
MSC-GE20VB
MSC-GE25VB
MSC-GE35VB
Specifications
Unit : mm
4
2+6%*
㧺㧱㨀
Dimensions
(4106
How to Use / How to Install
REPLACEMENT OF THE AIR CLEANING FILTER
When the capacity is lowered because of dirt, etc., it is necessary to replace the air cleaning filter.
Air cleaning filter replacement (about once every 4 months)
1
‫ع‬
Remove the catechin air filter.
Catechin air filter
2
‫ع‬
3
‫ع‬
Install a new air cleaning filter.
4
‫ع‬
Install the catechin air filter and securely
Remove the air cleaning filter (White bellows
type).
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Install.
Air cleaning filter
Air cleaning filter
࡮ If the air cleaning filter is clogged, it may lower the unit'sh
s capacity or cause condensation at the air outlet.
࡮ The air cleaning filter is disposable. The standard usable term is about 4 months. However, if the colour of the filter turns
to dark brown, replace the filter at once.
E-8
Air Cleaning Filter
MAC-1700FT
Descriptions
Photo
· Air Cleaning Filter removes fine dust of 0.01 micron from air
by means of static electricity.
· DO NOT reuse Air Cleaning Filter even if it is washed.
Applicable Models
MS(H)-GE50VB
MS(H)-GA60VB
MS(H)-GD80VB
Specifications
Dimensions
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
REPLACEMENT OF THE AIR CLEANING FILTER (OPTION)
When the capacity is lowered because of dirt, etc., it is necessary to replace the air cleaning filter.
Air cleaning filter replacement
Remove the catechin air filter.
Catechin air filter
Install a new air cleaning filter.
2
Install the catechin air filter and securely
close the front panel.
Remove the air cleaning filter (White bellows
type).
OPTIONAL
2
1
Air cleaning filter
Air cleaning filter
࡮ If the air cleaning filter is clogged, it may lower the unit's capacity or cause condensation at the air outlet.
࡮ The air cleaning filter is disposable. The standard usable term is about 4 months. However, if the colour of the filter turns
to dark brown, replace the filter at once.
E-9
PARTS
1
About once every 4 months
PLATINUM CATALYST DEODORIZING FILTER MAC-307FT-E
Descriptions
Photo
Minimum holes as small as 1 nanometer on a surface of
approx imately 3,000m² capture small foul-smeling substances
in the air, then break down the source of the odors with the
power of the ozone generated in a plasma electrode unit and
the platinum catalyst contained in the filter.
Applicable Models
MSZ-FD25VA(S)
MSZ-FD35VA(S)
MSZ-FD50VA(S)
Specifications
Dimensions
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
Front panel
OPTIONAL
PARTS
1. Lift the front panel until a “click” is heard.
2. Hold the hinges and pull to remove as shown in the above illustration.
• Wipe with a soft dry cloth or wash it with water.
• Do not soak it in water for more than two hours.
• Dry it well in shade before installing it.
3. Install the panel by following the removal
procedure in reverse. Close the front panel
securely and press the positions indicated by
the arrows.
E-10
Every 3 months:
• Remove dirt by a vacuum cleaner, or soak the filter in lukewarm water
(30 to 40°C) for about 15 minutes. Rinse well.
• After washing, dry it well in shade and put it back to its original position.
• Deodorizing feature recovers by cleaning the filter.
When dirt or smell cannot be removed by cleaning:
• Replace it with a new air cleaning filter.
• Parts Number MAC-307FT-E
Anti-Allergy Enzyme Filter
MAC-2300FT
Descriptions
Photo
This filter catches dead mites and their droppings, pollen and
other allergens on the filter filament, then decomposes them
with artificial enzymes.
(Artificial enzyme catalyst on the filament catches the allergens
and helps the chemical reaction with Oxygen and severs the
S-S* bonds. *S=Sulfur atoms)
Applicable Models
MSZ-GA60VA
MSZ-GA71VA
Specifications
Color
Material
Weight
Dimensions
Frame: White, Filter: Light blue
Frame: PP, Filter: Polyester, rayon
16g
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
REPLACEMENT OF THE AIR CLEANING FILTER (OPTION)
Air cleaning filter replacement
Remove the catechin air filter.
Catechin air filter
Install a new air cleaning filter.
2
Install the catechin air filter and securely
close the front panel.
Remove the air cleaning filter
(Anti-allergy enzyme filter: blue bellows type).
OPTIONAL
2
1
Air cleaning filter
Air cleaning filter
࡮ If the air cleaning filter is clogged, it may lower the unit's capacity or cause condensation at the air outlet.
࡮ If AIR CLEANING FILTER is to be washed, soak AIR CLEANING FILTER in water (when showing dirt, in lukewarm water)
and rinse it delicately, without removing the filter from the frame about once every 3 months.
E-11
PARTS
1
Every year
Anti-Allergy Enzyme Filter
MAC-415FT-E
Descriptions
Photo
This filter catches dead mites and their droppings, pollen and
other allergens on the filter filament, then decomposes them
with artificial enzymes.
(Artificial enzyme catalyst on the filament catches the allergens
and helps the chemical reaction with Oxygen and severs the
S-S* bonds. *S=Sulfur atoms)
Applicable Models
MFZ-KA25VA
MFZ-KA35VA
MFZ-KA50VA
Specifications
Unit : mm
Color
Material
Weight
Frame: White, Filter: Light blue
Frame: PP, Filter: Polyester, rayon
16g
Dimensions
How to Use / How to Install
Air cleaning filter replacement
1
Remove the catechin air filter.
Every year
1
Attach a new air cleaning filter. Fix the filter
with the tabs securely.
Open the front grille
Catechin
air filter
OPTIONAL
PARTS
2
Remove the air cleaning filter.
Air cleaning filter
2
Catechin air filter
Install the catechin air filter.
Be sure to install its both ends into the tabs
as shown below.
Install.
3
E-12
Securely close the front grille.
Air cleaning filter
If the air cleaning filter is clogged,
it may lower the unit's
capacity or cause condensation
at the air outlet.
If AIR CLEANING FILTER is to be washed,
soak AIR CLEANING FILTER in water
(when showing dirt, in lukewarm water)
and rinse it delicately, without removing
the filter from the frame about once every
3 months.
Anti-Allergy Enzyme Filter
MAC-408FT-E
Descriptions
Photo
This filter catches dead mites and their droppings, pollen and
other allergens on the filter filament, then decomposes them
with artificial enzymes.
(Artificial enzyme catalyst on the filament catches the allergens
and helps the chemical reaction with Oxygen and severs the
S-S* bonds. *S=Sulfur atoms)
Applicable Models
MSZ-GE22VA
MSZ-GE42VA
MSZ-GE25VA
MSZ-GE50VA
MSZ-GE35VA
Specifications
Dimensions
Material
Filter: Polyester, reyon, actylicresin
Frame: Polypropylen
Color (Filter)
Light blue
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
Back side of air filter
1. Lift the front panel until a “click” is heard.
2. Hold the hinges and pull to remove as shown in the above illustration.
• Wipe with a soft dry cloth or wash it with water.
• Do not soak it in water for more than two hours.
• Dry it well in shade before installing it.
3. Install the panel by following the removal
procedure in reverse. Close the front panel
securely and press the positions indicated
by the arrows.
What is “Catechin air filter” ?
Catechin is a bioflavonoid that is found in green tea that has both antiviral and antioxidant qualities. In addition to these benefits, Catechin also
offers excellent deodorizing characteristics. Catechin air filter uses this
compound to not only improve air quality but also prevent the spread of
bacteria and viruses in the room.
E-13
PARTS
Hinge
Hole
• Clean every 3 months.
• Soak the filter together with its frame in lukewarm water and wash
it.
• After washing, dry it well in shade and put it back to its original position.
Install all tabs of the air filter.
• Replace it with a new air cleaning
filter every year for best performance.
• Parts Number MAC-408FT-E
Pull to remove from the air filter
OPTIONAL
Front panel
Anti-Allergy Enzyme Filter
MAC-171FT-E
Descriptions
Photo
This filter catches dead mites and their droppings, pollen and
other allergens on the filter filament, then decomposes them
with artificial enzymes.
(Artificial enzyme catalyst on the filament catches the allergens
and helps the chemical reaction with Oxygen and severs the
S-S* bonds. *S=Sulfur atoms)
Applicable Models
MLZ-KA25VA
MLZ-KA35VA
MLZ-KA50VA
Specifications
Dimensions
Color
Surface treatment
White
Foundation
Material
Frame: PP resin
Filter: Transfomation system, Polypropylene,
unwoven cloth.
Weigh
50g/piece (2piece/1unit)
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
Intake grille
1. Press PUSH indicated on the intake grille until a “click” is heard.
2. Hold the tabs on both ends of the intake grille, and pull down to open.
Air cleaning filter
(Anti-Allergy Enzyme Filter, option)
Back side of air filter
• Clean every 3 months.
• Soak the filter together with its frame in lukewarm water and wash it.
• After washing, dry it well in shade and put it back to its original position.
Install all tabs of the air filter.
• Replace it with a new air cleaning filter every year for best performance.
• Parts Number MAC-171FT-E
What is “Catechin air filter” ?
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Catechin is a bioflavonoid that is found in green tea that has both antiviral and antioxidant qualities. In addition to these benefits, Catechin also
offers excellent deodorizing characteristics. Catechin air filter uses this
compound to not only improve air quality but also prevent the spread of
bacteria and viruses in the room.
E-14
Anti-Allergen Electric Enzyme Filter
MAC-417FT-E
Descriptions
Photo
The power of the static electricity charged in the filter and
the plasma generated in the plasma electrode unit team
up to capture the bactaria, polen and other allergens in the
air, which are then neutralized with the enzyme in the filter.
Applicable Models
MSZ-FD25VA(S)
MSZ-FD35VA(S)
MSZ-FD50VA(S)
Specifications
Dimensions
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
Every 3 months:
• Remove dirt by a vacuum cleaner, or soak the filter in lukewarm water
(30 to 40°C) for about 15 minutes. Rinse well.
• After washing, dry it well in shade and put it back to its original position.
• Deodorizing feature recovers by cleaning the filter.
When dirt or smell cannot be removed by cleaning:
• Replace it with a new air cleaning filter.
• Parts Number MAC-417FT-E
OPTIONAL
1. Lift the front panel until a “click” is heard.
2. Hold the hinges and pull to remove as shown in the above illustration.
• Wipe with a soft dry cloth or wash it with water.
• Do not soak it in water for more than two hours.
• Dry it well in shade before installing it.
3. Install the panel by following the removal
procedure in reverse. Close the front panel
securely and press the positions indicated by
the arrows.
E-15
PARTS
Front panel
Catechin Air Filter
MAC-3003CF
Descriptions
Photo
Catechin is a bioflavonoid that is found in green tea that has
both antiviral and anotioxidant gualties.
In addition to these benefits, Catechin also ofters excellent
deodorizing characteristics.
Catechin air filter uses this compound to not only improve air
guality but also prevent the spread of bacteria and viruses in
the room.
Applicable Models
MSZ-HC25VA
MSZ-HC35VA(B)
Specifications
Dimensions
Unit : mm
What is “Catechin air filter”?
The air filter is dyed with a natural material, catechin, that is
contained in tea. The catechin air filter deodorizes odor and
noxious gases such as formaldehyde, ammonia,
and acetaldehyde. Moreover, it restraints the activity of the
viruses adhering to the filter.
How to Use / How to Install
Holding the knob on the air filter, pull up the
filter slightly and then pull down to remove.
Open the front
panel, then
remove/replace
the filter.
Air filter
After washing with water/lukewarm water,
dry the air filter well in the shade.
• Do not expose the air filter to direct sunlight or heat
from a fire when drying it.
Remove.
CAUTION:
When the air filter is to be removed, do not touch the
metal parts of the indoor unit.
This may cause an injury.
Remove dirt from the air filter using a vacuum
cleaner or by washing the filter with water.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
• Do not wash with scrubbing brush or hard surface
of sponge. Otherwise, the filter may deform.
• If the dirt is noticeable, wash the filter with a solution of mild detergent diluted in lukewarm water.
• If hot water (50°C or more) is used, the filter may
be deformed.
E-16
Install the air filter.
(Securely install its tabs.)
Install.
Catechin Air Filter
MAC-3004CF-E
Descriptions
Photo
Catechin air filter uses this compound to not only improve air
guality but also prevent the spread and viruses in the room.
Applicable Models
MLZ-KA25VA
MLZ-KA35VA
MLZ-KA50VA
Specifications
Dimensions
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
Intake grille
(1). Press PUSH indicated on the intake grille until a “click” is heard.
(2). Hold the tabs on both ends of the intake grille, and pull down to open.
Replacement of the air cleaning filter
(2) Install a new catechin air filter.
Be sure to install the tabs into the intake grille hole.
OPTIONAL
Catechin
air filter
Open the intake grille
tabs
(3) Securely close the intake grille.
E-17
PARTS
(1) Remove the catechin air filter.
Oil Mist Filter Element
PAC-SG38KF-E
(12 pieces)
Descriptions
Photo
Filter Element (12 Pieces) for ceiling suspended models for
professional kitchen use.
Applicable Models
PCA-RP71HA
PCA-RP125HA
Specifications
Material
Color
Temperature
Reproduction
Packing
Modacrylic fiber / Polyester
Black
60 or less
Disposable (Reproduction not possible)
12 elements per bag
Note: Only the filter element must be replaced
(the filter frame provided on the main body must be used)
Unit : mm
280r3
Dimensions
355r3
5.5r
5VCVGQHKPUVCNNCVKQPVQHKNVGTHTCOG
16
(KNVGT(TCOG
288
OPTIONAL
PARTS
(KNVGTGNGOGPV
E-18
360
(KNVGTGNGOGPV
UWRRTGUUKQPOGVCNHKVVKPIU
8V[RG2%5
Oil Mist Filter Element (12 pieces) PAC-SG38KF-E
How to Use / How to Install
E-19
PARTS
OPTIONAL
RP71 → 3pieces
RP125 → 4pieces
High efficiency filter element
PAC-SH59KF-E
Descriptions
Photo
High Efficiency Filter is part that remove dust in air.
PAC-SH53TM-E (multi-function casement) is reguired for
installation.
Applicable Models
PLA-RP·BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Dust collection efficiency Colorimetric method 65% (JIS 11 class)
Filter element ,aterial
Electrrostatic polyolefin fiber
Life
Approx 2,500 hours
(at dust density 0.15 mg/m3)
*Reproduction not possible
Parts composition
This element x 1
Unit : mm
㪌㪈㪇
㪌㪈㪇
㪝㫀㫃㫋㪼㫉
㪝㫉㪸㫄㪼
㪧㪘㪚㪄㪪㪟䂾䂾㪢㪝㩿䂾䂾㩼㪀
㪘㪠㪩㩷㪝㪣㪦㪮
Dimensions
㪣㪸㪹㪼㫃㩷㩿㪻㫀㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫆㪽㩷㪸㫀㫉㩷㪽㫃㫆㫎
㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㫃㩷㫅㪸㫄㪼㩷㪻㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪀
OPTIONAL
PARTS
㪍㪌
E-20
High efficiency filter element PAC-SH59KF-E
E-21
PARTS
OPTIONAL
How to Use / How to Install
High Efficiency Filter
PAC-SE88/89/90KF-E
Descriptions
Photo
• High Effeciency Filter is part that remove dust in air.
Dust collection efficiency:70% (Weighing method)
• It is the best for the air-conditioning of the stove where a lot
of going of the person in and out exists.
Applicable Models and Specifications
Model
PAC-SH88KF-E PAC-SH89KF-E
Dust collection efficiency
Filter material
70% (weighing method)
PP fiber (antibacterial + mildew-proof),
honeycomb weave (Identification: gray yarn
woven)
Approx. 2,500 hours (varies with operating
conditions)
Maintenance
Filter (large)
—
Parts
composition Filter (small)
2
Applicable models
PCA-RP50KA
Dimensions
Unit : mm
5
8
Small
Large
208
205
A
B
How to Use / How to Install
Filter
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Intake grille
Knob
Stopper
Open the intake grille.
Hold the knob on the filter then pull the filter up in the direction of an
arrow. To replace the high efficiency filter, be sure to insert the filter far
enough until it fits into the stopper.
E-22
PAC-SH90KF-E
1
2
1
—
PCA-RP60,71KA PCA-RP100,125,140KA
A
432
752
B
425
745
Filter box
PAC-KE92/93/94/95TB-E
Photo
PAC-KE92TB-E
PAC-KE93TB-E
PAC-KE94TB-E
PAC-KE95TB-E
Applicable
models
PEAD-RP35JA(L)
PEAD-RP50JA(L)
PEAD-RP60JA(L)
PEAD-RP71JA(L)
PEAD-RP100JA(L)
PEAD-RP125JA(L)
PEAD-RP140JA(L)
E-23
PARTS
Model
OPTIONAL
Applicable Models
i-see sensor corner panel
PAC-SA1ME-E
Descriptions
Photo
• Both floor and inlet temperatures are measured to provide a
comfort sensation fully in a room covering from the ceiling to
the floor surfaces.
• Install the I-SEE sensor corner panel to the corner of the
decorative panel (the opposite side of refrigerant piping).
Applicable Models
PLA-RP·BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Connect the 9-core cord with connector to the indoor
controller board of the indoor unit.
Exterior
ABS resin (Munsell No.6.4Y8.9/0.4)
When these is great difference between the room
I-SEE sensor operation temperature and the set temperature, temperatures of
four areas are measured once in two minutes.When
the room temperature is stable, the i-see sensor rotates.
Adapter wiring
Dimensions
Unit : mm
6
19
256
6
19
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-24
i-see sensor corner panel PAC-SA1ME-E
E-25
PARTS
OPTIONAL
How to Use / How to Install
Air outlet shutter panel
PAC-SH51SP-E
Descriptions
Photo
Part to block the air outlet of a cassette-type indoor unit.
Applicable Models
PLA-RP·BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Number of shutter plates
4 directions → 3 directions
1
4 directions → 2 directions
2
(Change to 1 direction is not possible.)
Air outlet pattern
Note 1: Selecting “2 directions” requires cleaning of the filter approximately once.
(Filter clogging may cause cooling/heating performance to drop.)
Note 2: Selecting “3 directions” or “2 directions” may increase operating sound.
Note 3: “2 directions” should not be selected when operating in high-temperature/high-humidity environment.
(Dew formation or dewdrop may result.)
Foamed polyethylene + Foamed urethane
Material
Color
Black
Installation method Glued to the air outlet of the indoor unit.
Dimensions
Unit : mm
80
520
OPTIONAL
PARTS
(3)
5
Adhesive face Formed polyethylene
(2)
Release coated paper
Formed urethane
E-26
Air Outlet Shutte Panel PAC-SH51SP-E
How to Use / How to Install
E-27
PARTS
OPTIONAL
No.,
Multi-functional casement
PAC-SH53TM-E
Descriptions
Photo
A part reguired installation of a high-efficiency filter element.
Can also beused for introducing fresh air from outdoor.
Applicable Models
PLA-RP·BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Connected duct diameter (mm)
Fresh Number of intakes
air
intake Input volume
High-performance filter element
Dimensions
Any 2 corners or less
(among four corners)
20% or less of indoor units air volume
Colorimetric method (65%)
Unit : mm
㪪㪼㪼㩷㪽㫉㫆㫄㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㪸㫅㪼㫃㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
㩿㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㪀
㪠㫅㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
㩿㪮㫀㫋㪿㩷㫊㪼㪸㫃㩷㫄㪸㫋㪼㫉㫀㪸㫃㪀㩷
㩿㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㪀
㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃㩷㫊㪼㪺㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷
㪹㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋㪼㪸㪺㪿㩷㪺㫆㫉㫅㪼㫉
㩿㪘㪺㪺㪼㫊㫊㫆㫉㫀㪼㫊㪀
㪠㫅㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫉㪼㪽㫉㫀㪾㪼㫉㪸㫅㫋㩷㫋㫌㪹㪼㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
㪠㫅㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㪻㫉㪸㫀㫅㩷㫋㫌㪹㪼㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪻㫀㫄㪼㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪚㫌㫋㩷㫆㪽㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼
㪉㪅㪏㩷㪙㫌㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼
OPTIONAL
PARTS
㪈㪉㪌㩷㪙㫌㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿
E-28
㪟㪼㫀㪾㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪺㪼㫀㫃㫀㫅㪾
㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃㩷㪻㫉㪸㫎㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪽㫉㪼㫊㪿㩷㪸㫀㫉㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪸㫂㪼
㩿㪋㩷㪺㫆㫉㫅㪼㫉㩷㫊㪸㫄㪼㩷㫊㪿㪸㫇㪼㪀
㪠㫅㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋
㪤㪸㫃㫋㪼㪄㪝㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃
㪚㪸㫊㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋
㶎㪥㫆㫋㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫇㪸㪺㪼㩷㪹㪼㫋㫎㪼㪼㫅
㩷㩷㩷㪺㪼㫀㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㫌㫉㪽㪸㪺㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㪸㫅㪻
䇭
㩷㩷㩷㪺㪼㫀㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㫃㪸㪹㪃㪼㫋㪺㪅
㩷㩷㩷㩷㫄㫌㫊㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㪈㪇㩷㫋㫆㪈㪌㫄㫄㪅
㪚㪼㫀㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫊㫌㫉㪽㪸㪺㪼
㫇㪸㫅㪼㫃
㪣㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㫌㫃㫋㪼㪄㪝㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪚㪸㫊㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㪅
Multi-Functional Casement PAC-SH53TM-E
How to Use / How to Install
E-29
PARTS
OPTIONAL
No.,
Multi-Functional Casement PAC-SH53TM-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-30
E-31
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Multi-Functional Casement PAC-SH53TM-E
Multi-Functional Casement PAC-SH53TM-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-32
Duct flange for fresh air intake
PAC-SH65OF-E
Descriptions
Photo
Part to attach aduct to take in fresh air from outdoors.
Applicable Models
PLA-RP•BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Connection duct
diameter (mm)
Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet (t0.8)
Accessory
Insulator Fixing screw (ST4x10)x3
70
15
0°
8
13.8
(φ114.4)
R5
Ǿ100
12
SR8
0°
12
5
2
Ǿ1
3-φ5hole
Ǿ100
E-33
PARTS
15
OPTIONAL
8
Material
Unit : mm
20
12.5
Dimensions
200
Dust flage for fresh air intake PAC-SH65OF-E
How to Use / How to Install
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-34
Duct Flange for Fresh Air
PAC-SF28OF-E
Descriptions
Photo
Part to attach a duct to take in fresh air from outdoors.
Applicable Models
PCA-RP71HA
PCA-RP125HA
TO
T
O BE
E CONFIRMED
CONF
FIRMED
Specifications
Connecting duct diameter (mm) 200
Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet
Material
(t0.8)
Fixing screw (ST4x10) x 4
Accessory
Dimensions
Unit : mm
4-Ǟ5 JQNG
Ǿ P
KQ
V
C
N
J
VCN
KP RKVE
Ǿ
5GCN
OCVGTKCN
How to Use / How to Install
1. Checking Provided Parts
ԘDuct flange
ԙTapping screws (4x10)
̪Make sure that you have all the following parts
before installation:
˜㧝
ԙTapping
screw
Knockout
opening
3. Duct Installation Procedure
1. Securely fix the duct (with inner diameter 200 mm) procured at local
site to the duct flange, using screws or band.
Screw
(procured at local site)
Band
(procured at local site)
Duct flange
ԘDuct flange
Duct
(procured at local site)
E-35
PARTS
1. Punch out the knockout opening for installing duct on indoor unit.
2. Use the provided tapping screws ԙ to secure duct flange Ԙ.
OPTIONAL
2. Duct Flange Installation Procedure
˜4
Space panel
PAC-SH48AS-E
Descriptions
Photo
Enables to install cassete-type indoor units even if the ceiling
height is low.
A part to the panel 40 milimeters lower than the ceiling surface.
Applicable Models
PLA-RP·BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Color (Mansell No.)
Surface treatment
Material
Exterior
Dimensions
Unit : mm
Desigh side&Paint work
(all surroundings)
977
860
848
48
2
40
Division
line
848
860
977
3
4
R
Installation dimension
Ceiling hole
860×860∼910×910
(840)
OPTIONAL
PARTS
35
40
0
23-5
Indoor unit
Ceiling surface
Space panel
Indoor unit lower side
E-36
Decorative panel
950
977
(848)
hole
Division line
952
(Panel set part)
150
R
2
2
R
64
3
R4
(10)
150
Pure White (6.4Y 8.9/0.4)
Coating
Styrofoam
Space panel PAC-SH48AS-E
E-37
PARTS
OPTIONAL
How to Use / How to Install
Quick Clean Kit
MAC-093SS-E
Descriptions
Photo
Quick Clean Kit can be easily connected to a household
vacuum cleaner for quick, convenient cleaning of the units* .
* It is highly recommended to wear rubber gloves when cleaning the heat
exchanger. Touching the heat exchanger with the bare hands can cause injury.
Applicable Models
MSZ-FD25VA(S)
MSZ-FD35VA(S)
MSZ-FD50VA(S)
MSZ-GE22VA
MSZ-GE25VA
MSZ-GE35VA
MSZ-GE42VA
MSZ-GE50VA
Specifications
Material
HEAD ASSY : ABS + nylon
HOSE ASSY : ABS + PE
HEAD-2 ASSY : ABS + Plasticized PVC + nylon
HOSE ASSY : ABS
Color
HEAD ASSY : gray + black
HOSE ASSY : gray
HEAD-2 ASSY : gray + black
HOSE ASSY : gray
Dimensions
54
Ћ44
43
Unit : mm
6:7
IPTF!BTTZ
7:/6
OPTIONAL
PARTS
43/2
IFBE!BTTZ
E-38
233
27
221
51
Ћ42/6
38
71
9/2
43/2
IFBE.3!BTTZ
9/2
FMCPX
46/4
Quick Clean Kit MAC-093SS-E
How to Use / How to Install
CLEANING USES
Front panel access models
Quick-clean models
Example: Access to the fan is possible.
The heat exchanger can be cleaned.
The fan can be cleaned.
CLEANING METHODS
Only available for the hose diameter of vacuum cleaner : 32 - 39 mm (inside diameter).
1.Before cleaning
Before cleaning the air conditioner, switch it off and turn off the breaker and/or remove the power supply plug to ensure safety.
2.Conection with a vacuum cleaner
Insert the end of the connection hose into one of the special-made brushes.
Connection
Use the special-made brush (large) for overall cleaning
hose
Vacuum cleaner tube
and use the special-made brush (small) to access narVacuum
row spaces.
cleaner
While twisting the connection hose, insert it securely into
the vacuum cleaner tube.
Use the universal adapter
if necessary.
Use the universal adapter if necessary.
2.Cleaning of the heat exchanger
Let the heat exchanger dry completely before cleaning it.
(If the heat exchanger is wet, you may not be able to vacuum up the
dust.)
Open the front panel and remove the air filter to expose the heat exchanger.
Do not touch the heat exchanger directly with your bare hands; injury
may result. Wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands.
Clean the heat exchanger vertically, moving the brush along the fins of
the heat exchanger. (The heat exchanger may be damaged if it is cleaned
horizontally.)
Use the special-made brush (small) to clean the hard to reach, narrow
spaces such as the top and bottom of the heat exchanger.
Special-made
brush (large or
small)
With the special-made brush (large)
Heat exchanger
With the special-made brush (small)
Heat exchanger
3.Cleaning of the fan
Remove the horizontal vane and swing out the vertical vane. Clean the
fan horizontally, moving the brush along the blades of the fan.
(Please refer to the operating instructions about the way to remove the
horizontal vane and swing out the vertical vane.)
Vertical vane
CAUTION:
Some vacuume cleaners are equipped for overload protection devices, which might work if the airflow thought
the vaccume cleaner hose is restricted. In that case, use them at the low power setting.
If the special-made brushes become dirty, wash them with water and let them dry completely out of direct
sunlight.
When cleaning the air conditioner, do not stand on an unstable bench or chair. This may cause an injury, etc.,
if you fall down.
Please refer to the operating instructions of the airconditioner for more details.
E-39
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Horizontal vane
Drain Pump
PAC-SH94DM-E
for Wall Mounted models
Descriptions
Photo
Raises drain generated during unit's operation to seure the
appropriate angle of the drain pipe.
Applicable Models
PKA-RP60KAL
PKA-RP71KAL
PKA-RP100KAL
Specifications
220-240V 50Hz / 60Hz
12 / 10.8W
0.114 / 0.092A
Max. 500mm from drain pump's top
surface
Rated voltage
Power cunsumption
Operating current
Discharge lift
241/h or more
300 (H) x 300 (W) x 187 (D)
Cover : ABS resin (Munsell 6.4Y 8.9/0.4)
Single, shading type (Class E insulation)
Connected to drain outlet.
PVC pipe VP-20 (O.D.26) can be
used
Discharge rate
External dimensions (mm)
Exterior
Driving motor
Drain piping
Dimensions
21
Dimension of Mounting plate
78.5
55 (Space for piping)
120
85
90 30 80
Indoor unit
50
Tube band position
2 - ø12 dia. hole
(M10 or W3/8)
8
167
Hole for
Indoor
unit
piping
300
30
18
Mounting
plate
800 (Max. lift)
Flexible drain tube
(VP20) port (female)
Refrigerant pipe
(Two pipes can be
raised together)
305
6 - ø5 dia. hole
(M4 x 35)
Paper pattern
187
300
Required space for installation of Drain Pump
3
1,170
* The same space is
required for the left front
and rear piping.
5
365
250 or more
[Maintenance space]
* In case that there is a rim at the corner of ceiling,
consider the dimension of the rim before installation.
*
108 or
more
300
275
R 20
500 (Max. lift)
Knock out hole
for piping
70
79
Unit : mm
Obstruction
60 or less
Drain Pump
550 or more
100.5 or more
Accessories
(Make sure of the following items attached with the Drain Pump before installation.)
OPTIONAL
PARTS
(A) Drain
Pump
(B) Screw
x1
(M4 x 16) x 1
(M4 x 35) x 6
(C) Drain
tube
(D) Drain tube (E) Tube clip
cover
x1
x1
x1
(F) Pull tight
x1
(G) Paper
pattern
(H) Wiring
plate
x1
* The items (B) – (F) are packed between main body and cover of the Drain Pump. Take them out after the cover removed.
E-40
x1
Drain Pump for Wall Mounted models PAC-SH94DM-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Before installation of the Drain Pump
1-1 Set up of the Drain Pump
●
●
●
(* Position the indoor unit first.)
Remove the cover and the mounting plate which is fixed on the back of the Drain Pump each.
* The packaging material which is put between the cover and the main body of Drain Pump is only for cushion for
transportation. Take it out as it is unnecessary.
* Take out the accessories.
Run the pull tight (F) attached through the square hole on the mounting plate.
Cut the knock out hole on the cover with a nipper and etc.
Cover
Mounting plate
Screws (4 pcs)
Pull tight (F)
Screws (4 pcs)
Main body of
Drain Pump
* The screws removed will be used later. Keep them not to lose.
1-2 Set up and installation of the indoor unit
(* See the item of piping connection set up in the installation manual of the indoor unit.)
(1) Make the knock out hole for left side piping on the left side panel of the indoor unit.
(2) Pull out the drain cap from the left
drain outlet.
● Hold the convex section at the
end and pull the drain cap.
(3) Remove the drain hose from the
indoor unit.
● Hold the end of the drain hose (a)
(marked by the arrow) and pull the
drain hose out (b).
(6) Install the indoor unit.
CAUTION
Drain
cap
(a)
(b)
(4) Insert the drain cap into the
right drain outlet.
● Insert a screwdriver or similar tool
into the hole at the end of the cap and
insert the cap fully into the outlet.
Drain
cap
Drain
cap
(5) Insert the accessory drain hose (C)
Hook
into the left drain outlet.
● Insert the hose up to the base of the
drain pipe connection opening.
*
Make sure that the hook on the drain
hose is securely caught on the projection in the opening in the drain pan.
The indoor unit must be installed horizontally.
Otherwise, the water can leak and it will make the wall dirty.
2. Installation of the Drain Pump
2-1 Fixing of the mounting plate
(2)
(3)
(4)
Marking
Indoor unit
Screw (B)
M4 x 16
Paper pattern (G)
E-41
PARTS
(1)
The installation place should be carefully considered if it is proper
for installation. If it is not strong enough to hole the unit, make it
stronger by using board or beam before installation.
Decide the installation position of the mounting plate by using the
Mounting plate
paper pattern (G) attached.
(* The left end of the indoor unit should be marked in advance.)
1) Fix the paper pattern on the wall with the screw (B) (M4 × 16)
attached with putting it to the left end of the indoor unit for
positioning of the Drain Pump as shown in the drawing.
2) Position the mounting plate with pushing it against the paper
pattern.
Fix the mounting plate with the screws (B) (M4 × 35) attached. Fix
the mounting plate using the 5 dia. holes.
Align these 4 sides
(6 locations pointed by arrows in the drawing.)
with the paper
In case that the mounting plate is fixed by fixing bolts (through
pattern (G).
bolts, bolt anchors, or nut anchors), get M10 or W3/8 screws locally
and put them into two ø 12 holes of the mounting plate to fix it.
When the mounting plates is installed, remove the paper pattern.
Check that the mounting plate is level and positioned correctly
with the indoor unit. (Refer to Dimensions)
OPTIONAL
●
Drain Pump for Wall Mounted models PAC-SH94DM-E
2-2
Installation of the Drain Pump
● Fix the Drain Pump on the mounting plate
(1) Install the screws to the 2 upper holes (indicated by the arrows shown in right figure)
of the mounting plate by hand tightening them about halfway, and then hook
the Drain Pump on the screws.
(2) Level the Drain Pump by using a spirit level. Then tighten the 4 screws securely to fix the Drain Pump.
CAUTION
The Drain Pump must be leveled.
Otherwise, the water leaks and it makes wall dirty.
3. Installation of refrigerant piping
(* See the item of refrigerant piping connection in the Installation of the indoor unit.)
(1) Install the refrigerant piping using the left piping method.
(2) When the refrigerant piping and drain pipe are routed vertically together, route
the piping through the space in the mounting plate.
● Be sure that the indoor unit must be positioned at the place where was
marked at 2-1.
● The bending radius of the refrigerant pipe must be R80 or less.
● The tube raised should be fixed with the pull tight which was put through the
square hole of the mounting plate.
(3) Position the refrigerant piping in the left piping space of the indoor unit as
shown in right figure.
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Drain pipe
4. Installation of drain piping
4-1 Connection of drain tube
Drain tube (C)
(1) Connect the drain tube (C) which is installed to the left side drain port of the
indoor unit to the drain port of the Drain Pump.
(2) Fix the connection port securely with the tube clip (E) attached.
(3) Connect the flexible drain tube, which is run from the top panel of the Drain
Pump, to the local drain piping. The part connected must be closed by vinyl
chloride type glue.
(4) Insulate the flexible drain tube which is run from top panel of Drain Pump with
the drain tube cover (D) attached.
Tube clip (E)
4-2 Installation of drain piping
(1) The drain pipe should be installed in accordance with the following procedure.
● The drain pipe should be installed so that the outdoor side (drain side) becomes falling slope (1/100 or more) and do not make
trap or peaks.
● The horizontal run of the drain pipe should be 20 m or less. In case that the tube is crosscut sawing for long distance, some
support brackets should be installed to prevent the pipe from being wavy. Never install the air bleeder. The drain will blow out.
● The hard vinyl chloride pipe VP20 (outer dia. 26 mm) should be used for the drain pipe. And the part connected must be
closed by vinyl chloride type glue to prevent water leak.
● Be sure to wrap the drain pipe with adiabatic material (foam polyethylene: specific gravity 0.03, thickness 9 mm or more)
available on the market.
● Do not install stink trap to the outlet of the drain pipe.
● The outlet of the drain pipe should be installed the place where it is not possible to cause stink.
● In case that plural drain pipes are installed, install the main pipe so that it comes approximately 10 cm lower than the drain
outlet and the pipes must be made of material of VP30 or similar and they should be falling slope (1/100 or more).
● It is possible to raise the outlet of the drain pipe to 80 cm (max. lift) from bottom face of Drain Pump. However, if there is a
horizontal run pipe connected to the vertical section of the drain pipe, water will overflow from the drain pan. This is because
too much water will flow back when the operation stops. Therefore, the drain pipe must be raised vertically. Also, install the
flow back stop at the highest point to prevent the water from flow back from horizontal part of the pipe. See the drawing below.
Flow back stop
1.5~2 m
<Plural piping example>
OPTIONAL
PARTS
110
10
Supports
To outlet
To Drain Pump
E-42
Adiabatic material
Drain Falling slope 1/100 or more
Pump
As wide as possible
(10 cm or more)
Trap, Peaks
Air bleeder
80 cm or less
Make the connection at
the place (mm)
Vinyl chloride pipe for VP20
Commercial elbow joint 3 pcs
110
10
Horizontal
run pipe
Drain Pump
VP30
VP20
Stink trap
Falling slope 1/100 or more
Drain Pump for Wall Mounted models PAC-SH94DM-E
5. Electric wiring
5-1 Set up of the indoor unit
(* Confirm that the power is off before starting the installation work.)
(1) Remove the panel of indoor unit and the electric box cover. (* See the indoor unit installation section in the installation manual of the indoor unit.)
5-2 Electric wiring
●
●
Route the wiring through the left piping space of the
indoor unit to the electric box as shown in right figure.
Connect the lead wires to the connectors of the
indoor unit control board, and then place the slack
in the wires in the wiring storage space of the Drain
Pump. (Fix the lead wires with the clamps.)
Wiring storage space
Electric
box
Drain Pump
Left piping space
5-3 Electric wiring operation
●
●
●
Pull out the electric box as far as necessary
to connect the lead wires to the control board
connectors “CNP” and “CN4F”.
Connect the lead wires with connectors to
the control board connectors “CNP” and
“CN4F”. At this time, remove the bypass
connector (will be unused) from the terminal
CN4F of the control board.
Be sure not to have the lead wires touch the
heat generator (heat sink) on the control board.
Electric wiring operation
Electric box
I.B
Drain Pump
TB
Terminal block
(indoor/outdoor
connecting line)
FS
XP
I.B
Indoor control
board
DP
CNP
Connector
(Drain Pump)
CN4F
Connector
(Float switch)
DP
Drain Pump
FS
Float switch
XP
Relay (Drain
Pump)
CNP
TB
Note:
stands for terminal connection.
stands for connector joint.
Affix the wiring plate (H) to the
rear of the panel.
Panel of indoor
unit
Symbol Name
CN4F
●
Wiring Plate (H)
Lead
wires
Electric circuit diagram
Indoor unit
Wiring plate
●
After completing the electric wiring operation, make sure
that the hooks are securely caught on the unit, and then put
the electric box cover and panel back in place.
hook
6. Test run
After the installation of the Drain Pump has been completed, make sure that the drain works correctly and the
water does not leak from any part of connection.
OPTIONAL
(1) Pour water
Pour water approximately 800 cc to the drain pan. (* See the drain pipe [checking the drain flow] section in the
installation manual of the indoor unit.)
(* If the water is poured too much, it is possible that the drainage does not work due to alarm stop by activation of
drain over flow protection device.)
(2) Test run
In accordance with the procedure for test run in the installation manual for the indoor unit, operate the air cooling
and make sure that the drainage works and the water does not leak.
* When the Drain Pump is installed in winter season, the water must be drained.
To drain water, remove the drain plug under the Drain Pump. Prepare the pan to receive drain.
When the drainage has been completed, put the drain plug back in place.
(3) After checking, put the cover back in place.
* Make sure that the left end of the indoor unit perfectly comes on the point marked at 2-1. (If they do not match,
the cover will not be able to be installed or there will be a gap between the cover and the indoor unit.)
E-43
PARTS
●
Drain Pump
PAC-SH75DM-E
for Wall Mounted models
Descriptions
Photo
Raises drain generated during unit's operation to seure the
appropriate angle of the drain pipe.
Applicable Models
PKA-RP35HAL
PKA-RP50HAL
Specifications
220-240V 50Hz / 60Hz
12 / 10.8W
0.114 / 0.092A
Max. 500mm from drain pump's top
surface
Rated voltage
Power cunsumption
Operating current
Discharge lift
241/h or more
300 (H) x 300 (W) x 187 (D)
Cover : ABS resin (Munsell 6.4Y 8.9/0.4)
Single, shading type (Class E insulation)
Connected to drain outlet.
PVC pipe VP-20 (O.D.26) can be
used
Discharge rate
External dimensions (mm)
Exterior
Driving motor
Drain piping
Dimensions
21
Dimension of Mounting plate
78.5
55 (Space for piping)
120
85
300
*
3
Paper pattern
898
295
250 or more
consider the dimension of the rim before installation.
70
90 30 80
50
254
Required space for installation of Drain Pump
[Maintenance space]
Tube band position
2 - ø12 dia. hole
(M10 or W3/8)
6 - ø5 dia. hole
(M4 x 35)
187
* In case that there is a rim at the corner of ceiling,
Indoor unit
12
167
300
Hole for
Indoor
unit
piping
55 or
more
Flexible drain tube
(VP20) port (female)
Refrigerant pipe
(Two pipes can be
raised together)
23
18
Mounting
plate
800 (Max. lift)
275
R 20
500 (Max. lift)
Knock out hole
for piping
Obstruction
550 or more
60 or less
* The same space is
required for the left front
and rear piping.
15
79
Unit : mm
Drain Pump
150 or more
Accessories
(Make sure of the following items attached with the Drain Pump before installation.)
OPTIONAL
PARTS
(A) Drain
Pump
(B) Screw
x1
(M4 x 16) x 1
(M4 x 35) x 6
(C) Drain
tube
(D) Drain tube (E) Tube clip
cover
x1
x1
x1
(F) Pull tight
x1
(G) Paper
pattern
(H) Wiring
plate
x1
* The items (B) – (F) are packed between main body and cover of the Drain Pump. Take them out after the cover removed.
E-44
x1
Drain Pump for Wall Mounted models PAC-SH75DM-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Before installation of the Drain Pump
1-1 Set up of the Drain Pump
●
●
●
(* Position the indoor unit first.)
Remove the cover and the mounting plate which is fixed on the back of the Drain Pump each.
* The packaging material which is put between the cover and the main body of Drain Pump is only for cushion for
transportation. Take it out as it is unnecessary.
* Take out the accessories.
Run the pull tight (F) attached through the square hole on the mounting plate.
Cut the knock out hole on the cover with a nipper and etc.
Cover
Mounting plate
Screws (4 pcs)
Pull tight (F)
Screws (4 pcs)
Main body of
Drain Pump
* The screws removed will be used later. Keep them not to lose.
1-2 Set up and installation of the indoor unit
(* See the item of piping connection set up in the installation manual of the indoor unit.)
(1) Make the knock out hole for left side piping on the left side panel of the indoor unit.
(2) Pull out the drain cap from the left
drain outlet.
● Hold the convex section at the
end and pull the drain cap.
(3) Remove the drain hose from the
indoor unit.
● Hold the end of the drain hose (a)
(marked by the arrow) and pull the
drain hose out (b).
(6) Install the indoor unit.
CAUTION
Drain
cap
(a)
(b)
(4) Insert the drain cap into the
right drain outlet.
● Insert a screwdriver or similar tool
into the hole at the end of the cap and
insert the cap fully into the outlet.
Drain
cap
Drain
cap
(5) Insert the accessory drain hose (C)
Hook
into the left drain outlet.
● Insert the hose up to the base of the
drain pipe connection opening.
*
Make sure that the hook on the drain
hose is securely caught on the projection in the opening in the drain pan.
The indoor unit must be installed horizontally.
Otherwise, the water can leak and it will make the wall dirty.
2. Installation of the Drain Pump
2-1 Fixing of the mounting plate
(2)
(3)
(4)
Mounting plate
Align these 4 sides
with the paper
pattern (G).
Marking
Indoor unit
Screw (B)
M4 × 16
Paper pattern (G)
E-45
PARTS
(1)
The installation place should be carefully considered if it is proper
for installation. If it is not strong enough to hole the unit, make it
stronger by using board or beam before installation.
Decide the installation position of the mounting plate by using the
paper pattern (G) attached.
(* The left end of the indoor unit should be marked in advance.)
1) Fix the paper pattern on the wall with the screw (B) (M4 × 16)
attached with putting it to the left end of the indoor unit for
positioning of the Drain Pump as shown in the drawing.
2) Position the mounting plate with pushing it against the paper
pattern.
Fix the mounting plate with the screws (B) (M4 × 35) attached. Fix
the mounting plate using the 5 dia. holes.
(6 locations pointed by arrows in the drawing.)
In case that the mounting plate is fixed by fixing bolts (through
bolts, bolt anchors, or nut anchors), get M10 or W3/8 screws locally
and put them into two ø 12 holes of the mounting plate to fix it.
When the mounting plates is installed, remove the paper pattern.
Check that the mounting plate is level and positioned correctly
with the indoor unit. (Refer to Dimensions)
OPTIONAL
●
Drain Pump for Wall Mounted models PAC-SH75DM-E
2-2
Installation of the Drain Pump
● Fix the Drain Pump on the mounting plate.
(1) Install the screws to the 2 upper holes (indicated by the arrows shown in right figure)
of the mounting plate by hand tightening them about halfway, and then hook
the Drain Pump on the screws.
(2) Level the Drain Pump by using a spirit level. Then tighten the 4 screws securely to fix the Drain Pump.
CAUTION
The Drain Pump must be leveled.
Otherwise, the water leaks and it makes wall dirty.
3. Installation of refrigerant piping
(* See the item of refrigerant piping connection in the Installation of the indoor unit.)
(1) Install the refrigerant piping using the left piping method.
(2) When the refrigerant piping and drain pipe are routed vertically together, route
the piping through the space in the mounting plate.
● Be sure that the indoor unit must be positioned at the place where was
marked at 4-1.
● The bending radius of the refrigerant pipe must be R80 or less.
● The tube raised should be fixed with the pull tight which was put through the
square hole of the mounting plate.
(3) Position the refrigerant piping in the left piping space of the indoor unit as
shown in right figure
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Drain pipe
4. Installation of drain piping
4-1 Connection of drain tube
Drain tube (C)
(1) Connect the drain tube (C) which is installed to the left side drain port of the
indoor unit to the drain port of the Drain Pump.
(2) Fix the connection port securely with the tube clip (E) attached.
(3) Connect the flexible drain tube, which is run from the top panel of the Drain
Pump, to the local drain piping. The part connected must be closed by vinyl
chloride type glue.
(4) Insulate the flexible drain tube which is run from top panel of Drain Pump with
the drain tube cover (D) attached.
Tube clip (E)
4-2 Installation of drain piping
(1) The drain pipe should be installed in accordance with the following procedure.
● The drain pipe should be installed so that the outdoor side (drain side) becomes falling slope (1/100 or more) and do not make
trap or peaks.
● The horizontal run of the drain pipe should be 20 m or less. In case that the tube is horizontally run for long distance, some support brackets should be installed to prevent the pipe from being wavy. Never install the air bleeder. The drain will blow out.
● The hard vinyl chloride pipe VP20 (outer dia. 26 mm) should be used for the drain pipe. And the part connected must be
closed by vinyl chloride type glue to prevent water leak.
● Be sure to wrap the drain pipe with adiabatic material (foam polyethylene: specific gravity 0.03, thickness 9 mm or more)
available on the market.
● Do not install stink trap to the outlet of the drain pipe.
● The outlet of the drain pipe should be installed the place where it is not possible to cause stink.
● In case that plural drain pipes are installed, install the main pipe so that it comes approximately 10 cm lower than the drain
outlet and the pipes must be made of material of VP30 or similar and they should be falling slope (1/100 or more).
● It is possible to raise the outlet of the drain pipe to 80 cm (max. lift) from bottom face of Drain Pump. However, if there is a
horizontal run pipe connected to the vertical section of the drain pipe, water will overflow from the drain pan. This is because
too much water will flow back when the operation stops. Therefore, the drain pipe must be raised vertically. Also, install the
flow back stop at the highest point to prevent the water from flow back from horizontal part of the pipe. See the drawing below.
Flow back stop
1.5~2 m
<Plural piping example>
OPTIONAL
PARTS
110
10
Supports
To outlet
To Drain Pump
E-46
Drain
Pump
Adiabatic material
Falling slope 1/100 or more
As wide as possible
(10 cm or more)
Trap, Peaks
Air bleeder
80 cm or less
Make the connection at
the place (mm)
Vinyl chloride pipe for VP20
Commercial elbow joint 3 pcs
110
10
Horizontal
run pipe
Drain Pump
VP30
VP20
Stink trap
Falling slope 1/100 or more
Drain Pump for Wall Mounted models PAC-SH75DM-E
5. Electric wiring
5-1 Set up of the indoor unit
(* Confirm that the power is off before starting the installation work.)
(1) Remove the panel of indoor unit and the electric box cover. (* See the indoor unit installation section in the installation manual of the indoor unit.)
5-2 Electric wiring
●
●
Route the wiring through the left piping space of the
indoor unit to the electric box as shown in right figure.
Connect the lead wires to the connectors of the
indoor unit control board, and then place the slack
in the wires in the wiring storage space of the Drain
Pump. (Fix the lead wires with the clamps.)
Wiring storage space
Drain Pump
Electric box
Left piping space
5-3 Electric wiring operation
●
●
●
Pull out the electric box as far as necessary
to connect the lead wires to the control board
connectors “CNP” and “CN4F”.
Connect the lead wires with connectors to
the control board connectors “CNP” and
“CN4F”. At this time, remove the bypass
connector (will be unused) from the terminal
CN4F of the control board.
Be sure not to have the lead wires touch the
heat generator (heat sink) on the control board.
Electric circuit diagram
Indoor unit
I.B
Electric box
Lead
wires
TB
Terminal block
(indoor/outdoor
connecting line)
I.B
Indoor control
board
CNP
Connector
(Drain Pump)
CN4F
Connector
(Float switch)
DP
Drain Pump
FS
Float switch
XP
Relay (Drain
Pump)
CN4F
FS
XP
DP
CNP
TB
Wiring plate
●
Affix the wiring plate (H) to the
rear of the panel.
Wiring Plate (H)
Panel of
indoor unit
Symbol Name
Drain Pump
Note:
Electric wiring operation
●
After completing the electric wiring operation, make sure
that the hooks are securely caught on the unit, and then put
the electric box cover and panel back in place.
stands for terminal connection.
stands for connector joint.
6. Test run
After the installation of the Drain Pump has been completed, make sure that the drain works correctly and the
water does not leak from any part of connection.
OPTIONAL
(1) Pour water
Pour water approximately 800 cc to the drain pan. (* See the drain pipe [checking the drain flow] section in the
installation manual of the indoor unit.)
(* If the water is poured too much, it is possible that the drainage does not work due to alarm stop by activation of
drain over flow protection device.)
(2) Test run
In accordance with the procedure for test run in the installation manual for the indoor unit, operate the air cooling
and make sure that the drainage works and the water does not leak.
* When the Drain Pump is installed in winter season, the water must be drained.
To drain water, remove the drain plug under the Drain Pump. Prepare the pan to receive drain.
When the drainage has been completed, put the drain plug back in place.
(3) After checking, put the cover back in place.
* Make sure that the left end of the indoor unit perfectly comes on the point marked at 2-1. (If they do not match,
the cover will not be able to be installed or there will be a gap between the cover and the indoor unit.)
E-47
PARTS
●
Drain Pump
for Ceiling Suspended models PAC-SH83/84/85DM-E
Descriptions
Photo
Raises drain generated during unit's operation to seure the
appropriate angle of the drain pipe.
Applicable Models
Drain pump
PAC-SH83DM-E PAC-SH84DM-E PAC-SH85DM-E
Applicable
models
PCA-RP71KA
PCA-RP100KA
PCA-RP125KA
PCA-RP140KA
PCA-RP50KA
PCA-RP60KA
Specifications
Dimensions
Rated power
Power consumption
Operating current
Drain lift
220V AC, single-phase, 50/60Hz
12/10.8W
0.114/0.092A
Max. 600mm from indoor unit’s top
surface
Discharge rate
Driving motor
Drain piping
241/h or more
Shading type (Class E insulation)
Connected to drain outlet. PVC pipe
VP-20 (O.D.Φ26) can be used.
Unit : mm
Hole for installation
Drainage outlet
(for VP-20)
59
30
22
Hole for installation
149
81
Drain pump
21
16
Drainage plug
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-48
Drain float SW
61 42
145
Drain connecting hole 25
108
Drain Pump for Ceiling Suspended models PAC-SH83/84/85DM-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Confirming Supplied Accessories
* Before starting installation, make sure that the following accessories are present.
Drain lift up mechanism Attachment Screws (4×10) VP-20 pipe Pipe cover Flexible hose Fastener
For the installation of
drain lift up mechanismԘ
Drain lift up
×1 mechanism fixture ×1
×6
L-shaped pipe (gas pipe) L-shaped pipe (liquid pipe)
×1
For insulation of
VP20 pipeԛ ×1
Insulator A
×1
×1
Insulator B
6t×220×80
3t×250×120
㧔For internal insulation㧕㧔For external insulation㧕
PAC-SH83/84 ×1 For the insulation of L-shaped For the insulation of L-shaped
pipes ԟ and Ԡ and the
pipes ԟ and Ԡ and the
PAC-SH85 ×2 refrigerant pipes.
×2
×2 refrigerant pipes.
×1
2 Installation Diagram of the Drain lift up mechanism
* This drain lift up mechanism must be installed inside an indoor unit.
* Installing this drain lift up mechanism limits to arrange the refrigerant pipe only upward.
* To facilitate installation of the drain lift up mechanism, it should be installed before indoor unit.
* The size of the plumbing that must connect, by the refrigerant kind of the indoor unit that corresponds in the case of PAC-SH85DM-E, changes.
* Please refer to the installation manual of an indoor unit for details.
* The L-shaped pipes there are bringing are corresponding to either refrigerant plumbing.
1 In case of accessory parts VP-20pipe and pipe cover do not have enough length because the lifting height is high, please supply locally.
Unit:mm
Viewed from the Top
Viewed from the Front
L-shaped pipe 㧔liquid pipe㧕
47
L-shaped pipe 㧔gas pipe㧕
100
134
73
Drain lift up mechanism Drainage outlet
㧔for VP-20㧕 112
210
Attachment Drain lift up mechanism Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Right side panel
Fixing screw Flexible hose Fixing screw Attachment ‫ޛ‬Table 1‫ޜ‬
:15.88
:9.52
:15.88
:6.35/:9.52
Drain lift up mechanism Model
PAC-SH83
PAC-SH84
PAC-SH85
Fixing screw Drainage plug
Fixing hole
41
Drain connecting hole on
the indoor unit
Flexible hose 40
Drain connecting hole
Positions of Holes on the Ceiling
Rear side of the indoor unit
120
Right side of
the indoor
unit
221
108.5
9
Drain lift up
mechanism
Max. 600
L-shaped pipe ,
㧔gas pipe, liquid pipe㧕
VP-20pipe 1
㧔outer diameter::26㧕
㧔pipe cover 㧕
1
126
70
Elbow pipe
㧔locally supplied㧕
130
VP-20pipe
㧔locally supplied㧕
Viewed from the Right
61
Ceiling hole㧔2-:100㧕
Knockout hole on the
indoor unit㧔for upper piping㧕
27
E-49
PARTS
Liquid Pipe
:6.35
OPTIONAL
Gas pipe
:12.7
230
Knockout hole on the indoor
unit㧔for upper piping㧕
Drain Pump for Ceiling Suspended models PAC-SH83/84/85DM-E
3
Installing the Drain lift up mechanism
1.Remove the intake grille and side panel. (Refer to the indoor unit installation manual.)
2.Prepare the knockout hole to be used for the upper piping of the indoor unit.
3.Fix the attachment with the fixing screws (×2)
4.Fix the drain lift up mechanism with the fixing screws (×4)
Drain lift up mechanism Fixing screws Fixing screws Attachment Convex
for locating
Rear side panel
(metal plate)
Fixing screws Knockout hole
for upper piping
4
Right side panel
(metal plate)
Refrigerant Piping
*For details on piping, refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit.
[With the stop valve of the outdoor unit fully closed]
1.Apply lubricant to the flare sheet of the L-shaped pipes (gas pipe, liquid pipe) .
2.Remove the flare nut and cap from the indoor unit.
3.Apply lubricant to the flare sheet connecting section of the indoor unit.
4.Connect the L-shaped pipes (gas pipe, liquid pipes) and quickly.
5.Fit the removed flare nut to the existing pipes and carry out flaring.
6.Connect the L-shaped pipes with the existing pipes in the same way.
7.Cover each connection with heat insulator .
[After the refrigerant circuit is complete]
8.Vacuumize the refrigerant lines through the service port of the liquid stop valve.
9.Fully open the stop valves (both liquid and gas).
* The method for oparating the stop valve is described on the outdoor unit installation manual.
Apply the ester-oil or ether-oil
or alkylbenzene
(locally supplied)
Refrigerant pipes(locally supplied)
Use the flare nut which has
been removed from
the indoor unit.
lnsulator A,B Wrap this part with the insulator
that comes with the indoor unit.
Cover this part with insulator
A and then cover it over
with insulator B OPTIONAL
PARTS
Indoor unit
E-50
L-shaped pipes ,
(gas pipe, liquid pipe)
Drain Pump for Ceiling Suspended models PAC-SH83/84/85DM-E
5
In case of accessory parts VP-20pipe and pipe cover do not have enough
length because the lifting height is high,
please purchase procure supply locally.
Drain Piping
*For details on piping, refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit.
1.Apply vinyl chloride type abhesive to the drainage outlet of the drain lift up mechanism Ԙ , then insert
the VP-20 pipe ԛ into it, (30mm deep)
2.Connect the VP20 pipe ԛ and existing drain pipe using a 90-degree elbow etc. and adhesive.
3.Cover the VP-20 pipe ԛ with the pipe cover Ԝ.
4.Apply vinyl chloride type adhesive to the drain lift up mechanism Ԙ and drain connecting hole on the
indoor unit, then insert the flexible hose ԝ into them. Take care that the hose does not twist.
*Insulate all pipes, from the drain lift up mechanism up to the outside.
Viewed from the Right
VP-20 pipe Pipe cover Max. 600mm
VP-20 pipe
(locally supplied)
Elbow (locally supplied)
Push to the end.
Drain lift up mechanism Ԙ
Drain connecting hole on
the indoor unit
Flexible hose Apply vinyl chloride type adhesive to these areas.
[Make sure to follow the following points during drain piping.]
*Drain lifting height must be less than 600mm.
*Incline the drain pipe downwards (1/100 or more) to the drainage side (outdoor).
*Do not create traps or peaks.
*Keep the horizontal piping within 20m. Use fixtures to prevent the pipe from waving.
*Do not install air vent pipes. The drainage may spout out.
*Use general-purpose hard vinyl chloride pipes (outer diameter::26) and apply vinyl chloride type adhesive
to prevent any leakage.
*Cover with insulator (made of foamed polyethylene, with specific gravity of 0.03 thickness of 9mm or more).
*Do not install odor trap at the drain outlet.
*Locate the end of pipe at a point where odor is unlikely to occur.
*Do not insert the pipe directly into a drainage ditch where sulfur gas may be produced.
*Use VP-30 pipes for centralized piping. Install the centralized drain pipe approximately
10cm below the output of pipes connected from the drain lift up mechanism.
Support
1.5~2m
Air vent
Downward
inclination
(1/100 or more)
Re-rizing
Odor trap
Make the drop as long as possible(approx. 10cm)
OPTIONAL
VP-30
[Example of centralized piping]
Drain lift up mechanism
Downward
inclination
(1/100 or more)
E-51
PARTS
Drain lift up mechanism
Drain Pump for Ceiling Suspended models PAC-SH83/84/85DM-E
6
Electric Wiring
*Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit together with this manual.
*Perform the work after checking that the power supply is off.
1.Remove the beam.
2.Remove the electric parts cover.
3.Pull the electric parts box downwards.
4.Connect the lead wire of drain lift up mechanism to the CNP and CN4F connectors
provided on the control PCB of the indoor unit.
5.Tie up the lead wires with the fastener so that the wires do not come apart inside
the electric parts box.
6.When the wiring is finished, re-install the electric parts box, its cover and the beam.
Drain lift up mechanism Electric parts box
Beam
Electric parts cover
(An electric wiring diagram
is provided on the back.)
Lead wire of the drain lift up mechanism
Fix with the clamp located on
upper right of the electric parts box.
Fix the lead wire
Tie up with existing lead wire
Fastener CNP(pump)
Connect to the blue
connector.
Control PCB
After the box is re-installed,secure
the excess part of the lead wire with
the clamp located on the right of
the electric parts box.
Electric parts box
(Possible to fix temporarily hanging the lug that is
on back of the electric parts box on the panel behind)
OPTIONAL
PARTS
CN4F (float switch)
Connect to the white connector.
㧖A jumper connector is used in place of CN4F at
the time of shipment, so replace it with CN4F
㧖The positions of the connectors which must be connected to the control PCB in certain
models differ from those specified in the above diagram. Make sure that the lead wire
are connected to CNP and CN4F connectors.
E-52
Drain Pump for Ceiling Suspended models PAC-SH83/84/85DM-E
7
Test Run
*Through this test run, check that drainage is discharged properly and that there is no water leakage from any of the connections.
*Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit together with this manual.
1. Supplying water
Supply approximately 1000cc of water to the air outlet.
Air outlet
Water supply pump
2.Carrying out a test run
(1) Turn the power ON.
(2) Press the TEST RUN button on the remote controller twice.
(3) Press the MODE button to select cooling mode.
*The drain lift up mechanism will be activated to start discharging the water.
(4) Check whether water is discharged properly.
(5) Press the POWER ON/OFF button to cancel the test run.
(6) Turn the power OFF.
3.Re-install each part after checking.
*If the drain lift up mechanism is installed at the time of the year
when heating is used, make sure that the water for the drain check
has been removed.
After removal of the water, reinstall the drainage plug.
Drainage plug
E-53
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Drain pan
Drain Pump
PAC-KE07DM-E
for Ceiling Concealed models
Descriptions
Installation figure
Raises drain generated during unit's operation to seure the
appropriate angle of the drain pipe.
Indoor unit
Applicable Models
SEZ-KD35VA(L)
SEZ-KD50VA(L)
SEZ-KD60VA(L)
SEZ-KD71VA(L)
Drain pump
Specifications
●External type
●220-240V AC
●Liquid level detection:Float switch
Provided parts
Check that the packet includes the following parts in addition to installation manual.
Item
① DRAIN PUMP
② ATTACHMENT
③ DRAIN HOSE 1
④ PIPE COVER 1
⑤ PIPE COVER 2
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
(385mm)
(255mm)
(200mm)
Shape
Item
⑥ HOSE BAND
⑦ SCREW
Quantity
1
3
⑧ CLAMP
3
⑨ FERRITE CLAMP
⑩ BAND 1
1
2
(100mm)
Shape
Item
11 DRAIN HOSE 2
12 PIPE COVER 3
13 BAND 2
Quantity
1
1
6
(175mm)
Shape
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-54
(380mm)
Drain Pump for Ceiling Concealed models PAC-KE07DM-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Installing the Drain Pump
1-1 Installing the Drain Pump
Hook the ATTCHMENT over the mounting bracket on the unit.
(1) Unscrew the (a)screw on the unit cover, hook the
ATTACHMENT over the mounting bracket on the unit,
and screw it on to the unit with the (a)screw. (Fig. 1)
(b)
ATTACHMENT
Cover
(a)
Fig. 1
(2) Temporarily screw in the SCREW in the hole (b) on
the ATTACHMENT. (Fig. 1 and 2)
(3) Loosen the drain-pump-cover fixing screws, and remove
the cover. (Fig. 3)
4~7mm
DRAIN PUMP
SCREW
ATTACHMENT
Cover
Fig. 2
Cover fixing screws
Fig. 3
(4) Hang the DRAIN PUMP on the ATTACHMENT by
placing the SCREW (the one screwed in during Step
(2) above) through the Figure-8 hole on back of the
DRAIN PUMP, and then tighten the SCREW from
inside the DRAIN PUMP. (Fig. 4)
Fig. 4
3
E-55
PARTS
OPTIONAL
SCREW
Drain Pump for Ceiling Concealed models PAC-KE07DM-E
1-2 Installing DRAIN HOSE 1
(1) Connect each end of DRAIN HOSE 1 to the drain port
on the unit and on the drain pump. (Fig. 5)
;Insert the hose all the way to the end of the ports.
;Do not use any adhesive.
HOSE BAND
(2) Secure the hose with HOSE BANDs at both ends of
the hose. (Fig. 5)
DRAIN HOSE
Fig. 5
(3) Attach PIPE COVER 1 and PIPE COVER 2 to
DRAIN HOSE 1 flush against each other and against
the unit and the drain pump, and then secure them in
place with BANDs.
Wrap the pipe cover connection with vinyl tape to close
the gap. (Fig. 6)
To be gap-free
PIPE COVER 2
BAND 2
BAND 2
To be gap-free
Vinyl tape (locally procured)
PIPE COVER 1
Fig. 6
1-3 Wiring connections
(1) Remove the CONTROL BOX COVER from the unit by
unscrewing the two screws on the cover. (Fig. 7)
(2) Unscrew the (c)CONTROL BOX fixing screw. (Fig. 7)
CONTROL BOX
COVER
(c)
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Fig. 7
4
E-56
Drain Pump for Ceiling Concealed models PAC-KE07DM-E
(3) Remove the short-circuit connector from CN4F
on the control board (white, 4P). (Fig. 8)
Drain pump wires (2 wires)
Short-circuit connector
(4) Route the two drain pump wires behind the CONTROL BOX and into the CONTROL BOX.
Lift the CONTROL BOX in the direction of the
arrow (d) to allow the wires through. (Fig. 8)
;Do not pinch the wires.
CN4F
CNP
(5) Wind the drain pump wire (connector: blue, 3P)
around FERRITE CLAMP once, and fix it in
place with BAND. (Fig. 9)
(d)
(6) Connect the drain pump wire (connector: blue,
3P) to CNP on the control board, and connect the
float switch wire (white: 4P) to CN4F on the control board respectively. (Fig. 8)
(7) Place the screw(c) that was removed in Step 33.(2) above back on. (Fig. 7)
Fig. 8
FERRITE CLAMP
BAND
Blue:3P
Fig. 9
20
(8) Fix the two drain pump wires with CLAMPs to
the unit. (Fig. 10)
Drain pump wire(2 wires)
CLAMP
5
E-57
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Fig. 10
Drain Pump for Ceiling Concealed models PAC-KE07DM-E
2 Drain piping work
• Ensure that the drain piping is downward (pitch of more than 1/100) to the outdoor (discharge) side. Do not provide any trap
or irregularity on the way.
• Ensure that any cross-wise drain piping is less than 20 m (excluding the difference of elevation). If the drain piping is long,
provide metal braces to prevent it from waving. Never provide any air vent pipe. Otherwise drain may be ejected.
• Use a hard vinyl chloride pipe O.D. ø 32 for drain piping.
• Ensure that collected pipes are 10 cm lower than the unit body's drain port.
• Do not provide any odor trap at the drain discharge port.
• Put the end of the drain piping in a position where no odor is generated.
• Do not put the end of the drain piping in any drain where ionic gases are generated.
Max. 20m
Max. 300mm
1.5-2m
Correct piping
Wrong piping
Insulation (9 mm or more)
Downward slope (1/100 or more)
Support metal
Air bleeder
Raised
Odor trap
Grouped piping
O. D. ø 32 PVC TUBE
Make it as large as possible. About 10 cm.
Indoor unit (Drain pump)
Make the piping size large for grouped piping.
Downward slope (1/100 or more)
O. D. ø 38 PVC TUBE for grouped piping.
(9 mm or more insulation)
Up to 580 mm
Drain hose (accessory)
Horizontal or slightly upgradient
2-1. Insert the DRAIN HOSE 2 into the drain port (insertion margin: 25mm).
(The drain hose must not be bent more than 45˚ to prevent the hose from breaking or clogging.)
(Attach the hose with glue for the hard vinyl chloride pipe, and fix it with the BAND 2.)
2-2. Attach the drain pipe (O.D. ø 32 PVC TUBE, field supply).
(Attach the pipe with glue for the hard vinyl chloride pipe, and fix it with the BAND 2.)
2-3. Perform insulation work on the drain pipe (O.D. ø 32 PVC TUBE) and on the socket (including elbow).
2-4. Check the drainage.
2-5. Attach the PIPE COVER 3 and, fix it with the BAND 2 to insulate the drain port.
To be gap free. The joint section of the
insulation material meet must be at the top.
DRAIN HOSE 2
Max.180 p 5 mm
Drain pipe
(O.D. ø 32 PVC TUBE, field supply)
DRAIN PUMP
PIPE COVER 3
35
25
BAND 2
Visible part
25
Insulating material (field supply)
Insertion margin
Insertion margin
BAND 2
OPTIONAL
PARTS
6
E-58
Drain Pump for Ceiling Concealed models PAC-KE07DM-E
3 Confirming drain discharge
Make sure that the drain-up mechanism operates normally
for discharge and that there is no water leakage from the
connections.
• Be sure to confirm the above in a period of heating operation.
• Be sure to confirm the above before ceiling work is done in the
case of a new construction.
• Make sure that water is not leaking from the connection (e) on
the drain pump shown in the right figure.
(e)
3-1. Fill water into the feed water pump using a feed water tank. In filling, be sure to put the end of the pump or
tank in a drain pan. (If the insertion is incomplete, water may flow over the machine.)
;Do not splash water on the drain pump coil or the float switch wire through hole when pouring water.
3-2. Perform the test run in cooling mode, or turn on the switch SWE on the controller circuit board. (The drain
pump and the fan are forced to operate without any remote controller operation.) Make sure using a transparent hose that drain is discharged.
SEZ model
PEFY model
SWE
ON
SWE
OFF
ON
SWE
OFF
OFF
ON
SWE
OFF
ON
3-3. After confirmation, cancel the test run mode, and turn off the main power. When the switch SWE has been
turned on, turn it off, and attach the CONTROL BOX COVER and the DRAIN PUMP COVER in the original
positions.
SEZ model
PEFY model
SWE
ON
OFF
SWE
ON
SWE
OFF
OFF
ON
SWE
OFF
ON
SWE
<Indoor board>
Insert pump's end 2 to 4 cm.
About 2000 cc
Water
Do not splash water on the drain pump coil or the
float switch wire through hole when pouring water.
7
E-59
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Decoration Covers
Front & Suspension Bracket Cover
PAC-SF81KC-E
Descriptions
Photo
A decoration cover to be attached to the upper section
of ceiling suspended models. Possible to prevent dust
accumulation.
Applicable Models
PCA-RP71HA
TO BE CONFIRMED
Specifications
SUS304 (0.8t)
Front cover x 1
Suspension bracket cover x 4
Parts composition
Tapping screw (4x10, with nylon washer) x 4
Washer x 8 (hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet (t1.2))
Material
Dimensions
Unit : mm
(TQPVEQXGT
1,1
40
5WURGPVKQPDNCEMGVEQXGT
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-60
Decoration Covers (Front & Suspension Bracket Cover) PAC-SF81KC-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Checking Provided Parts
̪Make sure that you have all the following parts before install ation:
Ԙ Front cover
ԙ Suspending bracket covers
˜1
˜4
Ԛ Tapping screws (4x10) ԛ Washers
㧔with nylon washers㧕
˜4
˜8
Provide a gap of
approx. 8 mm.
2. Front Cover Installation Procedure
Insulation sheet on top of unit
‫ڎ‬The following procedure shows how to attach the front cover after installing air-conditioner.
1. Loosen the nuts of bolts suspending the unit, and lower the unit by approx. 5 mm.
࡮When lowering the unit, be careful not to damage the wires, coolant pipe or drain pipe.
2. Remove the screws that secure the front panel and top panel to the unit (at 4 points).
(The provided tapping screwsԚare spares for these screws.)
Front panel
3. Put front cover Ԙ over the unit.
࡮Be careful not to damage the insulation sheets pasted on the top surface of unit and the inside
of front cover Ԙ.
4. Use the screws removed in step 2 to temporarily secure front cover Ԙ.
(Do not tighten the screws at this time.)
Remove the screws holding the panels
(4 points including the opposite side)
5. Tighten the nuts of bolts suspending the unit, and fit the unit onto ceiling.
࡮Tighten the nuts while carefully watching the attached status of front cover Ԙ.
6. Tighten the screws that were temporarily secured in step 4.
Attach on the top of unit, taking care
with the insulation sheet.
࡮Make sure that front cover holds the insulation sheet on the top surface of unit,
and that the cover fits securely on the top surface of unit before tightening the screws.Ԙ
7. Separate the unit from ceiling to leave a gap of 2-3 mm fromceiling.
࡮Be sure to provide this space: If the unit is in contact with ceiling, the vibrations could be
transmitted to ceiling.
8. Make sure that the unit is correctly installed, and then tighten the nuts of bolts
1 Front cover
٤
suspending the unit.
[CAUTION] Do not tighten the lower double nuts yet, because installing suspending
bracket covers must now be done.
Top panel
Ceiling surface
Suspending bracket
[CAUTION]
Be careful of any
adjacent pipes and
wires.
Loosen the nuts of suspending bolts to lower the unit.
Tighten the nuts so that the ceiling holds
the front cover.
(Perform the same for opposite side.)
Ceiling surface
The insulation sheet is also provided
on the inside of opposite side.
After securing front cover Ԙ, ti
ghten the nuts for suspending bolts.
2-3 mm
̪ If you attach the front cover before installing the unit, perform the procedure in steps 2 and 3,
and then fully tighten the 2 screws on each side (4 in total).
̪Adjust the unit position.
After adjusting the unit position,
tighten the nuts.
̪Do not tighten the lower double nuts yet,
but proceed with the following work.
3. Suspending Bracket Installation Procedure
‫ڎ‬Attach the suspending bracket covers in succession.
1. Remove the lower double nuts (from 4 points) from the
suspending bolts.
2. Put the provided washers (tops and bottoms of suspending
bracket covers) and suspending bracket covers through
suspending bolts. ԛ
3. Tighten the nuts removed in step 1 for the suspending bolts.
࡮ Make sure that the suspending bracket covers are in close
contact with the unit and ceiling.
Remove the lower double nuts.
Pass onto bolt
in this order:
4 Washer
٤
2 Suspending
٤
bracket cover
4 Washer
٤
Make sure of the gaps on left and right and that the
cover is in close contact with unit and ceiling, and
then tighten the lower double nuts.
Lower double nuts
E-61
PARTS
OPTIONAL
4. Test Run
̪ Also refer to the installation manual of indoor unit.
‫ ڎ‬Make sure that test run is performed without any abnormal sound, such as vibrations, fluttering sound, etc.
[Test Run Procedure]
1. Turn power on.
2. Press the TEST RUN button on remote controller twice.
3. Press the MODE button on remote controller to set to the fan mode.
㧖The fan will rotate to blow out air.
4. Make sure that no abnormal sound, such as vibrations, fluttering sound, etc. is heard.
5. Press the ON/OFF button on remote controller to release test run.
6. Turn power off.
Decoration Covers
Front & Suspension Bracket Cover
PAC-SF82KC-E
Descriptions
Photo
A decoration cover to be attached to the upper section
of ceiling suspended models. Possible to prevent dust
accumulation.
Applicable Models
PCA-RP125HA
TO BE CONFIRMED
Specifications
SUS304 (0.8t)
Front cover x 1
Suspension bracket cover x 4
Parts composition
Tapping screw (4x10, with nylon washer) x 4
Washer x 8 (hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet (t1.2))
Material
Dimensions
Unit : mm
(TQPVEQXGT
1,5
24
5WURGPVKQPDNCEMGVEQXGT
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-62
Decoration Covers Front & Suspension Bracket Cover PAC-SF82KC-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Checking Provided Parts
̪Make sure that you have all the following parts before install ation:
Ԙ Front cover
ԙ Suspending bracket covers
˜1
˜4
Ԛ Tapping screws (4x10) ԛ Washers
㧔with nylon washers㧕
˜4
˜8
Provide a gap of
approx. 8 mm.
2. Front Cover Installation Procedure
Insulation sheet on top of unit
‫ڎ‬The following procedure shows how to attach the front cover after installing air-conditioner.
1. Loosen the nuts of bolts suspending the unit, and lower the unit by approx. 5 mm.
࡮When lowering the unit, be careful not to damage the wires, coolant pipe or drain pipe.
2. Remove the screws that secure the front panel and top panel to the unit (at 4 points).
(The provided tapping screwsԚare spares for these screws.)
Front panel
3. Put front cover Ԙ over the unit.
࡮Be careful not to damage the insulation sheets pasted on the top surface of unit and the inside
of front cover Ԙ.
4. Use the screws removed in step 2 to temporarily secure front cover Ԙ.
(Do not tighten the screws at this time.)
Remove the screws holding the panels
(4 points including the opposite side)
5. Tighten the nuts of bolts suspending the unit, and fit the unit onto ceiling.
࡮Tighten the nuts while carefully watching the attached status of front cover Ԙ.
6. Tighten the screws that were temporarily secured in step 4.
Attach on the top of unit, taking care
with the insulation sheet.
࡮Make sure that front cover holds the insulation sheet on the top surface of unit,
and that the cover fits securely on the top surface of unit before tightening the screws.Ԙ
7. Separate the unit from ceiling to leave a gap of 2-3 mm fromceiling.
࡮Be sure to provide this space: If the unit is in contact with ceiling, the vibrations could be
transmitted to ceiling.
8. Make sure that the unit is correctly installed, and then tighten the nuts of bolts
1 Front cover
٤
suspending the unit.
[CAUTION] Do not tighten the lower double nuts yet, because installing suspending
bracket covers must now be done.
Top panel
Ceiling surface
Suspending bracket
[CAUTION]
Be careful of any
adjacent pipes and
wires.
Loosen the nuts of suspending bolts to lower the unit.
Tighten the nuts so that the ceiling holds
the front cover.
(Perform the same for opposite side.)
Ceiling surface
The insulation sheet is also provided
on the inside of opposite side.
After securing front cover Ԙ, ti
ghten the nuts for suspending bolts.
2-3 mm
̪ If you attach the front cover before installing the unit, perform the procedure in steps 2 and 3,
and then fully tighten the 2 screws on each side (4 in total).
̪Adjust the unit position.
After adjusting the unit position,
tighten the nuts.
̪Do not tighten the lower double nuts yet,
but proceed with the following work.
3. Suspending Bracket Installation Procedure
‫ڎ‬Attach the suspending bracket covers in succession.
1. Remove the lower double nuts (from 4 points) from the
suspending bolts.
2. Put the provided washers (tops and bottoms of suspending
bracket covers) and suspending bracket covers through
suspending bolts. ԛ
3. Tighten the nuts removed in step 1 for the suspending bolts.
࡮ Make sure that the suspending bracket covers are in close
contact with the unit and ceiling.
Remove the lower double nuts.
Pass onto bolt
in this order:
4 Washer
٤
2 Suspending
٤
bracket cover
4 Washer
٤
Make sure of the gaps on left and right and that the
cover is in close contact with unit and ceiling, and
then tighten the lower double nuts.
Lower double nuts
E-63
PARTS
OPTIONAL
4. Test Run
̪ Also refer to the installation manual of indoor unit.
‫ ڎ‬Make sure that test run is performed without any abnormal sound, such as vibrations, fluttering sound, etc.
[Test Run Procedure]
1. Turn power on.
2. Press the TEST RUN button on remote controller twice.
3. Press the MODE button on remote controller to set to the fan mode.
㧖The fan will rotate to blow out air.
4. Make sure that no abnormal sound, such as vibrations, fluttering sound, etc. is heard.
5. Press the ON/OFF button on remote controller to release test run.
6. Turn power off.
MA & Contact Terminal Interface
MAC-397IF-E
Descriptions
Photo
Enables to control multiple air conditioners from a (remote)
location by connecting the On/Off contact point. It can
also control the operation of the relay with error signals by
connecting the MA remote controller PAR-21MAA.
TO B
BE
EC
CONFIRMED
ONFIRMED
Applicable Models
MSZ-FD25/35/50VA(S)
SEZ-KA
MSZ-GE22/25/35/42/50VA
SLZ-KA
MSZ-GA60/71VA
SEZ-KD
MFZ-KA25/35/50VA
P-series: In the case the
outdoor unit is SUZ
or MXZ, the indoor
of P-series can be
connected.
MLZ-KA25/35/50VA
Specifications
Power
Operating conditions
Connection of
centralized controller
12V DC (supplied from indoor unit)
Indoor only (ambient temperature: 0 to 40͠ , no condensation)
Communication cable
3-wire (recommended: microphone cord (MVVS) 0.3mm2)
Communication cable distance Max. 100m
Connection of
Communication cable
2-wire (recommended: optional PAC remote controller cable PAC-YT81HC)
MA smooth remote controller
/ MA deluxe remote controller Communication cable distance Max. 10m
Dedicated 5-wire cable
300g (including indoor unit connecting cable)
Indoor unit connecting cable
Weight
Dimensions
Unit : mm
271
51
81
26
3111
OPTIONAL
PARTS
21
E-64
251
41
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Before Installation
1.1. How to Use the MA & CONTACT TERMINAL Interface
‫ع‬Functions
Centralized control (Fig. 2-1)
You can turn multiple air conditioners on and off from one location. (MAC-821SC-E (8-Room))
Use as wired remote controller (Fig. 2-2)
You can use the MA remote controller as a wired remote controller. (PAR-21MAA)
Remote control (Fig. 2-3)
You can turn on and off an air conditioner from a remote location by connecting the ON/OFF contact point.
Status indicator output (Fig. 2-4)
You can control the operation of the relay with either of the on/off or error/ok status output signals.
‫ع‬Sample System Configuration
Ԛ
ԙ
ԛ
Fig. 2-2
ԝ
Ԝ
Ԟ
ԙ
Ԛ
Fig. 2-4
Ԙ Centralized controller
ԙ MA & CONTACT
TERMINAL Interface
Ԛ Indoor unit
ԛ MA remote controller
Ԝ Contact point
ԝ Relay
Ԟ Coil
ԟ Breaker
E-65
PARTS
Fig. 2-3
OPTIONAL
Fig. 2-1
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
1.2. Parts
Before installing the unit, make sure that you have all the necessary parts.
■ Accessory
■ Items to Prepare at the Installation Site
(1)
Interface unit
1
(2)
Wall mouniing brackets
1
(3)
Screws for mounting (2) 3.5 × 12
4
(4)
Cushioning material (with adhesive)
1
(5)
Mounting cord clamp (small)
1
(6)
Mounting cord clamp (medium)
2
(7)
Mounting cord clamp (large)
1
(8)
Screws for mounting (5)-(7) 3.5 × 12
* Use when attaching the clamps to the interface unit
1
(9)
Screws for mounting (6) 4 × 10
* Use this when mounting the clamps near the M series
1
(10)
Screws for mounting (6) 4 × 16
* Use when mounting the clamps and electrical wire
mounting bracket
1
(11) Cable tie
3
(12) Fasteners (for joining the lead wires)
3
(13) Wiring cord clamp
3
(14) Screws for mounting (13) 3.5 × 12
3
(15) Screws 3.5 × 12 (Spare)
2
(16) Lead wires (6)
1
(A)
Signal wire extension cable (if necessary)
(B)
Remote control wires (for connecting the MA Remote Controller)
2-corewire between 0.3 and 1.25mm2.
(C)
Switch, relay, coin timer, etc. (if necessary)
* Please use products with supplementary insulation.
Use wires which have insulation more than the MAX voltage.
* MAX voltage is defined according to the law of the country
where the interface is used.
2.Connecting the MA & CONTACT TERMINAL Interface to Indoor Unit
Connect the interface unit and the indoor control board using the connecting cable that came with the interface.
Extending or shortening the connecting cable that comes out of the interface may cause it to malfunction. Also, keep the
connecting cable as far as possible away from the electrical wires and ground wire. Do not bundle them together.
M series
Indoor unit
Indoor control board
Interface unit (1)
Connect the connecting cable that comes with the
interface unit to the connector CN105 on the indoor
control board.
P/S series
Indoor unit
Indoor control board
Interface unit (1)
Connect the connecting cable that comes with the
interface unit to the connector CN92/CN105 on the
indoor control board.
• When this interface unit is connected with indoor unit, timer operation cannot be set from a wireless remote controller.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-66
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
3. Connecting the MA & CONTACT TERMINAL Interface with each system
(For details on each system, see the relevant instruction manual.)
• Screw the mounting cord clamp (5)-(7) according to the thickness of the connecting cable used for each system. Fasten the
cable tie (11) as shown in the figure to prevent undesirable movement of the connecting cable.
Mounting cord clamps (5)-(7)
Mounting screws (8) 3.5 s 12
Set the dip switch while moving
the connecting cable away from it slightly.
If the connecting cable is not
securely mounted, the connector may detach, break, or
malfunction.
Connecting cable for each system
Cable tie (11)
• The cables connected to the indoor unit should be mounted on or near the indoor unit.
(2) If there is excess thin part of the connecting cable, lay it out using
hooks as shown in the figure.
The thin part of the cable should be secured above the dotte line
indicated in the figure.
Mounting
screws (9)
4 s 10
The range in which the thin part of
the connecting cable is secured.
Mounting cord
clamp (6)
Dotted line (The position of the
edge face of the indoor control
P.C. board.)
Hook
(1) Attach a mounting cord clamp (5)-(6) provided with the parts prepared at the installation site to the thick
part of the connecting cable, and fix it with a screw 4 s 10 (9).
(3) Close the cover of the indoor control P.C. board. Reinstall the front panel and the lower right corner box.
• Set the interface dip switch (SW500–502) settings before turning on the power.
• If the interface dip switch (SW500–502) settings are not set correctly, the system will not function properly.
3.1. Centralized Control (When Connecting to a Centralized on-off remote Controller)
* Centralized on-off
remote controller
Interface unit (1)
RAC
TB571
D
C
M
TC1
CN560
TC2
TM1
TM2
*Breaker (C)
Power supply
~/N 220-240 V
50/60 Hz
Ground
Extend the cord using the extension
cord (A) at the installation site.
* Refer to the installation manual of centralized on-off remote controller.
Dip switch settings
SW500
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting required
SW501 and SW502 do not have to be set.
SW501
SW502
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
E-67
PARTS
1
OPTIONAL
ON
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
3.2. Use as a Wired Remote Controller (Using the MA Remote controller)
Note:
1. Be sure to set the “Auto Heating/Cooling Display Setting” of the MA remote controller OFF before use. When the
setting is turned ON, the remote controller display may differ from the actual operating status of the unit.
• For details on the “Auto Heating/Cooling Display Setting,” refer to the MA remote controller instruction manual.
2. A test run cannot be initiated using the test run switch on the MA remote controller.
3. The horizontal vanes on the unit cannot be operated using the louver switch.
4. The range of room temperature indication is between 10°C and 38°C.
Interface unit (1)
RAC
TB580
CN560
1
2
A
B
Remote control cord (B)
2
MA remote controller
(PAR-21MAA)
* PAR-20MAA cannot be used
with this interface.
Dip switch settings
■ SW500 does not have to be set.
■ SW501:
SW501- No. 1-4: Refrigerant address
Set this switch when multiple indoor units (and interfaces) are connected to a single MA remote controller.
Always start the refrigerant address at "0".
Even when connecting multiple outdoor units, set a different refrigerant address for each indoor unit.
Refrigerant
address
ON
0
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
ON
1
1
ON
Refrigerant
adress "0"
Refrigerant
adress "1"
Refrigerant
adress "2"
Refrigerant
adress "3"
2
1
ON
Outdoor unit
Multiple outdoor units
Indoor unit
Interface
MA remote controller
15
1
SW501- No. 5-6
M series
No. 5 and 6 should normally be set to OFF.
Under the following conditions, however, they should be switched to ON.
ON
5
6
Only turn this ON when the indoor units in the same group include models where the MA remote controller and
indoor unit are directly connected.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Set them to ON only when using the room temperature sensor installed in the MA remote controller.
* This can be switched when an accurate room temperature cannot be detected by the air conditioner unit.
MSZ-GA Series models can not use a room temperature sensor on their MA remote controllers.
(Some M series models will not allow the use of the MA remote controller room temperature sensor.)
E-68
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
■SW502:
Set this switch based on the functions of the indoor unit connected to the interface.
See the table of “Air conditioner Function Settings” for SW502 and set the switch after checking the functions using the
wireless remote control that came with the indoor unit.
3.3. Remote Control (Turning Indoor Unit On and Off from the Contact Point)
You can turn indoor unit on and off using an on/off switch like a light switch.
Connect the supplied lead wires (6) (16) to the connector CN591 on the interface board.
Wire the remote control components, including the switches, at the installation site.
Please use extension cords with reinforced insulation.
Interface unit
Indoor unit
CN591
1 2 3 4 5 6
Switch (contact point a)
(about 10 mA) (C)
Brown
Red
CN560
* Lead wires (6) (16)
Extend the cord using the extension cord (A)
at the installation site.
100 m max.
When the switch contact point is closed (ON), the air conditioner will turn on, and when the switch contact point is open (OFF),
the air conditioner will turn off.
* When connecting the connector and the lead wire, connect them using a closed end connector as shown below.
Extension cord (A)
Closed end connector
Cable tie (11)
Dip switch settings
SW500
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting required
E-69
PARTS
OPTIONAL
SW501 and SW502 do not have to be set.
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
3.4. Restricting Indoor Unit Operations from the Contact Point
You can use a coin timer or light switch to ensure that indoor unit will not operate.
Connect the supplied lead wires (6) (16) to the connector CN591 on the interface board.
Wire the remote control components, including the coin timers or switches, at the installation site.
Please use extension cords with reinforced insulation.
Interface unit (1)
Indoor unit
Coin timer (C)
CN591
1 2 3 4 5 6
Brown
Red
CN560
Contact point a
(about 10 mA)
Extend the cord using
the extension cord (A) at
the installation site.
Lead wires (6) (16)
100 m max.
* When the contact point is open, the unit will turn off and will not be operable from the remote control.
When the contact point is closed, the unit will turn on and will be operable from the remote control.
Dip switch settings
SW500
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting required
SW501 and SW502 do not have to be set.
3.5. Status Signal Output Using the Relay
You can set the external relay to ON/OFF based on whether the indoor unit is set to either on/off or error/ok.
Set up and wire the relay and extension cables at the installation site.
Please use relays with reinforced insulation.
Interface unit (C)
Indoor unit
CN560
1
TB580
2
A
B
Relay (B)
(coil rating of DC12 V 75 mA or less)
Extend the cord using the extension cord (A) at the installation
site.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
100 m max.
E-70
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
Dip switch settings
‫ع‬SW500
1. When outputting the indoor unit ON/OFF
ON
The relay is ON when the unit is running, and OFF when it is not.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting required
2. When outputting the indoor unit ERROR/OK
ON
The relay is ON when an error has occurred, and OFF when the unit is functioning
properly.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting required
‫ع‬SW501 and SW502 do not have to be set.
4. Dip Switch Details
• SW500 - Input/Output Mode Settings
Functions
OFF
ON
Comments
-
Be sure to set these to OFF (When set to OFF, the
unit cannot communicate with the air conditioner).
No. 1
Not in use
Set to OFF
No. 2
HA terminal (CN504) input switch
Pulse input
Continuous input
No. 3
HA terminal (CN504) output switch
Static mode
Dynamic mode
No. 4
Remote control (CN591) mode switch 1
No. 5
Remote control (CN591) mode switch 2
See the next page
See the next page
No. 6
Remote control (CN591) mode switch 3
No. 7
Relay, extermination output mode switch
ON/OFF output
ERROR/OK output
When there is a problem while the unit is running,
it will output a relay ON signal.
No. 8
Turn ON/OFF with power option
Turn ON/OFF with
power: No
(unit remains OFF
when the source
power is turned ON)
Turn ON/OFF with
power: Yes
(Returns the unit to
the status (ON/OFF) it
was in before the
power was turned
OFF)
When the Auto Restart function on the air conditioner itself is set to ON, be sure to set these to
OFF.
OPTIONAL
There is a switch between TC1 and 2 input on the
TB571.
E-71
PARTS
SW No.
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
Remote control (CN591) mode switch
SW 500
Functions
Operating Details
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
Do not use the CN591 remote control
-
OFF
OFF
ON
ON/OFF Prohibited/Allowed mode 1
Manual operations prohibited when CN591 No. 1 and No. 3 are closed, permitted
when open.
Only when No. 1 and No. 3 are closed and manual operations are prohibited.
On when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed, off when open.
(Cannot be operated from the remote control when manual operations are permitted. Only valid when operated from the CN591.)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON/OFF Prohibited/Allowed mode 2
(level input)
On when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed, off when open.
Manual operations prohibited when No. 1 and No. 3 are closed, permitted when
open.
(Cannot be operated from the remote control when manual operations are permitted. Only valid when operated from the CN591.)
OFF
ON
ON
ON/OFF Prohibited/Allowed mode 3
(pulse input)
On when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed, off when No. 1 and No. 3 are closed.
Manual operations prohibited when No. 1 and No. 4 are closed, and permitted
when No. 1 and No. 5 are closed.
(Same as when they are open.)
ON
OFF
OFF
Coin timer mode 1 (for a no-voltage
contact point a)
Permitted and on when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed, manual operations
prohibited and off when open.
(When permitted, the unit can be operated from the remote control.)
ON
OFF
ON
Coin timer mode 2 (for a no-voltage
contact point b)
Manual operations prohibited and off when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed,
permitted and on when open.
(When permitted, the unit can be operated from the remote control.)
ON
ON
OFF
Cooling-Heating/Temperature settings
mode 1 (3 temperature patterns)
On when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed, off when open.
When No. 1 and No. 3 are closed
20 ͠
When No. 1 and No. 4 are closed
24 ͠
When No. 1 and No. 5 are closed
28 ͠
(When multiple switches No. 3, 4, and 5 are closed, the highest temperature will
be selected.)
Heat when No. 1 and No. 6 are closed, cool when open.
(Remote control operations are valid as always.)
ON
ON
ON
Cooling-Heating/Temperature settings
mode 2 (8 temperature patterns)
On when CN591 No. 1 and No. 2 are closed, off when open.
No. 1 and No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
Open
Open
Open
Temperature settings
16 ͠
Closed
Open
Open
18 ͠
20 ͠
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
22 ͠
Open
Open
Closed
24 ͠
Closed
Open
Closed
26 ͠
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
28 ͠
30 ͠
Heat when No. 1 and No. 6 are closed, cool when open.
(Remote control operations are valid as always.)
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-72
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
‫ع‬SW501: Settings when connecting an MA remote controller
SW No.
No. 1
Functions
No. 4
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
Comments
Only specify these settings when connecting an
MA remote controller.
Refrigerant address 0
No. 2
No. 3
OFF
ON
ON
Refrigerant address 1
1
ON
Refrigerant address 2
1
ON
Refrigerant address 3
1
ON
Refrigerant address 4
1
ON
Refrigerant address 5
1
ON
Refrigerant address 6
1
ON
Refrigerant address 7
1
ON
Refrigerant address 8
1
ON
Refrigerant address 9
1
ON
Refrigerant address 10
1
ON
Refrigerant address 11
1
ON
Refrigerant address 12
1
ON
Refrigerant address 13
1
ON
Refrigerant address 14
1
ON
Functions
OFF
ON
No. 5
Room temperature detector
Indoor unit
Remote control
No. 6
MA remote controllers are directly connected to indoor units within the same
group.
Not mixed
Mixed
Comments
This should normally be set to OFF.
E-73
PARTS
SW No.
OPTIONAL
Refrigerant address 15
1
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
SW502 : Air Conditioner Function Settings
(Set this switch based on the functions of the M series connected to this device.)
M series
SW No.
Functions
OFF
ON
Comments
No. 1
Availability of a heating mode
No. 2
Not in use
–
–
Permanently set to ON.
No. 3
Not in use
–
–
Permanently set to ON.
No. 4
Not in use
–
–
Permanently set to ON.
No. 5
Not in use
–
–
Permanently set to OFF.
No. 6
Not in use
–
–
Permanently set to OFF.
No. 7
Not in use
–
–
Permanently set to OFF.
No. 8
Availability of a fan (Cooling model only)
Has a fan or mode
OFF
No fan or mode ON
Combined cooler and
heater
Cooling unit only
–
–
P/S series
OFF
Functions
SW No.
Comments
ON
No.1
Cooling only type/Heat pump type
Heat pump type
Cooling only type
Set the mode in accordance with the operation manual for the
indoor unit.
No.2
Auto mode
Not available
(setting No. 3
disabled)
Available
(setting No. 3
enabled)
Heat pump type : Set to ON.
Cooling only type : Set to OFF.
Available
(unit)
Available
(remote controller)
Set to OFF.
4 speeds
3 speeds (2-speed
model set ON)
When operating a 2-speed model with the 3-speed setting (ON),
the MA remote controller display will indicate 3 fan speeds.
The table below shows the displays and the actual outputs at
that time.
Display
Meaning
Indoor unit output
No.3
No.4
Fan speed
Low speed
Low speed
Medium speed
High speed
High speed
High speed
No.5
Vane
Available
Not available
The Vane function of either of indoor unit :
When the function is provided, it is Available (OFF).
When the function is not provided it is Not available (ON).
No.6
Swing
Available
Not available
The Swing function of either of indoor unit :
When the function is provided, it is Available (OFF).
When the function is not provided, it is Not available (ON).
No.7
Not in use
No.8
Fan mode
–
–
Not available
Available
Permanently set to OFF.
Set to ON.
* Fan speed 2 step model : An actual fan speed is 2 step though the display of remote controller becomes 4 step or 3 step.
5. Test Run (Check Operations)
Interface status monitor
You can check the status of the interface by the LED lamp on the interface unit board.
LED lamp no.
Lamp off
Lamp on
Blinking
LED521
DC 12 V is not being supplied from the
air conditioner.
DC 12 V is being supplied from the air
conditioner.
–
LED522
Device is not communicating properly
with the air conditioner.
–
Blinking at approx. 1 second intervals: Device is communicating
normally with the air conditioner.
LED523
Device is not communicating properly
with the MA remote controller.
–
Blinking at approx. 8 second intervals: Device is communicating
normally with the MA remote controller.
* Use the table above to check the device operations.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-74
MA & Contact Tetminal Interface MAC-397IF-E
6. Mounting the MA & CONTACT TERMINAL Interface Unit
When mounting the interface to the back-side dent of MFZ-KA model, be sure to apply insulation material to prevent condensation from
forming.
The Interface unit should be placed in a location where the connecting cable from the interface can reach an indoor unit.
The device will not function properly if the connecting cable is extended so the connecting cable should not be extended.
Mount the interface unit securely to a pillar or wall using 2 or more screws.
When Using Wall Mounting Brackets(2)
1
Attach the wall mounting brackets (2) to the interface unit (1)
using 2 mounting serews (3).
Interface unit (1)
mounting
screws
2
Mount the unit to a pillar or wall using 2 mounting screws (3).
Wall mounting
brackets (2)
Cord clamp for
wiring (13)
Mounting
screws (3)
Mounting screws (14)
Mounting screws (3)
When Mounting Directly to a Wall
Mount the interface unit (1) case to the wall using the mounting
screws (3).
Interface unit (1)
mounting screws
When mounting the interface unit (1) inside a ceiling or wall,
install an access door to facilitate maintenance.
When the interface unit (1) is mounted above
an indoor unit, it should be positioned 40 mm or more
away from the unit to ensure that ceiling grills
can be removed.
40 mm or more
Mounting
screws (3)
* When mounting the interface unit (1) using a cushioning
material (4), be sure to mount it in a location where it will not
fall.
Interface unit (1)
Attach the interface unit (1) connecting cable here.
Store extra connecting cable in the ductwork space behind
the indoor unit.
* If there is any slack in the connecting cable, use a fastener (12)
to keep it in place.
Cushioning material (4)
7. Specifications
Input current
12 V
2W
0.15 A
E-75
PARTS
Power consumption
OPTIONAL
Input voltage
M-NET Interface
MAC-399IF-E
Descriptions
Photo
Enables centralized and individual control of M series and S
series models with new-A control using M-NET.
Applicable Models
TO
T
OB
BE
E CONFIRMED
CONFIR
RMED
MSZ-FD25/35/50VA(S)
MLZ-KA25/35/50VA
MSZ-GE22/25/35/42/50VA
SEZ-KA
MSZ-GA60/71VA
SLZ-KA
MFZ-KA25/35/50VA
Specifications
Power
Operating conditions
Indoor unit connecting cable
Weight
Dimensions
12V DC (supplied from indoor unit)
Indoor only (ambient temperature: 0
to 40͠ , no condensation)
Dedicated 5-wire cable
350g (including indoor unit
connecting cable)
Unit : mm
271
51
81
26
3111
21
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-76
251
65
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Before Installation
1.1. How to Use the M-NET Interface
Caution
When using a packaged air conditioner (city-multi) system remote controller, you cannot register packaged air conditioners and room air conditioners in the same group. In this case, register the Packaged and room air conditioner in
different groups.
Functions
Centralized and individual management of M/P/S series using M-NET(*).
* A type of packaged air conditioner control (city-multi)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Related Products Sold Separately
ME Remote Controller PAR-F27MEA
Centralized Controller G-50A
System Remote Controller PAC-SF44SRA
ON/OFF Remote Controller PAC-YT40ANRA
Schedule Timer (M-NET) PAC-YT34STA
Power supply unit PAC-SC50KUA
Sample of System Configuration (only M/S series outdoor-unit)
Sample configuration of a system using a centralized controller
Centralized controller (M-NET)
Power supply unit
Packaged air conditioner system
M-NET Interface
Indoor unit
ME Remote Controller
* The number of units that can be connected to the
centralized controller (G-50A) is max. 50, including
packaged and room air conditioners. The wiring
from the M-NET Interface to the centralized
controller can have a maximum length of 500 m.
The wiring from the M-NET Interface to the ME
Remote Controller can have a maximum length of
10 m.
For details, see the MELANS Catalog and the
instruction manuals for the Centralized Controller
and ME Remote Controller.
1.2. Accessory
Before installing the device, make sure you have all the necessary parts.
Accessory
Items to Prepare at the Installation Site
1
Mounting brackets
1
Screws for mounting 3.5˜12
4
Cushioning material (with adhesive)
1
Cord clamp for mounting (small)
2
Mounting cord clamp (large)
2
Screws for mounting and 3.5˜12
2
Screw for mounting and 4˜10
* Use this when mounting cord clamp to and around M
series.
1
Screw for mounting and 4˜16
* Use this when mounting cord clamp together with the
parts of M series.
1
Cable ties
4
Fasteners (for joining the lead wires)
5
Cord clamp for wiring
5
Screws for mounting 3.5˜12
5
Interface case mounting screws 3.5˜12
2
#
Connection wiring (centralized controller)
Shield wiring CVVS/CPEVS
$
Connection wiring (for connecting the ME Remote Controller)
Remote control wires (2-core sheath wire 0.3 mm2)
%
Related parts sold separately
* Prepare the necessary number of parts sold separately as needed
for your system.
* CPEVS; PE insulated PVC jacketed shielded communication cable
* CVVS; PVC insulated PVC jacketed shielded control cable
PE: Polyethylene PVC: Polyvinyl chloride
E-77
PARTS
Interface unit (with 5-core connecting cable)
OPTIONAL
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
2. Mounting the M-NET Interface Unit
The M-NET Interface unit should be placed in a location where the 5-core connecting cable from the interface can reach an indoor
unit. Do not extend the 5-core connecting cable. This will cause the device to malfunction.
Mount the interface unit securely to a pillar or wall using 2 or more screws.
When Using Wall Mounting Brackets 1
Attach the wall mounting brackets to the interface unit
using 2 mounting screws .
Interface unit 2
Mount the unit to a pillar or wall using 2 mounting screws .
Wall mounting
brackets Cord clamp for
wiring $
Mounting
screws Mounting screws %
Mounting screws When Mounting Directly to a Wall
Mount the interface unit case to the wall using the mounting
screws .
Interface case
mounting screws &
When the interface unit is mounted
above an indoor unit, it should be
positioned 40 mm or more away from the
unit to ensure that ceiling grills can be
removed.
Mounting
screws * When mounting the interface unit using a cushioning
material , be sure to mount it in a location where it will not
fall.
Interface unit Cushioning material OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-78
When mounting the interface unit inside a ceiling
or wall, install an access door to facilitate maintenance.
40 mm or more
Attach the 5-core connecting cable of the interface unit
here. Store extra 5-core connecting cable in the
ductwork space behind the indoor unit.
* If there is any slack in the 5-core connecting cable,
use a fastener # to keep it in place.
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
3. Setting the Switches
If the system is not configured correctly, the unit will not function properly. You may be unable to control the functions of the RAC
from the System Controller/ME Remote Controller or functions not available on your RAC could appear on the System Controller/
ME Remote Controller display. You should therefore ensure that the system is properly configured before connecting the power
supply.
‫ع‬SW500 No. 1, No. 2 - Not in use
These should be set to OFF (if set to ON, the device will not communicate properly with the System Controller).
‫ع‬SW500 No. 3 - Power On/Off Settings
This setting indicates whether the RAC should be turned off or on when power is supplied to the RAC or M-NET Interface.
Turn on with power
No
[Unit remains off when the power is supplied.]
Turn on with power
Yes
[Unit turns on when the power is supplied.]
‫ع‬SW500 No. 4 - Availability of RAC purifier or fan mode
If there is no "Purifier" button on the wireless remote control, and if the word "Fan" does not appear when the "Mode" button is
pressed, the purifier and fan modes are not available (set to OFF).
Does not have a purifier or fan mode
Has a purifier or fan mode
‫ع‬SW500 No. 5ÐNo. 8 - RAC Function Check
SW500
Function description
How to check a function
OFF
ON
If "Auto" is not displayed when you push the "Mode" button on the wireless remote control, the auto operation
mode is not available (OFF).
Does not have an auto
operation mode
Does have an auto operation mode
No. 5
Availability of automatic operation mode (a mode that allows the air conditioner to determine whether to select
cooling or heating).
Availability of a fan oscillation
setting
If "Oscillate" is displayed when you push the "Fan Direction" button on the wireless remote control, the fan oscillation setting is available (OFF). (If there is no "Fan
Direction" button, the setting is OFF.)
Has a fan oscillation setting
Does not have a fan oscillation setting
Availability of a fan direction
setting
If there is a Fan Direction button on the wireless remote
control, the fan direction setting is available (OFF).
Has a fan direction setting
Does not have a fan direction setting
Availability of a heating mode
If "Heat" appears when you push the "Mode" button
on the wireless remote control, the unit is a model that
offers both cooling and heating (OFF).
Dual cooling and heating
model
Cooling unit only
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
‫ع‬SW510, SW501 - Address settings
Specifies the address settings for centralized management (address settings can be set from 01-50).
Self-Address
SW510 sets the 10s position of the address and SW501 sets the 1s position of the address.
For example, to set a unit to the address 25, set SW510 to "2" and SW501 to "5".
E-79
PARTS
1s position
OPTIONAL
10s position
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
‫ع‬Position of SW500, SW501, SW510
TB520
IC510
1
S
R51A
C510
B2
A2
B1
A1
LD501-2
(1)
D500
R504 R503
C575 LD503-1
A
DM00J805B
C520
1
C521
SW520
C523
C524
C522
C526
Q520
R520
Q521
R521
C525
12
1
11
1
23
CN513
33
1
CN512
CN511
SW500
ZD521
C527 C528
1
ZD522
ZD523
R528
ON
1
IC570
C572
ON
10
SW500
R5B6
4 CN504
IC520
44
9
11
34
8
C576
LD501-1
C571
C570
R565
C560
R563
L571
PC560
SW510
SW501
C574
C573
5
CN560
1
L570
PG
1
SW501
4
Pb Solder
R518
R527
22
1
R564
PC561
R526
R524
R522
R523
R525
1
R5F7 R5F5 R5F3 R5F1
R5F6 R5F4 R5F2 R502
Q560
PG
M-Net1
ZD520
R5B7
R5B8
R5B1
R5B2
R5B3
1
64
R5E1
R5G6
1
R5G5 R5G4 C501
R5G2
Q561 LD502-1
R5G3
C500
R562
R5G1
5
R5B4
R5B5
CN501
IC500
R5C6 R5C5
24
R5C4
R5C1
R5C2
R5C3
R500
40
M-NET
Address
SW510
IC501
LD502-2
R5E5
R5E4
R5E3
R5E2
CN127
CN514
R5A1
1
R585
CN502
1
R5D8
R5D7
R5D6
R5D5
R5D4
R5D3
R5D2
R5D1
R5E8
R5E7
R5E6
8
R510
CST50
R501
DIP
CST51
DIP
R5A6
R5A7
R5A8
R5A2
R5A3
R5A4
R5A5
R550
R540
R535
R541
R584
R583
R582
C503
39
9
1
27
R505
M-Net2
TB521
R511
R512
R513
R514
R515
R516
R517
40
C512
C511
R536
R506
26
C513
R507
C502
C514
CN503
LD503-2
R509
R508
R551
14
52
11
13
Pb Solder
PG
(2)
DM00J805B
A
4. Connecting the M-NET Interface
Connect the M-NET Interface board to the RAC indoor control board.
RAC
Indoor control board
Interface unit (1)
Connect the connecting cable that comes with the
M-NET Interface unit to the connector CN105 on
the indoor control board.
࡮The cables connected to the RAC should be mounted on or near the RAC.
If the connecting cable is not securely mounted, the connector may detach, break, or malfunction.
Mounting screws (8)4 ˜10
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Mounting cord clamp (6)
Electrical wire mounting
bracket
Mounting screws (9)4 ˜16
E-80
Mounting cord clamp (6)
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
5. Connecting the M-NET Interface, the Power Supply, and the ME Remote Controller
࡮When connecting the unit to a system controller or ME Remote Controller, connect the transmission line of the M-NET to the
control signal terminal.
Connect the 2-core connection wrings (A) to A1/B1 or A2/B2 (they can be connected to either).
࡮Cross the shield portion of each connecting wire using the S terminal only when cross wiring the connection wires.
࡮When connecting the connection wrings (A) and the ME Remote Controller connection wrings (B) to the terminal board, there is
no need to worry about polarity.
When the connection wrings(A)are not cross-wired
A1 B1 A2 B2
When the connection wrings(A) are cross-wired
A1 B1 A2 B2
S
Ԙ Shield
ԙ Connection wirings (A)
(M-NET transmission wire)
Ԛ ME Remote Controller
(only when needed)
S
Ԙ
ԙ
ԙ
ԙ
Bare wire size
Ԛ
Ԛ
࡮After completing the wiring, securely affix a cord clamp to each electrical wire.
When the connection wrings (A)are cross-wired
Ԙ
Ԙ
ԙ
ԙ
Ԙ
OPTIONAL
Ԙ Screws
ԙ Cord clamp (large)
Ԛ Cut with nippers at the notches.
Make sure the cut surface is free of any burr so that the
connection wire dose not get damaged.
Caution
࡮ Electrical work should be performed in accordance with the Technical Standards Regarding Electrical Equipment
and the Interior Wiring Standards.
࡮ Connection wiring and remote control wiring should be located as far away from other electrical wiring as possible.
Placing them too closely together could cause a malfunction.
E-81
PARTS
Ԛ
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
6. Notes Regarding Use
Please read this information carefully before attempting a test run.
The following control information should be thoroughly explained and provided to the users of this device. (Please provide these
instructions to the user once the installation is complete.)
* This M-NET Interface operates RACs using the controls of a packaged air conditioner (city-multi), but there are several limitations imposed as a result of the functional differences between RACs and packaged air conditioners.
1. When operating the system using a system controller or ME Remote Controller, these operations will not appear on the
display of the wireless remote controller.
2. The dehumidifying modes of individual RACs cannot be operated using the ME Remote Controller/System Controller.
When an independent dehumidifying mode is set using the remote controller that came with the RAC, "Dry" will appear on
the display because there is no corresponding mode on the ME Remote Controller/System Controller.
3. Functions that are available on the ME Remote Controller/System Controller but that are not available on the RAC can be
operated by switching to a predetermined separate operation mode. (See the "Table of RAC Functions Activated from the
ME Remote Controller/System Controller.")
4. Functions that are available on the remote controller of the RAC but are not available on the ME Remote Controller/System
Controller will produce a predetermined display. In this case, the actual operation and the display may differ. (If the fan
speed is automatically set using the remote controller that came with the RAC, the setting "High" will appear on the ME
Remote Controller/System Controller. Likewise, if the fan direction is set to automatic, the setting "Downward Air Flow 80%"
will appear on the ME Remote Controller/System Controller.)
5. Because the temperature range of the RAC is broader than the ME Remote Controller/System Controller, when the RAC is
set to lower than 17°C or higher than 30°C, the temperature display on the ME Remote Controller/System Controller will
show the minimum or maximum temperature that can be set. (For example, even if the room air conditioner is set to cool a
room to 16°C, the display on the ME Remote Controller/System Controller may read "17°C.")
The RAC operates according to the room temperature detected by the RAC unit.
6. Timer operations should be set using only the remote controller that came with the RAC or the ME Remote Controller/
System Controller. If both are used to set the timer to the same time, the timer will not function properly.
7. When the timer is set using the remote controller that came with the RAC, the timer information will not be displayed on the
ME Remote Controller/System Controller.
8. If the timer is set using the ME Remote Controller/System Controller, the timer set using that device will not be cancelled
even if the unit is turned off using the remote controller that came with the RAC.
9. When manual operations using the system controller are prohibited, the remote controller that came with the RAC will not
function, but the beeping sound that is emitted when it is operating normally will still sound.
10. To clear an error message from the display of the ME Remote Controller/System Controller, briefly turn off the unit using
the ME Remote Controller/System Controller or the remote controller that came with the RAC. (The error display on the air
conditioner unit may be cleared automatically, but it will not clear from the ME Remote Controller/System Controller until
the unit is turned off.)
11. The room temperature sensor installed in the ME Remote Controller cannot be used.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-82
M-NET Interface MAC-399IF-E
7. Table of RAC Functions Activated from the ME Remote Controller/System Controller
This table shows the RAC functions that can be activated by the ME Remote Controller/System Controller.
Power
Mode
Temperature settings
Fan speed settings
Air directional settings
ME Remote Controller/System Controller operations/display
RAC response
On/Off
On/Off
Fan
Fan
Auto Cool
Cool
Auto Heat
Heat
Cool
Cool
Heat
Heat
Dry
Dry
17-30 °C
17-30 °C
Low
Low
Medium 1
Low
Medium 2
Medium
High
High
Position 1 (Horiz.)
Position 1 (Horiz.)
Position 2
Position 3
Position 3
Position 4
Position 4
Position 5
Swing
Swing
E-83
PARTS
OPTIONAL
* Some items may not be displayed, depending on the switch settings.
* When operating the unit using the remote controller that came with the RAC, the operation shown on the remote is the one that
will be activated on the actual RAC unit. In this case, the information shown on the display of the ME Remote Controller/System
Controller may not accurately reflect the unit's actual operations (see the "Notes Regarding Use").
Centralized On/Off Remote Controller
MAC-821SC-E*
*MAC-397IF-E required
Descriptions
Photo
Enables regulate up to 8 indoor units from one single remote
controller. ON/OFF selection and operation status confirmation
is possible.
TO
T
OB
BE
E CONFIRMED
CONFIRMED
Applicable Models
MSZ-FD25/35/50VA(S)
SEZ-KA/KD
MSZ-GE22/25/35/42/50VA
SLZ-KA
MSZ-GA60/71VA
MFZ-KA25/35/50VA
MLZ-KA25/35/50VA
Specifications
No. of controlled
air conditioners
8 Units
Power
~/,N220-240 V 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
4W
Current
0.02 A
Ambient Tempreture
0 - 40 °C
Dementions
(H x W x D mm)
120 x 120 x 15
Weight
910 g
Dimensions
Unit : mm
㧞㧙㧠㨄㧥JQNG
4
POWER
4
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-84
5YKVEJDQZ
Centralized On/Off Remote Controller MAC-821SC-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Accessory
Before installing the unit, make sure that you have all the necessary parts.
1
Centralized controller
A Cover
Remove the cover with a flathead screwdriver.
B Screw
1
2
Base plate
1
3
Switch box
1
4
Room name stickers
1
5
Rubber seal (large)
2
6
Rubber seal (small)
1
7
Sealing material (adhesive)
4
8
Mounting screw M4 30
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Items to Prepare at the Installation Site
One per air
conditioner
A
MA & Contact terminal interface
(MAC-397IF-E)
B
Power supply wire (2-core + ground) 1.5 mm2, in
conformity with Design 245 IEC 57.
1
C
Connection wire
Wire specification
CVV (3-core) 0.5 mm2 or equivalent
* CVV is a control cable which is sheathed in polyvinyl chloride with polyvinyl insulated wires inside.
One per air
conditioner
D
Ring tongue terminal for M4
1
E
PG connection
1
A
B
C
C
D
E
Mounting Wall
This centralized controller can be mounted on a wall with a thickness of 6-30 mm.
Since the maximum wall thickness for the centralized controller 1 mounting screw M4 30 8 is 17 mm, use screws of the
appropriate length for the wall thickness if the wall is between 17 mm and 30 mm thick.
(The best length for an M4 mounting screw is the wall thickness plus 13 mm.)
1-1. Connection Requirements
The MA & Contact terminal interface (MAC-397IF-E) is necessary to connect MAC-821SC-E with RAC.
Connection wire C
L
N
Ground
Breaker capacity
10 A
D
C
M
MAC-821SC-E
TB571
TC1
TC2
CN560
TM1
TM2
MAC-397IF-E
5
CN105
Air conditioner
Indoor unit
Connect to the supply terminals and leave a contact separation of at least 3 mm at each pole to disconnect the source power pole.
(When the power switch is shut off, it must disconnect all poles.)
E-85
PARTS
Breaker *
Power supply
~/N 220Ð240 V
50/60 Hz
OPTIONAL
Power supply wire B
Centralized On/Off Remote Controller MAC-821SC-E
1-2. Selecting an Installation Site
The centralized controller 1 is an exposed, wall-mounted model.
Install the unit in a dry location.
For information on selecting a mounting wall, see the "Mounting Wall" in section 2 .
Switch Box
The centralized controller power and connection wiring is generally direct wired.
The switch box
supplied (with switch box covers for 2 units) should therefore be used for installing the centralized controller.
1-3. Electrical Work
Use 1.5 mm2 power supply wire (2-core + ground).
For the connection wire C , use a control cable CVV (0.5 mm2 3-core) or equivalent product.
CVV is a control cable which is sheathed in polyvinyl chloride with polyvinyl insulated wires inside.
Complete the power supply wire and connection wire work before mounting the centralized controller.
The electrical work should be performed in accordance with the Technical Standards Regarding Electrical Equipment and the
Interior Wiring Standards.
1-4. Assigning Air Conditioner Device Numbers
The numbers (1Ð8) displayed on the control panel of the centralized controller 1 correspond to the numbers of each connected
air conditioner (device number).
Assign air conditioner device numbers that correspond to the numbers shown on the control panel based on the structure of the
building or the layout of the rooms in which the air conditioners are installed.
1-5. Sample of Configuration
This figure shows a sample 4-unit configuration.
Connection wire C (max. length of 100 m)
A
A
A/C Device No. 3
A/C Device No. 2
Power supply
~/N 220Ð240 V 50/60 Hz
A
A/C Device No. 1
A
A/C Device No.4
Centralized controller 1
A MA & Contact terminal interface (MAC-397IF-E)
1-6. Mounting Diagram
Connection wire C
(3-core)
Rubber seal
(large) 5
Connection wire C
(3-core)
Switch box 3
Switch box 3
Power supply
wire B
Base plate 2
Centralized controller 1
Cover
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Wall
PG connection E
Screw
E-86
Mounting screw 8
M4 30
Sealing material 7
(adhesive)
Mounting screw
(M4 10)
Centralized On/Off Remote Controller MAC-821SC-E
2. Mounting the Centralized Controller/Direct Wiring
2-1. Mounting Preparations
1
2
3
Remove 2 screws, and remove the base plate 22 from the switch box 33 .
Set the 2 screws aside, as they will be used in the section on "4-1. Mounting
the Base Plate" under "Mounting the Centralized Controller".
Screw M4
Insert the switch box 33 into the wall. Size the hole in the wall to ensure that
there is go gap between the switch box 33 and the wall surface.
Use the switch box 3 wall installation dimensions and opening dimensions
shown in the figure below.
Base plate 22
Switch box 33
Feed the power supply wire B , connection wire C , and ground wire from
3
inside of the wall, and pull them through the switch box 3 into the room
about 150 mm.
In addition, when not using a conduit for a connection wire C , be sure to install a rubber seal (large) 55 or rubber seal (small)
6 into the hole in the switch box 33 before feeding the connection wire C through the hole.
E prepared at the installation site to secure the power supply wire B in the hole in the switch box 3 .
Use the PG connection E
* Do not make the hole any larger than
necessary.
Switch box 3
Wall opening dimensions
100 3 mm
Wall
Rubber seal (large) 5
Switch box 33
0Ð5 mm
Connection
wire C
Power supply wire B
150 mm
4
Wa
ll
op
en
ing
57 mm or more
dim
en
E
PG connection E
sio
ns
10
8
3m
m
After the screws have been removed from the cover of the centralized controller 11 , remove the cover using a flathead
screwdriver.
2-2. Connecting the Connection Wire
1
Connect the power supply wire (2-core + ground) B to the power terminal.
After they are connected, check that the wires cannot be easily pulled off.
Power terminal
Power supply wire B
(2-core + ground)
Signal terminal
2
* Be sure to use 1.5 mm power supply
wire B (2-core + ground).
* The work on power supply wire end
should be performed as shown in the figure below.
Ring tongue
terminal for
D
M4 D
80 mm
Ground
Connection wire C
C
(3-core)
10 mm
8 mm
E-87
PARTS
Connection wire C
(3-core)
Work on Power Supply wire End
OPTIONAL
Washer
Centralized On/Off Remote Controller MAC-821SC-E
2
3
Mount the ground wire using the ground wire mounting screws.
Connect the connection wire (3-core) C
C to the MA & Contact terminal interface (MAC-397IF-E) A , (sold separately) corresponding to the air conditioner device number of each unit on the signal terminal.
* One signal terminal can be used for connecting 4 rooms.
Work on Connection Wire End
Signal terminal
Note: Centralized controller side
6 mm
100 mm
* Connect the devices corresponding to
their display number on the control panel.
* Connect the centralized controller to the adapters as shown below .
Connection wire (3-core)
Centralized
controller
D
C
M
TC1
TC2
TM1
TM2
MA & Contact
terminal interface A
3. Mounting the Centralized Controller
3-1. Mounting the Base Plate
Insert the base plate 2 into the switch box 3 , and remount it
using the screws removed in the "3-1 Mounting Preparations".
Be sure to mount the base plate 2 so the up arrow is facing
upward.
Also, be careful not to damage the wires by getting them caught
between plate and the switch box 33 .
Up arrow
Screw M4
Base plate 22
Screw
Switch box 33
3-2. Mounting the Centralized controller
1
2
3
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4
5
E-88
Before mounting the unit, apply the supplied sealing materials 77
to the base plate 2 , and fill in the space between the switch box
33 and the hole in the wall (a gap here could result in dew condensation).
Cut the sealing material 77 to a length such that it can be wrapped
around the hole in the wall based on the fixed position.
Centralized
controller 11
Switch box 33
Wall
Base plate 22
Mounting screw 88
M4 30
Sealing material 77
Connect the connection cord from the base plate 22 through the
slot in the centralized controller.
Mount the centralized controller to the base plate 22 using the supplied mounting screw 88 .
Be careful not to damage the connection wires by getting them caught in the walling materials.
Using the supplied screw, attach the cover to the centralized controller.
To attach the cover to the centralized controller, fit the tabs along the top of the cover into the holes in the centralized controller
and then push the lower portion of the cover into place.
Centralized On/Off Remote Controller MAC-821SC-E
Caution
4.
Be sure not to tighten the mounting screw 88
too tight.
Doing so may disfigure the centralized controller and prevent the cover from closing securely.
Base plate 22
* Pass through
the slotted hole
Mounting screw 88
M4 30
Cover
* Pass through the
slotted hole
Sealing
Centralized
material 77
controller
Screw
C
Connection wire C
Extra connection wire can be stored in the area
between the centralized controller and the cover.
4. Test Run
A test run should be performed after the centralized controller and the MA & Contact terminal interface (MAC-397IF-E) have all
been installed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Turn the power switch on each air conditioner to ON.
Press the ON/OFF button on the wireless remote controller for each air conditioner to make sure the air conditioner turns on,
and then press the button again to turn each unit off.
Supply power (AC 220-240 V) to the centralized controller .
Press the ON/OFF button on the upper part of the control panel of the centralized controller, and confirm that the (green)
operation indicator lamp for that device number comes on.
Also confirm that the corresponding air conditioner has turned on (the operation indicator lamp will not come on if the air
conditioner is not connected).
Press the ON/OFF button again, and confirm that the operation indicator lamp goes out and that the air conditioner unit turns
off.
Repeat steps
4 and 5 again for each device number.
Press the All OFF button, and confirm that all the (green) operation indicator lamps go out and that all the air conditioners turn
off.
5. Room Name Display
Room name stickers 44
E-89
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Select the appropriate stickers from the room name stickers 44 supplied, and affix them to the display section of the panel.
Power Supply Terminal Kit
for new A-Control indoor units
(L/N/Earth)
PAC-SG94HR-E
Descriptions
Photo
This kit (L/N/Earth) is used when the power supply of the
indoor unit and the outdoor unit is separated.
(For PUHZ applications only)
Applicable Models
PKA-RP35/50HAL
PKA-RP50/60/71/100KAL
Specifications
Terminal block capacity
Terminal block material
Dimensions
20A/250V
Denatured melamine
Unit : mm
Connector 2P (Blue)
N
53.8
L
24
39.2
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-90
120
Power Supply Terminal Kit for new A-Control Indoor units (L/N/Earth) PAC-SG94HR-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Overview
This kit is used when the power supply of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is separated.
(for PUHZ applications only)
Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit as well.
2. Provided parts
Comfirm the following parts are included.
Terminal block
(lead wires already wired) x 1
Screw (to attach terminal
block) x 1
Fastener (to tie lead wires) x 1
Screw (to secure ground wire) x 1
For PAC-SG96HR-E only
1:1 System
<For models without heater>
•The indoor power supply
terminal kit is required.
L
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / outdoor unit connecting cords
Wired remote controller(option)
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
L
N
S1
S1
S2
S2
S3
N
S3
1
2
•Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
Simultaneous twin/triple/four system
<For models without heater>
•The indoor power supply
terminal kits are required.
L
L
L
L
L
N
N
N
N
N
S1
S1
S1
S2
S2
S2
S3
S3
S3
S3
S3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
S1
S2
S1
S2
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / outdoor unit connecting cords
Wired remote controller(option)
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
Indoor unit earth
E-91
PARTS
OPTIONAL
•Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
Power Supply Terminal Kit for new A-Control Indoor units (L/N/Earth) PAC-SG94HR-E
3. Attachment method
■ Wall mounted, PKA-RP.HAL type:
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
1. Remove the electrical box covers
(front and side).
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector
(yellow)
Terminal block
attachment hole
Relay connector
(blue)
Ground wire
Change the yellow
and blue relay
connectors.
■ Wall mounted, PKA-RP.KAL type:
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
1. Remove the electrical box covers
(front and side).
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector
(yellow)
Relay connector
(blue)
Ground wire
Terminal block attachment hole
黄と青の中継コネ
Change
the yellowクタ
and
blue relay
connectors.
を差換える
4. Electric wiring
Be sure to do the electric wiring following the steps in each indoor unit installation manual.
5. Paste the labels enveloped in the instruction document of indoor unit near the electric wiring
diagrams of both indoor and outdoor units.
Three types of labels (labels A-C) are provided: Paste the label B.
(Separate indoor unit/outdoor unit power supplies... Label B)
6. DIP switch settings of the outdoor unit control board
It is necessary to change the settings of DIP switch on the outdoor unit control board.
Outdoor unit DIP switch settings
(when using separate indoor unit /
outdoor unit power supplies only)
ON
3
<SW8>
OFF 1 2
7. Test run
Perform a test run following the steps in the installation manual of the outdoor unit.
Change of connectors
Connectors (connections of initial setting are
for indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit)
Option
Option
Connectors
BLACK
CN01
Indoor unit
control board
L
N
Indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit
(initial setting)
S1
S2
S3
CN01
S3
BLUE YELOW
YELOW BLUE
CN01
YELOW
YELOW
S1
S2
BLUE
BLUE
L
N
If the indoor and outdoor units have
separate power supplies, change the
connections of the connectors as shown
in the following figure.
BLACK
CN01
Indoor unit
control board
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Separate indoor unit / outdoor unit power supplies
E-92
Power Supply Terminal Kit
for new A-Control indoor units
(L/N/Earth)
PAC-SG96HR-E
Descriptions
Photo
This kit (L/N/Earth) is used when the power supply of the
indoor unit and the outdoor unit is separated.
(For PUHZ applications only)
Applicable Models
PSA-RP GA
PCA-RP KA
Specifications
Terminal block capacity
Terminal block material
Parts composition
Dimensions
30A/330V
Denatured melamine
Terminal block (with lead wires
connected) x 1, Screw x 1, Fastener (for
binding lead wires)
Unit : mm
Connector 2P (Blue)
N
53.8
L
120
E-93
PARTS
OPTIONAL
24
39.2
Power Supply Terminal Kit
for new A-Control
indoor units (L/N)
PAC-SG97HR-E
Descriptions
Photo
This kit (L/N) is used when the power supply of the indoor unit
and the outdoor unit is separated.
(For PUHZ applications only)
Applicable Models
PCA-RP HA
PEAD-RP JA(L)
Specifications
Terminal block capacity 15A/264V
Terminal block material Denatured melamine
Terminal block (with lead wires connected)
Parts composition
x 1, Screw x 1, Fastener (for binding lead
wires)
Dimensions
Unit : mm
Connector 2P䋨Blue䋩
36
L
N
18.5
38
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-94
80
Power Supply Terminal Kit for new A-Control Indoor units PAC-SG96/97HR-E
How to Use / How to Install
1. Overview
This kit is used when the power supply of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is separated.
(for PUHZ applications only)
Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit as well.
2. Provided parts
Comfirm the following parts are included.
Terminal block (lead wires already wired) x 1
For PAC-SG96HR-E
Fastener (to tie lead wires) x 1
Screw (to attach terminal block) x 1
Screw (to secure ground wire) x 1
For PAC-SG97HR-E
For PAC-SG96HR-E only
1:1 System
<For models without heater>
•The indoor power supply
terminal kit is required.
L
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / outdoor unit connecting cords
Remote controller
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
L
N
S1
S1
S2
S2
S3
N
S3
1
2
•Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
Simultaneous twin/triple/four system
<For models without heater>
•The indoor power supply
terminal kits are required.
L
L
L
L
L
N
N
N
N
N
S1
S1
S1
S2
S2
S2
S3
S3
S3
S3
S3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
S1
S2
S1
S2
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / outdoor unit connecting cords
Remote controller
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
Indoor unit earth
•Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
3. Attachment method
■PAC-SG96HR
Ceiling suspended, PCA-RP.KA type:
1.Remove the cover of electric parts
box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
㩷
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector
(blue)
Relay connector (yellow)
Ceiling suspended, PCA-RP.GA type:
1.Remove the cover of electric parts
box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
Relay connector (blue)
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector (yellow)
Terminal block attachment hole
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
E-95
PARTS
Terminal block
attachment hole
N
N
OPTIONAL
L
Power Supply Terminal Kit for new A-Control Indoor units PAC-SG96/97HR-E
Wall mounted, PKA-RP.GAL type:
1.Remove the terminal block cover of
electric parts box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector (blue)
Terminal block attachment hole
Wall mounted, PKA-RP.FAL type:
1.Remove the terminal block cover of
electric parts box.
Relay connector
(yellow)
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
Change
the yellowクタ
and
黄と青の中継コネ
blue relay
connectors.
を差換える
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector
(blue)
Relay connector
(yellow)
Terminal block attachment hole
Ground wire
Ceiling concealed, PEAD-RP.EA type:
1.Remove the cover of electric parts
box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
Change
the yellowクタ
and
黄と青の中継コネ
blue relay
connectors.
を差換える
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Ground wire
Relay connector
(blue)
Relay connector
(yellow)
Ceiling concealed, PEA-RP.EA type:
1.Remove the cover of electric parts
box.
Terminal block
attachment hole
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
3. Change the relay connectors of blue and yellow
lead wires, secure the ground wire using screw
at the position shown in the figure, and then
bundle the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector
(yellow)
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Terminal block attachment hole
E-96
Relay connector
(blue)
Power Supply Terminal Kit for new A-Control Indoor units PAC-SG96/97HR-E
■PAC-SG97HR
Ceiling suspended for kitchens, PCA-RP.HA type:
1.Remove the terminal block cover of
electric parts box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
3. Change the relay connectors of blue
and yellow lead wires, and then bundle
the lead wires using fastener .
Relay connector
(blue)
Relay connector
(yellow)
Terminal block attachment hole
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
Ceiling concealed, PEAD-RP.JA(L) type
1.Remove the cover of electric parts
box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw
in the direction shown in the figure.
3.Change the relay connectors of blue
and yellow lead wires.
Relay connector
(blue)
Relay connector
(yellow)
Terminal block
attachment hole
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
Ceiling concealed, PEAD-RP.GA type:
1.Remove the terminal block cover of
electric parts box.
2. Attach terminal block using screw in the direction shown in the figure.
3.Change the relay connectors of blue
and yellow lead wires.
Relay connector Relay connector
(blue)
(yellow)
E-97
PARTS
Change the yellow and
blue relay connectors.
OPTIONAL
Terminal block attachment hole
Power Supply Terminal Kit for new A-Control Indoor units PAC-SG96/97HR-E
4. Electric wiring
Be sure to do the electric wiring following the steps in each indoor unit installation manual.
5. Paste the labels enveloped in the instruction document of indoor unit near the
electric wiring diagrams of both indoor and outdoor units.
Three types of labels (labels A-C) are provided: Paste the label B.
(Separate indoor unit/outdoor unit power supplies... Label B)
6. DIP switch settings of the outdoor unit control board
It is necessary to change the settings of DIP switch on the outdoor unit control board.
Outdoor unit DIP switch settings
(when using separate indoor unit /
outdoor unit power supplies only)
ON
3
<SW8>
OFF 1 2
7. Test run
Perform a test run following the steps in the installation manual
of the outdoor unit.
Change of connectors
(except PCA-RP·KA type)
BLUE
BLUE
L
N
If the indoor and
outdoor units have
separate power
supplies, change
the connections of
the connectors as
shown in the
following figure.
Connectors (connections of initial setting are
for indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit)
Option
CND
YELOW
YELOW
ORANGE
CND
Indoor unit
control board
S1
S2
S3
Connectors
L
N
ORANGE
CND
CND
BLUE YELOW
YELOW BLUE
Indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit
(initial setting)
Indoor unit
control board
S1
S2
S3
Separate indoor unit / outdoor unit power supplies
(PCA-RP·KA type)
Connectors (connections of initial setting are
for indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit)
Option
CN01
YELOW
YELOW
S1
S2
BLUE
BLUE
L
N
BLACK
CN01
If the indoor and
outdoor units have
separate power
supplies, change
the connections of
the connectors as
shown in the
following figure.
Indoor unit
control board
Option
S3
Connectors
L
N
CN01
S1
S2
S3
BLUE YELOW
YELOW BLUE
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit
(initial setting)
BLACK
CN01
Indoor unit
control board
Separate indoor unit / outdoor unit power supplies
E-98
Indoor power supply terminal kit
PAC-SH52HR-E
Descriptions
Photo
This kit is used when the power supply of the indoor unit and
the outdoor unit is separated.
(for PLA-RP•BA series applications only)
Applicable Models
PLA-RP•BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Terminal block capacity
Terminal block material
Dimensions
5A/250V
Denatured melamine
Unit : mm
31
82
310
N
E-99
PARTS
OPTIONAL
52
L
Connector 2P(Blue)
Indoor power supply terminal kit PAC-SH52HR-E
L
N
How to Use / How to Install
Terminal block
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-100
Screws(2pcs)
Indoor power supply terminal kit PAC-SH52HR-E
Change of connectors
Connectors
BLUE
BLUE
L
N
CN01
YELOW
YELOW
BLACK
CN01
Indoor unit
control board
S1
S2
S3
Connectors
L
N
BLACK
CN01
CN01
BLUE YELOW
YELOW BLUE
Indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit
(initial setting)
Indoor unit
control board
S1
S2
S3
Separate indoor unit / outdoor unit power supplies
1:1 System
<For models without heater>
•The indoor power supply
terminal kit is required.
L
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / outdoor unit connecting cords
Remote controller
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
L
N
S1
S1
S2
S2
S3
N
S3
1
2
•Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
Simultaneous twin/triple/four system
<For models without heater>
•The indoor power supply
terminal kits are required.
L
L
L
L
L
N
N
N
N
N
S1
S1
S1
S2
S2
S2
S3
S3
S3
S3
S3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
S1
S2
S1
S2
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / outdoor unit connecting cords
Remote controller
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
Indoor unit earth
•Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
4. Electric wiring
Be sure to do the electric wiring following the steps in each indoor unit installation manual.
5. Paste the labels enveloped in the instruction document of indoor unit near
the electric wiring diagrams of both indoor and outdoor units.
Three types of labels (labels A-C) are provided: Paste the label B.
(Separate indoor unit/outdoor unit power supplies... Label B)
6. Paste the seal on the surface of indoor electric cover.
OPTIONAL
It is necessary to change the settings of DIP switch on the outdoor unit control board.
E-101
PARTS
7. DIP switch settings of the outdoor unit control board
Wired Remote Controller with Weekly Timer Function PAR-21MAA*-J
*MAC-397IF-E required
Descriptions
Photo
Advanced MA remote controller with the large size dot liquid
crystal display. Multi-language display and weekly timer
function are available.
Applicable Models
MSZ-FD25/35/50VA(S)
MFZ-KA25/35/50VA
MSZ-GE22/25/35/42/50VA
MLZ-KA25/35/50VA
MSZ-GA60/71VA
Specifications
External colors
Dimensions
Cover
Pure white
(Munsell 6.9Y 8.9/0.4)
LCD
peripheral area
Medium gray
Unit : mm
TEMP.
ON/OFF
130
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-102
83.5
120
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
19
46
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
How to Use / How to Install
1
Confirming the Supplied Parts
Confirm that the box includes the following parts, in addition to this installation manual:
1. Remote controller (cover, body) ..................................................................................... 1
2. Cross recessed pan head screw (M4 ˜30) .................................................................... 2
3. Wood screw (4.1 ˜16, used for directly hooking to the wall) ......................................... 2
4. Caution label (in 12 languages) ..................................................................................... 1
*1 For the remote control, obtain a 2-core cable between 0.3 and 1.25 mm2 at the site.
*2 PAC-YT32PTA cannot be connected.
2
1.
Remote controller cover
Remote controller body
How To Install
Choose a place in which to install the remote controller (switch box).
Be sure to observe the following steps:
(1) Temperature sensors are provided with both the remote controller and the indoor units. When using the
remote controller temperature sensor, the master remote controller detects the room temperature. Install
the master remote controller in a place where the average room temperature can be detected and which
is not affected by any heat source from direct sunlight or air blown from air conditioning units.
External size
of remote
controller
Extra space
around remote
controller
30 mm
CAUTION The place where (when) the difference between the room temperature and the wall temperature is large, the wall temperature that is affected by the temperature of the wall on
which the remote controller is installed is measured. Therefore, the difference between
the room temperature and the measured wall temperature may be large.
When the installation site is one of the followings, use of a temperature sensor for an
indoor unit is recommended.
- When the room is not well-ventilated and the air does not reach the wall on which the
remote controller is installed.
- When the difference between the temperature of the wall on which the remote controller is installed and the room temperature.
- When the backside of the wall on which the remote controller is installed is exposed
to the outdoor air.
When the temperature changes drastically, the temperature may not be measured accurately.
30 mm
30 mm
Temperature
sensor
120 mm
When a remote controller temperature sensor is used in a place which is likely to be affected by the wall on which the remote controller is
installed, use of an optional spacer (Model: PAC-YT83RS) for a remote controller is recommended.
(For how to set the main and sub remote controller, see step (1) "Remote controller" [4]-3. (1) in section 6 Function Selection .
For how to set the temperature sensor, see step (2) "Unit function selection" in section 6 Function Selection .)
(2) When installing on either the switch box or the wall, allow extra space around the remote controller as shown in the figure at the right.
30
2.
25
30
46
102
10
6
25
73
6
20
20
(3) Parts which must be supplied on site.
࡮Switch box for two units
࡮Thin-copper wiring pipe
࡮Lock nut and bushing
࡮Surface raceways
83.5 0.4
102
NOTE: Make sure that there is no wiring or wire near the remote controller sensor. If there is, the remote controller cannot detect the exact room
temperature.
7
20
15 or less
10
44
Switch box two units
Seal the remote controller cord with putty in order to prevent the possible entry of dew, water droplets, cockroaches, other insects, etc.
When using the switch box
When installing directly on the wall
࡮When installing on the switch box, seal
࡮When opening a hole using a drill for the remote controller cord (or when taking the cord
the connections between the switch box
out of the back of the remote controller), seal the hole with putty.
and wiring pipe with putty.
࡮When routing the cord via the portion cut off from the upper cover, similarly seal that
portion with putty.
࡮When taking the remote controller cord from back of the controller, use surface raceWiring pipe
ways.
Wall
Use surface
raceways
Remote control cord
Lock nut
Switch box
Seal around here
with putty.
Bushing
Seal around here
with putty.
For taking cord out of top of
remote controller
Remove the remote controller cover.
࡮Insert a minus screwdriver into one of the open slots and move the screwdriver in the arrow direction.
OPTIONAL
3.
For taking cord
out from back of
remote
controller
CAUTION Do not turn the screwdriver in the slot. Doing so may damage the slot.
E-103
PARTS
Remote control
cord
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
4.
Install the lower case on the switch box or directly on the wall.
When using the switch box
Switch box for two units
Remote control cord
(See 5 below)
When installing directly on the wall
Remote control cord
(See 5 below)
Wood screw
Cross recessed pan
head screw
Seal the remote control cord
lead-in hole with putty.
(See 2 above)
CAUTION Do not tighten the screws too tight. Doing so may deform or crack the lower cover.
NOTE: - Choose a flat plane for installation.
- Fasten the switch box at more than two places when installing directly on the wall.
- When reinstalling on the wall, fasten securely using anchors.
5.
Connect the remote control cord to the remote controller terminal block.
To indoor unit MA remote
controller or A controll
terminal block
To connect the
remote control cord,
peel 6mm of coating.
There is no polarity.
AB
CAUTION
Do not use crimp terminals to connect to remote controller terminal blocks. The terminals may contact the board and cause
trouble or contact the cover and damage the cover.
CAUTION Prevent remote cord chips from getting into the remote controller. Electric shock or malfunction may result.
6.
Wiring hole for installing directly on the wall (or open wiring)
࡮Cut off the shaded area from the upper cover using a knife, nippers, etc.
࡮Take out the remote control cord connected to the terminal block via this portion.
7.
Install the cover to the remote controller.
To remove the cover, insert a minus
screwdriver into one of the open
slots, and move it in the direction of
the arrow shown in the figure.
First, hook the cover to the two upper claws and then fit it to the remote controller.
CAUTION Press the cover until it snaps shut. If not, it may fall off.
CAUTION Do not into turn the screwdriver in the slot. Doing so may damage the slot.
NOTE: A protection sheet is stuck to the operation section. Peel off this protection sheet before use.
3
Operation mode display
"TEST RUN" and "OPERATION MODE" are
displayed alternately.
Test Run
1. Before making a test run, refer to the "Test Run" section of the
indoor unit installation manual.
2. Press the [TEST] button twice successively within three seconds.
Test run starts.
3. Stop the test run by pressing the [ ON/OFF] button.
4. If trouble occurred during the test run, refer to the "Test Run" section of the indoor unit installation manual.
4
Ventilation Setting
Timer stops test run after two hours.
ûC
Piping temperature display
TEMP.
ON/OFF
Stop test run by pressing the [
MENU
BACK
PAR-21MAA
MONITOR/SET
ON/OFF
FILTER
DAY
CLOCK
CHECK TEST
OPERATION
CLEAR
ON/OFF] button.
During test run, the RUN lamp remains on.
[TEST] button
Make this setting only when interlocked operation with LOSSNAY is necessary with CITY MULTI
models.
(This setting cannot be made with Mr. SLIM air conditioners.)
* When the upper controller is connected, make the setting using the upper controller.
NOTE: When using LOSSNAY units in conjunction, interlock the addresses of all indoor units within the group and address of LOSSNAY units.
Perform this operation when you want to register the LOSSNAY, confirm the registered units, or delete the registered units controlled by the remote controller.
The following uses indoor unit address 05 and LOSSNAY address 30 as an example to describe the setting procedure.
[Setting Procedure]
Ԙ Stop the air conditioner using the remote controller [ ON/OFF] button.
If the OFF display shown below does not appear at this time, step ԙ cannot be performed.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
ԙ Press and hold down the [FILTER] and [
] buttons at the same time for two seconds. The display shown below appears. The remote controller
confirms the registered LOSSNAY addresses of the currently connected indoor units.
E-104
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
Ԛ Registration confirmation result
- The indoor unit address and registered LOSSNAY address are displayed alternately.
<Indoor unit address and indoor unit display>
<LOSSNAY address display and LOSSNAY display>
- When LOSSNAY are not registered
If registration is unnecessary, end registration by pressing and holding down the [FILTER] and [
] buttons at the same time for two seconds.
If a new LOSSNAY must be registered, go to step 1. Registration procedure. If you want to confirm another LOSSNAY, go to step 2. Confirmation
procedure. To delete a registered LOSSNAY, go to step 3. Deletion procedure.
< 1. Registration procedure >
Set the address of the LOSSNAY and the indoor unit connected by the remote controller you want to register using the [
buttons. (01 to 50)
Set the address of the LOSSNAY you want to register using the [ CLOCK ( ) and ( )] buttons. (01 to 50)
TEMP. (
) and (
)]
) and (
)]
Indoor unit address
LOSSNAY address
Press the [TEST] button, and register the set indoor unit address and LOSSNAY address.
- Registration end display
The indoor unit address and "IC" and LOSSNAY address and "LC" are alternately displayed.
- Registration error display
If the address was not correctly registered, the indoor unit address and registered LOSSNAY address are alternately displayed.
Cannot be registered because the registered indoor unit or LOSSNAY does not exist.
Cannot be registered because another LOSSNAY was registered at the registered indoor unit.
< 2. Confirmation procedure >
Set the address of the indoor unit connected by the remote controller whose LOSSNAY you want to confirm using the [
buttons. (01 to 50)
TEMP. (
<Indoor unit address>
Press the [
MENU] button and confirm the LOSSNAY address registered at the set indoor unit address.
- Confirmation end display (When LOSSNAY is connected.)
The indoor unit address and "IC" and registered LOSSNAY address and "LC" are alternately displayed.
- Confirmation end display (When LOSSNAY is not connected.)
Registered indoor unit address does not exist.
< 3. Deletion procedure >
Use this procedure when you want to delete registration of indoor units connected by the remote controller and LOSSNAY.
10 Confirm (see 2. Confirmation procedure) the LOSSNAY you want to delete and display the indoor units and LOSSNAY confirmation results.
- Deletion error display
When deletion was not performed properly.
E-105
PARTS
OPTIONAL
11 Press the [ ON/OFF] button twice and delete registration of the LOSSNAY registered at the set indoor unit.
- Deletion end display
Indoor unit address and "" and registered LOSSNAY address and "" are alternately displayed.
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
5
Function Selection
(1) Function selection of remote controller
The setting of the following remote controller functions can be changed using the remote controller function selection mode. Change the setting
when needed.
Item 1
1. Change Language
("CHANGE LANGUAGE")
2. Function limit
("FUNCTION SELECTION")
3. Mode selection
("MODE SELECTION")
Item 3 (Setting content)
࡮Display in multiple languages is possible.
Item 2
Language setting to display
࡮Setting the range of operation limit (operation lock)
࡮Setting the use or non-use of "automatic" operation mode
࡮Setting the temperature adjustable range (maximum, minimum)
࡮Selecting main or sub remote controller
* When two remote controllers are connected to one group, one controller must be set to sub.
(2) Use of clock setting ("CLOCK")
࡮Setting the use or non-use of clock function
(3) Timer function setting ("WEEKLY TIMER")
࡮Setting the timer type
(4) Contact number setting for error situation ("CALL.")
࡮Contact number display in case of error
࡮Setting the telephone number
(1) Temperature display q
C/q
F setting ("TEMP MODE q
C/q
F")
4. Display change
࡮Setting the temperature unit (q
C or q
F) to display
("DISP MODE SETTING") (2) Suction air temperature display setting ("ROOMTEMP DISP SELECT") ࡮Setting the use or non-use of the display of indoor (suction) air temperature
(3) Automatic cooling/heating display setting ("AUTO MODE DISP C/H" ࡮Setting the use or non-use of the display of "Cooling" or "Heating" display during operation
with automatic mode
(1) Operation function limit setting (operation lock) ("LOCKING FUNCTION")
(2) Use of automatic mode setting ("SELECT AUTO MODE")
(3) Temperature range limit setting ("LIMIT TEMP FUNCTION")
(1) Remote controller main/sub setting ("CONTROLLER MAIN/SUB")
[Function selection flowchart]
[1] Stop the air conditioner to start remote controller function selection mode. ψ [2] Select from item1. ψ [3] Select from item2. ψ [4] Make the setting.
(Details are specified in item3) ψ [5] Setting completed. ψ [6] Change the display to the normal one. (End)
Normal display (Display when
the air condition is not running)
(Hold down the E button and press the D button for two
seconds.)
* The display cannot be changed during the unit function
selection, the test run and the self diagnosis.
Item 1
Press the G button.
Change Language
("CHANGE LANGUAGE")
(Hold down the E button and press
the D button for two seconds.)
* The remote controller records the
setting that is made in this way.
Remote Controller Function
Selection Mode
See [4]-1
Item 3
(Setting content)
Item 2
Press the
E button.
Function limit
("FUNCTION
SELECTION") Press the
G button.
Press the Press the
E button. E button.
Press the
Mode selection G button.
("MODE
SELECTION")
Press the
E button.
Press the
Display change G button.
("DISP MODE
SETTING")
Operation function limit setting ("LOCKING FUNCTION")
Press the G button.
Use of automatic mode setting ("SELECT AUTO MODE")
Press the
D button.
Temperature range limit setting ("LIMIT TEMP FUNCTION")
Remote controller main/sub setting ("CONTROLLER MAIN/SUB")
Press the G button.
Use of clock setting ("CLOCK")
Dot display
The language that is selected in
CHANGE LANGUAGE mode
appears on this display. English
is set in this manual.
See [4]-2. (1)
See [4]-2. (2)
See [4]-2. (3)
Press the
D button.
See [4]-3. (1)
F
See [4]-3. (2)
TEMP.
Timer function setting ("WEEKLY TIMER")
See [4]-3. (3)
E
Contact number setting for error situation ("CALL.")
See [4]-3. (4)
G
Temperature display q
C/q
F setting ("TEMP MODE q
C/q
F")
Press the G button.
Suction air temperature display setting ("ROOM TEMP DISP SELECT")
Automatic cooling/heating display setting ("AUTO MODE DISP C/H")
[Detailed setting]
[4] -1. CHANGE LANGUAGE setting
The language that appears on the dot display can be selected.
࡮ Press the [ MENU] button to change the language.
Ԙ Japanese (JP), ԙ English (GB), Ԛ German (D), ԛ Spanish (E),
Ԝ Russian (RU), ԝ Italian (I), Ԟ Chinese (CH), ԟ French (F)
[4] -2. Function limit
(1) Operation function limit setting (operation lock)
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ no1 : Operation lock setting is made on all buttons other than
the [ ON/OFF] button.
ԙ no2 : Operation lock setting is made on all buttons.
Ԛ OFF (Initial setting value): Operation lock setting is not made.
* To make the operation lock setting valid on the normal screen, it is
necessary to press buttons (Press and hold down the [FILTER]
and [ ON/OFF] buttons at the same time for two seconds.) on
the normal screen after the above setting is made.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
(2) Use of automatic mode setting
When the remote controller is connected to the unit that has automatic operation mode, the following settings can be made.
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ ON (Initial setting value) : The automatic mode is displayed when
the operation mode is selected.
ԙ OFF
: The automatic mode is not displayed
when the operation mode is selected.
E-106
NOTE
Timer operation stops when the display
for remote controller function selection is
changed to the normal one.
MENU
BACK
MONITOR/SET
PAR-21MAA
Press the
D button.
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
FILTER
DAY
CLOCK
I
A
CHECK TEST
OPERATION
CLEAR
B
H
See [4]-4. (1)
C
D
See [4]-4. (2)
See [4]-4. (3)
(3) Temperature range limit setting
After this setting is made, the temperature can be changed within the set range.
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ LIMIT TEMP COOL MODE :
The temperature range can be changed on cooling/dry mode.
ԙ LIMIT TEMP HEAT MODE :
The temperature range can be changed on heating mode.
Ԛ LIMIT TEMP AUTO MODE :
The temperature range can be changed on automatic mode.
ԛ OFF (initial setting) :The temperature range limit is not active.
* When the setting, other than OFF, is made, the temperature range limit setting
on cooling, heating and automatic mode is made at the same time. However,
the range cannot be limited when the set temperature range has not changed.
࡮ To increase or decrease the temperature, press the [ TEMP ( ) or ( )] button.
࡮ To switch the upper limit setting and the lower limit setting, press the [
]
button. The selected setting will flash and the temperature can be set.
࡮ Settable range
Cooling/Dry mode : Lower limit: 19q
C ~ 30q
C Upper limit: 30q
C ~ 19q
C
Heating mode :
Lower limit: 17q
C ~ 28q
C Upper limit: 28q
C ~ 17q
C
Automatic mode : Lower limit: 19q
C ~ 28q
C Upper limit: 28q
C ~ 19q
C
* The settable range varies depending on the unit to connect (Mr. Slim units,
Free-plan units, and intermediate temperature units)
[4] -3. Mode selection setting
(1) Remote controller main/sub setting
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ Main : The controller will be the main controller.
ԙ Sub : The controller will be the sub controller.
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
(2) Use of clock setting
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ ON : The clock function can be used.
ԙ OFF : The clock function cannot be used.
(3) Timer function setting
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button (Choose one of
the followings.).
Ԙ WEEKLY TIMER (initial setting on MA deluxe):
The weekly timer can be used.
ԙ AUTO OFF TIMER: The auto off timer can be used.
Ԛ SIMPLE TIMER (Default setting on MA smooth):
The simple timer can be used.
ԛ TIMER MODE OFF: The timer mode cannot be used.
* When the use of clock setting is OFF, the "WEEKLY TIMER" cannot be
used.
(4) Contact number setting for error situation
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ CALL OFF: The set contact numbers are not displayed in case of error.
ԙ CALL **** *** **** : The set contact numbers are displayed in case
of error.
CALL_
: The contact number can be set when the display is as
shown on the left.
࡮ Setting the contact numbers
To set the contact numbers, follow the following procedures.
Move the flashing cursor to set numbers. Press the [ TEMP. ( ) and
( )] button to move the cursor to the right (left). Press the [ CLOCK
( ) and ( )] button to set the numbers.
[4] -4. Display change setting
(1) Temperature display q
C/q
F setting
ON/OFF] button.
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [
Ԙ C: The temperature unit q
C is used.
ԙ F: The temperature unit q
F is used.
(2) Suction air temperature display setting
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ ON : The suction air temperature is displayed.
ԙ OFF : The suction air temperature is not displayed.
(3) Automatic cooling/heating display setting
࡮ To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Ԙ ON : One of "Automatic cooling" and "Automatic heating" is displayed
under the automatic mode is running.
ԙ OFF : Only "Automatic" is displayed under the automatic mode.
(2) Unit Function Selection
Perform only when change is necessary with Mr. SLIM air conditioner.
(Cannot be performed with CITY MULTI control system.)
Set the functions of each indoor unit from the remote controller, as required. The functions of each indoor unit can be selected only from the remote controller.
Set the functions by selecting the necessary items from Table 1.
Table 1. Function selection contents (For a detailed description of the factory settings and mode of each indoor unit, refer to the indoor unit installation manual.)
Function
Power failure automatic
recovery
Indoor temperature
detecting
LOSSNAY connectivity
AUTO mode
Filter sign
Fan speed
No. of air outlets
Installed options
Up/down vane setting
Energy saving air flow
Humidifier
Settings
Not available
Available (Approximate 4 minutes wait-period after power is restored.)
Indoor unit operating average
Set by indoor unit's remote controller
Remote controller's internal sensor
Not Supported
Supported (indoor unit is not equipped with outdoor-air intake)
Supported (indoor unit is equipped with outdoor-air intake)
Energy saving cycle automatically enabled
Energy saving cycle automatically disabled
100 Hr
2500 Hr
No filter sign indicator
Quiet
Standard
High ceiling
4 directions
3 directions
Not supported
Supported
No vanes
Equipped with vanes (No. 1 set)
Equipped with vanes (No. 2 set)
Disabled
Enabled
Not supported
Supported
Mode No.
01
01
02
02
02
03
03
03
05
05
07
07
07
08
08
08
09
09
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
Setting No.
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
Check
Object unit address No.
Unit address No. 00
These items are set for all indoor units.
Unit address No. 01 to 04 or
AL
These items are set for each
indoor unit.
NOTE: When the indoor unit functions were changed using the function selection after installation is complete, always indicate the set contents by
entering ٤ or other mark in the appropriate check field of Table 1.
[Function selection flow]
First grasp the function selection flow. The following describes setting of "Room temperature detection position" of Table 1 as an example.
(For the actual setting procedure, see [Setting procedure] Ԙ to ԡ.)
Ԙ Check the function selection set contents.
ԙ Switch to the FUNCTION SELECTION mode.
(Press # and $ simultaneously in the remote controller OFF state.)
(
YES
Ԝ Registration (Press button ' .)
ԝ Mode No. Selection
TEMP.
00 (Indoor unit specification)
(Specified indoor unit
Fan operation)
02 (Room temperature detection position)
End?
'
BACK
PAR-21MAA
NO
Change
refrigerant
address and unit
address No.?
Ԟ Setting No. selection
3 (remote controller fixed)
(Buttons ( and ) operation)
ԟ Register (Press button ' .)
MENU
MONITOR/SET
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
FILTER
DAY
CLOCK
+
#
CHECK TEST
OPERATION
CLEAR
$
)
*
%
&
Ԡ
NO
YES
ԡ Ending function display (Press buttons # and $ simultaneously.)
E-107
PARTS
ԛ Unit address No. specification
(Buttons % and & operation)
00 (Outdoor unit specification)
(Unnecessary for single refrigerant system.)
OPTIONAL
Ԛ Refrigerant address specification
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
[Procedure] (Set only when change is necessary.)
Ԙ Check the set contents of each mode. When the set contents of a mode were changed by function selection, the functions of that mode also change.
Check the set contents as described in steps Ԛto Ԟ and change the setting based on the entries in the Table 1 check field. For the factory settings, refer to the indoor unit installation manual.
ԙ Set the remote controller to Off.
Ԛ Set the outdoor unit refrigerant address No.
Press and hold down the A [FILTER] and B [TEST] buttons at
When the C [ CLOCK ( ) and ( )] buttons are pressed, the refrigerant
the same time for two seconds or longer.
address No. decreases and increases between 00 and 15. Set it to the
"FUNCTION SELECTION" blinks for a while, then the remote conrefrigerant address No. whose function you want to select.
troller display changes to the display shown below.
(This step is unnecessary for single refrigerant system.)
Refrigerant address
display
* If the remote controller enters the OFF state after the "FUNCTION SELECTION" and room temperature displays "
communication is probably abnormal. Make sure there are no noise sources near the transmission line.
" have flashes for two seconds,
NOTE: If you make a mistake during operation, end function selection by step ԡ and repeat selection from step ԙ.
ԛ Set the indoor unit address No.
Press the D [ ON/OFF] button. The unit address No.
display "- -" flashes.
When the C [ CLOCK ( ) and ( )] buttons are pressed, the unit address No. changes in 00 ψ 01ψ02 ψ 03 ψ 04 ψ AL order. Set it to the
unit address No. of the indoor unit whose functions you want to set.
Unit address No. display
* When setting mode 1 to 3, set the unit address No. to "00".
* When setting modes 7 to 11:
- When setting for each indoor unit, set the unit address No. to "01-04".
- When batch setting for all indoor units, set the unit address No. to "AL".
Ԝ Refrigerant address and unit address No. registration
Press the E [
] button. The refrigerant address and unit address No. are registered.
After a while, the mode No. display "- -" flashes.
Mode No. display
When registered using the E [
] button, the registered indoor
unit begins fan operation. When you want to know the location of the
indoor units of the unit address No. whose functions were selected, check
here. When the unit address No. is 00 or AL, all the indoor units of the
selected refrigerant address perform the fan operation.
Ex) When refrigerant address 00, unit address No. = 02 registered
Refrigerant address 00
* When "
" flashes at the room temperature display, the selected refrigerant address is not in the system.
When "F" is displayed at the unit address No. display, and when it flashes
together with the refrigerant address display, the selected unit address
No. does not exist. Correctly set the refrigerant address and unit address No. by repeating steps ԙ and Ԛ.
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Registration
Unit address Unit address Unit address
No. 03
No. 01
No. 02
Fan operation
Remote Controller
* When grouping by different refrigerant systems and an indoor unit other
than the specified refrigerant address performs the fan operation, the
refrigerant address set here is probably duplicated.
Recheck the refrigerant address at the outdoor unit rotary switches.
ԝ Mode No. selection
Select the mode No. you want to set with the F [
TEMP. (
) and (
)] buttons. (Only the settable mode numbers can be selected.)
Mode No. display
Mode No. 02 = Room temperature detection position
Ԟ Select the setting contents of the selected mode.
When the G [ MENU] button is pressed, the current setting No.
flashes. Use this to check the currently set contents.
Select the setting No. using the F [
TEMP. (
) and (
)] buttons.
Setting No. display
Setting No. 1 = Simultaneous operation indoor units balance
Setting No. 3 = Remote controller built-in sensor
ԟ The contents set at steps Ԛ to Ԟ are registered.
] button is pressed, the mode No. and setting No. flash and registration begins. The flashing mode No. and
When the E [
setting No. change to a steady light and setting ends.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
* When "- -" appears at the mode No. and setting No. displays and " " flashes at the room temperature display, communication is probably abnormal.
Make sure there are no noise sources near the transmission line.
Ԡ To select more functions, repeat steps Ԛ to ԟ.
ԡ End function selection.
Press and hold down the A [FILTER] and B [TEST] buttons at the same time for two seconds or longer.
After a while, the function selection display disappears and the remote controller returns to the air conditioner off display.
* Do not operate the air conditioner from the remote controller for 30 seconds after the end of function selection.
NOTE: When the functions of an indoor unit were changed by function selection after the end of installation, always indicate the set contents
by entering a ٤ or other mark in the appropriate check field of Table 1.
E-108
Wired Remote Controller (with Weekly Timer Function) PAR-21MAA-J
6
Self check
Retrieve the error history of each unit using the remote controller.
Ԙ Switch to the self check mode.
When the ˴
* [CHECK] button is pressed twice successively
within three seconds, the display shown below appears.
ԙ Set the address or refrigerant address No. you want to self check.
When the ( [ TEMP. ( ) and ( )] buttons are pressed, the address
decreases and increases between 01 and 50 or 00 and 15. Set it to the
address No. or refrigerant address No. you want to self check.
Approximately three seconds after the change operation, the self check refrigerant address changes from flashing to a steady light and self check begins.
Ԛ Self check result display <Error history> (For the contents of the error code, refer to the indoor unit installation manual or service handbook.)
Self check address or self check refrigerant address
ERROR CODE
Address 3 digits or unit address No. 2 digits
Error code 4 digits or error code 2 digits
<When opposite side does not exist>
<When there is no error history>
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
ԛ Error history reset
The error history is displayed in Ԛ Self check results display.
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
When the
[ MENU] button is pressed twice successively within three
seconds, the self check address or refrigerant address flashes.
When the error history was reset, the display shown below appears.
When error history reset failed, the error contents are displayed again.
ERROR CODE
Ԝ Self check reset
There are the following two ways of resetting self check.
Press the * [CHECK] button twice successively within three seconds. Resets self check and returns to the state before self check.
Press the + [ ON/OFF] button Self check resets and indoor units stop.
(When operation is prohibited, this operation is ineffective.)
7
Remote Controller Check
When the air conditioner cannot be controlled from the remote controller,
use this function to check the remote controller.
Ԙ First check the power mark.
When normal voltage (DC12V) is not applied to the remote controller,
the power mark goes off.
When the power mark is off, check the remote controller wiring and
the indoor unit.
ԙ Switch to the remote controller check mode.
When the * [CHECK] button is held down for five seconds or
longer, the display shown below appears.
Ԛ Remote controller check result
When remote controller is normal
Power mark
When the # [FILTER] button is pressed, remote controller check begins.
When remote controller is faulty
(Error display 1) "NG" flashes Remote controller send/receive circuit abnormal
Since there is no problem at the remote controller, check for other causes.
When the problem is other than the checked remote controller
(Error code 2) "E3" "6833" "6832" flash ψ Cannot send
Remote controller switching is necessary.
(Error display 3) "ERC" and data error count are displayed ψ Data error generation
ERROR CODE
There is noise on the transmission line, or the indoor unit or another
remote controller is faulty. Check the transmission line and the other
remote controllers.
"Data error count" is the difference between the number of bits of remote controller
send data and the number of bits actually sent to the transmission line. In this
case, the send data was disturbed by the noise, etc. Check the transmission line.
OPTIONAL
ԛ Remote controller check reset
When the * [CHECK] button is held down for five seconds or longer, remote controller check resets and the "PLEASE WAIT" and RUN lamp
flash. Approximately 30 seconds later, the remote controller returns to the state before remote controller check.
E-109
PARTS
When data error count is 02
Remote controller send data
Send data on transmission line
Wired Remote Controller Kit
PAR-21MAAT-E
for Wall Mounted models
Descriptions
Photo
Enables the use of wired remote controller (PAR-21MAA) for
wall mounted models.
Applicable Models
PKA-RP HAL
PKA-RP KAL
Specifications
Terminal block capacity
Applicable wire
Terminal block material
Dimensions
10A/250V
Φ1.6mm or less
Phenol resin
Unit : mm
Terminal block
31.5
Lead wire
16
2.5
Terminal
34
Connector(2P)
Lead wire A:340
B:200
Wiring Diagram
Indoor unit’s electrical box
Terminal block
(TB5)
Indoor controller board
CNN22
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-110
Lead wire
To remote controller
(TB6)
E-111
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-112
E-113
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-114
E-115
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-116
E-117
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-118
E-119
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-120
E-121
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Wired Remote Controller Kit for Wall mounted models PAR-21MAAT-E
Signal sender
PAR-SL97A-E
Descriptions
Photo
Wireless remote controller for P series and SEZ models.
(The receiver is necessary.)
Applicable Models
SEZ-KD VA
PEA-RP200/250GA
Specifications
Accessory
“AAA” LR03 alkaline batteries: 2pcs
4.1×16 wood screw:2
Dimensions
Unit : mm
58
19
CHECK TEST RUN
MODEL SELECT
dC
AMPM
AMPM
NOT AVAILABLE
159
ON/OFF
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-122
TEMP
Signel reciever
PAR-SA9CA-E
Descriptions
Figure
Enables the use of wireless remote controller.
Applicable Models
ON/OFF
SEZ-KD VA
PEA-RP200/250GA
Specifications
Content
120(H)×70(W)×22.5(D) mm
0.2kg
DC12V
(supplied from indoor unit control)
0 㨪 40͠
Humidity : 30㨪 90%RH (no condensing)
ABS
White Grey (4.8Y7.92/0.66)
Item
external dimensions
Weight
Power
Tempreture
Material
Colour (Munsell)
Dimensions
Unit : mm
70
9.9
22.5
19
4.8
COOL
4.6
E-123
PARTS
9.2
OPTIONAL
HEAT
35.2
120
83.5
ON/OFF
Signal reciever PAR-SA9CA-E
How to Use / How to Install
5#?=6
[email protected][email protected]
)[email protected]@KKNSENEJC
/#
3ECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEPSENEJC
4"
/[email protected]
4"
[email protected]@NAOO
)[email protected]
3ECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEP
)#
#.
5#?=6
3ECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEPATPANJ=H
#AJPANKB3SEP?D>KT
3SEP?D>KT
)JOP=HH=PEKJLEP?D
II
EJ?D
II
EJ?D
II
EJ?D
0NKPNQOEKJ
LEHH=NAP?
5#?=6
#[email protected]
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
)[email protected]
(KHA
@NEHH=DKHAKJPDA?AEHEJCPKL=OOPDANAIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
3ECJ=H2A?AEREJC5JEP
5#?=6
&ETPECDPHUSEPDP=LA
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
/[email protected]
5#?=6
3>;D?DIJ7BB?D=:?H;9JBOEDJ>;M7BB
3>;DKI?D=J>;IM?J9>8EN
7=HH
OPTIONAL
PARTS
II
EJ?D
"QODEJC
[email protected]
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
!??AOOKNU
7ENEJCLELA
3SEP?D>KT
[email protected]
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
[email protected]
,K?GJQP
E-124
Signal reciever PAR-SA9CA-E
5#?=6
)[email protected][email protected]
[email protected][email protected]?DEPPKNAIKRAPDA
?KRAN
[email protected]@PDKB>[email protected]
>[email protected]
EJ?D
IQOP>[email protected]
5#?=6
4DEJS=HHLKNPEKJ
"KPPKI?=OA
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
#[email protected]?PEJCSENA
5#?=6
3?NAS
-T
[email protected]?PHUKJPDAS=HHKNPDA?AEHEJC
[email protected]?NASO
5#?=6
1 (=JCPDA?KRANPKPDAQLLANDKKGO
LH=?AO
2 -KQJPPDA?KRANPKPDAHKSAN?=OA
#NKOOOA?PEKJKBQLLANDKKGO
E-125
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Signal reciever PAR-SA9CA-E
Signal Receiving Unit
5#?=6
/7CFB;IOIJ;C9EDD;9J?ED
5#?=6
/[email protected]>APSAAJPDANAIKPA?KJPNKHHANOEO
ODKSJEJ;&EC<[email protected]@[email protected]>[email protected]
OUOPAIPK>[email protected]
&[email protected][email protected]>KKG
PD=P?=IASEPDPDAQJEP
EDD;9J?D=JE*H/)&*7?H9ED:?J?ED;H
[email protected][email protected]
#KJJA?PEJCPDAOECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEP
#KJJA?PPDAOECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEPPKPDA#.
#KJJA?PPKPDASENAHAOONA
IKPA?KJPNKHHAN>[email protected]@[email protected]?KJPNKHHAN
SENA#[email protected]
[email protected]
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
[email protected]
%EM0E&DIJ7BB
5#?=6JE5#?=6
ECCED?J;CI<EHQ&DIJ7BB7J?EDEDJ>;9;?B?D=S7D:Q&DIJ7BB7J?EDEDJ>;IM?J9>
8ENEHEDJ>;M7BBS
[ [email protected]=H2A?AEREJC5JEPSENA
KNP=GEJCPDA
SENAKQPKBPDA>=?GKBPDA3ECJ=H2A?AEREJC5JEPOA=HPD=PDKHASEPDLQPPU
[ 7DAJNKQPEJCPDASENARE=PDALKNPEKJ?QPKBBBNKIPDAQLLAN?=OAAMQ=HHUOA=H
PD=PLKNPEKJSEPDLQPPU
&DIJ7BBJ>;H;CEJ;9EDJHEBM?H;JEJ>;J;HC?D7B8BE9A5#?=6
&DIJ7BB?D=>EB;M>;DJ>;/?=D7B.;9;?L?D=1D?J?I?DIJ7BB;:EDJ>;M7BB:?H;9J
5#?=6
[ #[email protected]>KPPKI?=OA
K>HEMQAOA?PEKJ>U=GJEBAKN=
JELLAN
[ [email protected]?KJPNKHHANSENAPKPDAPANIEJ=H>NK?GPDNKQCD
PDEOOL=?A
&DIJ7BBJ>;BEM;H97I;EDJ>;IM?J9>8ENEH:?H;9JBOEDJ>;M7BB5#?=6
*EKDJ?D=J>;9EL;H5#?=6
5#?=6
3ECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEPATPANJ=H
II
EJ?D
#AJPANKB3SEP?D>KT
II
EJ?D
3SEP?D>KT
)JOP=HH=PEKJLEP?D
II
EJ?D
0NKPNQOEKJ
LEHH=NAP?
7KJ?ED
R &DI;HJJ>;9EL;HI;9KH;BOKDJ?BJ>;9B?9A?D=IEKD:?IC7:;&<DEJ:E?D=IEJ>;
9EL;HC7O<7BB
5#?=6
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
3ECJ=H2A?AEREJC5JEP
/;B;9JJ>;?DIJ7BB7J?EDI?J;
4DABKHHKSEJCIQOP>AK>[email protected]
#[email protected]@NAIKPA
?KJPNKHHANSENA.KPAPD=PPDAHAJCPDKBPDANAIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENAEO I
BP
)JOP=HHPDANAIKPA?KJPNKHHANSEPDEJPDANA=?DKBPDANAIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
7DAJEJOP=HHEJCKJAEPDANPDAOSEP?D>[email protected]
3ECJ=H2A?AEREJC5JEP=OODKSJEJPDABECQNAEJ;&EC<
7DAJEJOP=HHEJCPDA3ECJ=H2A?AEREJC5JEPPKPDAOSEP?D>KTPDA3ECJ=H2A
[email protected]@[email protected] II
[email protected]
0=NPOSDE?DIQOP>[email protected]
3SEP?D>KTBKNKJAQJEP
4DEJ?KLLANSENEJCLELA
,[email protected]>QODEJC
[email protected]P>A
>APSAAJ II
[email protected] II
EJ?D
)JOP=HHPDAQJEPKJPDA?AEHEJCKNKJPDAS=HHSDANAPDAOECJ=H?=J>[email protected]
BNKIPDASENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHAN
4DA =NA= SDANA PDA OECJ=H BNKI PDA SENAHAOO NAIKPA ?KJPNKHHAN ?=J >A NA
[email protected] [email protected] I
BP=S=UBNKIPDABNKJPKBPDAOECJ=HNA?AEREJCQJEP
)[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]
;
<
5#?=6
&ETPECDPHUSEPDP=LA
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
/[email protected]
+EJ;
R 0>;FE?DJM>;H;J>;H;CEJ;9EDJHEBB;HM?H;?I9EDD;9J;::?<<;HI:;F;D:?D=
EDJ>;?D:EEHKD?JCE:;B
07A;?DJE799EKDJJ>7JJ>;H;CEJ;9EDJHEBB;HM?H;97DDEJ8;;NJ;D:;:M>;D
I;B;9J?D=J>;?DIJ7BB7J?EDI?J;
R B<J>;/?=D7B.;9;?L?D=1D?J?I?DIJ7BB;:D;7H7<BKEH;I9;DJB7CFIF;9?7BBO
?DL;HJ;HJOF;I?=D7B?DJ;H9;FJ?EDC7OE99KH
;97H;<KB<EH?DIJ7BB?D=J>;/?=D7B.;9;?L?D=1D?JEHH;FB79?D=J>;B7CF
1I;J>;H;CEJ;9EDJHEBB;HM?H;JE9EDD;9J?JJEJ>;9EDD;9JEH +EDJ>;
9EDJHEBB;H9?H9K?J8E7H:EDJ>;?D:EEHKD?J
2ABAN PK PDA 3APPEJC PDA 0=EN .QI>AN 3SEP?D BKN @AP=EHO KJ ?KJPNKHHAN ?EN?QEP
>[email protected]@KKNQJEP
/;7BJ>;/?=D7B.;9;?L?D=1D?J9EH:B;7:?D>EB;M?J>FKJJO?DEH:;HJEFH;
L;DJJ>;FEII?8B;;DJHOE<:;MM7J;H:HEFB;JI9E9AHE79>;IEJ>;H?DI;9JI
;J9
5#?=6
II
EJ?D
OPTIONAL
PARTS
2AIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA
!??AOOKNU
7ENEJCLELA
,K?GJQP
"QODEJC
3SEP?D>KT
[email protected]
[ 7DAJEJOP=HHEJCKJPDAOSEP?D>KTOA=HPDA?KJJA?PEKJO>APSAAJPDAOSEP?D
>[email protected]
E-126
Emergency Operation for Wireless Remote-controller
/;JJ?D=
/;JJ?D=J>;F7?HDKC8;HIM?J9>
5#?=6
/;JJ?D=C;J>E:
!OOECJPDAO=IAL=ENJQI>ANPKPDASENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHAN=OPD=PKBPDAEJ
@KKNQJEP)[email protected]?KJPNKHHAN?=JJKP>[email protected]
101((
EJOP=HH=PEKJI=JQ=HPD=P?=IASEPDPDASENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHANBKNDKSPKOAP
L=ENJQI>ANOKBSENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHANO
[email protected]=EOUSENAKJPDA?KJPNKHHAN?EN?QEP>[email protected]@KKNQJEP
#KJPNKHHAN?EN?QEP>[email protected]@KKNQJEP
NABANAJ?A5#?=6
#.#KJJA?PKNBKNNAIKPA?KJPNKHHANSENA?KJJA?PEKJ
HEAT
COOL
&KNL=ENJQI>ANOAPPEJCOPDABKHHKSEJCL=PPANO
!$=NA=R=EH=>HA
0=ENJQI>AN
OAPPEJCL=PPANJ
)[email protected]?KJPNKHHAN?EN?QEP>[email protected]@A0KEJP
0=ENJQI>ANKJ
[email protected][email protected][email protected]
[email protected]
!
"
#
$
W
[email protected][email protected]
*@[email protected]
*@[email protected]
*[email protected]*@[email protected]
ON/OFF lamp (lit when unit is operating; unlit when unit is
not
/;JJ?D=;N7CFB;
operating)
Emergency
4KQOAPDAQJEPOEJPDAO=IANKKI
operation
In5#?=6-
cases where the remote control unit does not operate properly,
3AL=N=PAOAPPEJC
COOL or
HEAT button on the wireless remote
use
either the
[email protected]=ENJQI>[email protected][email protected]
control signal receiver to toggle the unit on or off. On cooler only units,
>UEPOKSJSENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHAN
pushingthe
HEAT button toggles the fan on and off.
5#?=6-
3EJCHAOAPPEJC
Pressing
the COOL or
HEAT button selects the following settings.
!OOECJPDAO=IAL=ENJQI>[email protected][email protected]
QJEPO>U=OEJCHASENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHAN
5#?=6-
Operation
mode
COOL
HEAT
[email protected]
Preset!OOECJPDAO=IAL=ENJQI>ANPKPDASENAHAOONAIKPA?KJPNKHHAN=OPD=PKBPDA
temperature
24 o C/75 oF
24 oC/75 oF
Fan speed
High
High
[email protected]
,A=RAPDAOAPPEJC=OEPEO=PLQN?D=OA
/;JJ?D=J>;*E:;B+E
5#?=6-
)JOANP>=PPANEAO
0NAOOPDA3%4>[email protected]
-/$%,3%,%#4 >[email protected]@[email protected]
>[email protected]
0NAOOPDAPAIL
0NAOOPDA3%4>[email protected]
-/$%,3%,%#4 [email protected]@[email protected][email protected]@KBB
)[email protected]@AH
[email protected]
0%!$
Signal Reciever
PAR-SA9FA-E
Descriptions
Photo
• Integrate the signal reciever in the corner panel (the opposite
side of refrigerant piping).
• Applicable only for PLA-BA,BA2,BA3 models.
Applicable Models
PLA-RP BA/BA2/BA3
Specifications
Dimensions
Model name
PAR-SA9FA-E
Operation indicator lamp
During operation: LED (green) lights, Abnormal
condition: LED (green) blinks, Preparing for
heating operation:LED.(orange) lights
Emergency operation
Cooling/heating switch (operate/stop)
equipped.
Number of controllable units
Maximum 16 refrigerant systems in one group
(At least one wireless signal receiving kit must
be installed to each refrigerant system.)
Adapter wiring
Connect the 9-core cord with connector
(attached) to CN90 of the indoor controller
board of the indoor unit.
Signal distance
Within 7m in 45 degrees range from the front of
the signal receiver
Unit : mm
㪈㪐
㪍
㪈㪐
㪍
取付位置
E-127
PARTS
OPTIONAL
㪉㪌㪍
㪈㪐
Signal reciever PAR-SA9FA-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Before installation
Turn off the main power before work.
● Open the intake grill and remove the corner panel where
refrigerant pipes are and where local wires are drawn into.
The corner panel removed is not needed.
When attaching the duct flange during installation of decoration
panel, perform the following work only after connecting the wires to
the decoration panei:
●The control box cover fixed by 3 screws,which is possible to hang
temporarily.
●Perform setting to designate the uint to be operated by the wireless
remote control.
Set J41 and J42 (jumper wires) on the indoor controller board and
pair number switch of the wireless remote control asfollows:
■Setting pair number
●Up to 4 patterns of pair number can be set.
Match the pair number (setting of J41 and J42) of the indoor
controller board and the pair number switch of wireless remote
control as shown in the table below.
See the installation manual provided with the wireless remote
control for details on setting method of the wireless remote control.
number of
Setting Pair
wireless remote
Pattern. controller.
A
B
C
D
0
1
2
One of procedures
3-9
Cut point of Jumper wires on the indoor
controller board.
Don't cut the jumper wire
Cut the jumper wire "J41"
Cut the jumper wire "J42"
Cut the jumper wire both "J41" and "J42"
2 Installation of signal receiving unit.
● Pull out the cable of infrared receiver from the square
hole in the corner of decoration panel, the portion of
corner panel that was removed in step 1.
●Pass the cable through the three hooking portions of unit and
electrical parts box as shown in the flgure, adjust the length of
cable so that the
●Slide the receiving unit in the direction as shown and fix it by the
screw which is used for the corner panel removed.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
●After the installation completed, set the cont,box cover as they were.
E-128
Wireless Remote Controller Kit
for Ceiling Suspended models
PAR-SL94B-E
Descriptions
Photo
Enables the use of wireless remote controller for ceiling
suspended models.
Applicable Models
PCA-RP KA
Specifications
During operation: LED (green) is lit,
Alarm: LED (green) flashes.
Cooler/heater button (start/stop) is
Emergency operation
provided.
Max. 16 refrigerant systems per group
Number of units controlled (One or more wireless light receivers
must be installed for each refrigerant
system.)
9-wire cord (standard accessory) with
Adapter wiring
connector is connected to the connector
(CN90) on the indoor unit control board.
7m or less, at within 45 degrees to the front of
Light receiver range
receiver (the range varies with conditions)
Temperature: 0 to 40͠ , Humidity: 30 to 90%
Operating conditions
(no condensation)
White gray (Munsell 4.48Y 7.92/0.66), ABS
Exterior
resin
Operation indication
Installation method
Dimensions
Unit : mm
31
99
E-129
PARTS
OPTIONAL
40
182
57
Attached to the brand label case of indoor unit.
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Making Sure of Components
Make sure that the following components, along with this manual, are packed in the box.
Component
Q’ty
Wireless remote controller reciever
1
1
Wireless remote controller
Remote control holder
1
2
“AAA” LR03 alkaline batteries
4.1×16 wood screws
2
2
Cord retaining clips
1
Connection cord fixing seal (12×30 size)
2 How to Install
Be sure to turn the power off before installing.
Removing the intake grille and the right side panel
• Slide the catch holding the intake grille backwards to open the grille. Remove the screw holding the side panel,
and then slide the side panel forward to remove it.
Side panel
Slide forward
Remove the screw holding the side panel
Slide
Catach retaining the intake grille
Removing the existing brand label case
• Remove the brand label case (name plate with MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC) from the bottom right of the unit. If it is difficult
to remove the case, use a flat-blade screwdriver, etc., taking care not to damage the panel.
Panel
Panel
Case
Installing to the indoor unit
• Pass the receiver board connector through the right side of the square hole to which the brand label case
was attached and then pull the connector and cord thruogh the slit in the right side of the bottom panel.
• Fit the receiver into the square hole where the brand label case was attached.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Slit
E-130
Retaining clip
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
Clips on the ceiling side
Laying out the lead wire
• Pass the lead wire for receiver through the retaining clips.
• Fix the lead wire for receiver with the clips on the ceiling side
of the unit.
Retaining clip
Removing the beam and the electrical box cover
• Remove the beam.
• Loosen the two screws at the bottom of the electrical box cover,
and then slide the cover to the left to remove it.
• Pull down the electrical box.
Also on the
{ Electrical box fixing screw
opposite side Electrical box cover fixing screw
Connecting the receiver board connector to the control circuit board
• Pass the cord through the bush at the top right of the electrical box.
• Connect the connector to CN90 on the right of the control board.
• If the cord is loose, bundle it using the clamps under the above bush.
Beam
Electrical box cover
CN90
Calmps
Bush
* The positions of the connectors may be different according to the model.
Please refer to the wiring diagram to confirm the positions of the connectors.
Reinstalling the removed components
• Reinstall the removed components in reverse order. (The brand lavel case is not needed.)
Remote control holder
• To install the wireless remote controller on a wall, first attach the remote control holder to a wall.
Fitting remote control into holder
Fix the remote control holder to the wall using
the 2 wood screws provided.
Insert the remote control into the holder.
Push the remote control against the wall.
Removing remote control
NOTE : The remote signal will reach the receiver over a distance of approx. 7m in a straight line and approx. 45°
left or right. If the infrared receiver is affected by fluorescent light (especially, inverter type), it may not be
able to receive the signal. Take this into consideration when installing fluorescent lights or replacing them.
E-131
PARTS
● Pull the top of remote control forward.
OPTIONAL
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
Pair Number Setting
3
• This is the setting to specify the unit to operate with the wireless remote controller.
• Make setting for J41, J42 (Jumper wire) of indoor controller board and the pair number of wireless remote cotroller.
• The pair number setting is available with the 4 patterns as shown in the following table. Make setting for the pair number
(J41, J42) of indoor controller board and the pair number of wireless remote controller which is used
as shown in the following table. *The initial setting is Pair No. “0”.
Press the SET button with something sharp at the end.
Start this operation from the status of remote controller display turned off.
MODEL SELECT blinks and Model No. is lighted.
min
Press the
button twice continuously. Pair No. “0” blinks.
Press the temp
button to set the pair number you want to set.
Press the SET button with something sharp at the end.
Set pair number is lighted for 3 seconds then turned off.
Pair No. of wireless remote controller Indoor PC board
0
Initial setting
1
Cut J41
2
Cut J42
3~9
Cut J41, J42
MODE
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
SET
h
min
TEST RUN
TEMP
ON/OFF
CN90
MODEL SELECT
RESET
CLOCK
* The positions of the connectors may be
different according to the model.
Please refer to the wiring diagram to
confirm the positions of the connectors.
Jumper wire (J41, J42)
4 Test Run
Measure an impedance between the power supply terminal block on the outdoor unit
and the ground with a 500V Megger and check that it is equal to or greater than 1.0 M.
TEST
RUN
SWING
NOT AVAILABLE
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
TEST RUN
min
SET
h
RESET
CLOCK
Turn on the main power to the unit.
TEST RUN
Press the
button twice continuously.
(Start this operation from the status of remote controller display turned off.)
TEST RUN and current operation mode are displayed.
MODE
Press the
(
) button to activate COOL mode, then check whether
cool air is blown out from the unit.
MODE
Press the
(
) button to activate HEAT mode, then check whether
warm air is blown out from the unit.
FAN
Press the
button and check whether strong air is blown out from the unit.
VANE
Press the
button and check whether the auto vane operates properly.
Press the ON/OFF button to stop the test run.
NOTE : • Point the remote controller towards the indoor unit receiver
while following steps to .
• It is not possible to run in FAN, DRY or AUTO mode.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-132
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
5 Function Selection
This setting is available only for Mr. Slim model. CITY MULTI model can be set by dip switch of indoor/outdoor
control circuit board. Refer to technical data of CITY MULTI model to set dip switch.
Each function can be set according to necessity using the remote controller.
The setting of function for each unit can only be done by the remote controller.
Select function available from the Table3. Function selection using wireless remote controller
is available only for refrigerant system with wireless function. Refrigerant address cannot
be specified by the wireless remote controller.
The article below describes how to set “LOSSNAY connectivity” into “supported
(indoor unit is not equipped with outdoor-air intake)” in Table 3 as an example.
Go to the function select mode
CHECK
Press the
button twice continuously.
(Start this operation from the status of remote controller display turned off.)
CHECK is lighted and “00” blinks.
Press the temp
button once to set “50”. Direct the wireless remote
controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit and press the h button .
Setting the unit number
Press the temp
button and to set the unit number “00”. Direct
the wireless remote controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit and
min
press the
button .
Selecting a mode
Enter 03 to change the LOSSNAY connectivity setting using the
and
buttons. Direct the wireless remote controller toward the receiver
h
of the indoor unit and press the
button .
Current setting number:
1=1 beep (1 second)
2=2 beeps (1 second each)
3=3 beeps (1 second each)
If a mode number that can not be recognized by the unit is entered,
3 beeps (3 beeps of 0.4 seconds duration)will be heard.
Reenter the mode number selecting.
If the signal was not received by the sensor or an error occurred during
transmission, you will not hear a beep or a “double beep” may be heard.
Press the h button again.
Selecting the setting number
Use the
and
buttons to change the LOSSNAY connectivity setting
to 02. Direct the wireless remote controller toward the sensor of the indoor
h
unit and press the
button .
→ At this time, current setting number for selected mode number will be output
by the interrupted buzzer sounds and the blinks of operation indicator.
Output : setting number = 1 → beep beep (0.4 second + 0.4 second) ×1
2 → beep beep (0.4 second + 0.4 second) ×2
3 → beep beep (0.4 second + 0.4 second) ×3
If a setting number that can not be recognized by the unit is entered, 3 beeps
(3 beeps of 0.4 seconds duration) will be heard (unit will beep only).
Reenter the setting number selecting.
If the signal was not received by the sensor or an error occurred during
transmission, you will not hear a beep or a “double beep” may be heard.
h
Press the
button again.
If the number that can not be set is input, the former setting number will be set.
To select multiple functions continuously
Repeat steps and to change multipul function settings continuously.
Complete function selection
Direct the wireless remote controller toward the sensor of the indoor unit
and press the button .
CHECK
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
TEST RUN
h
min
SET
RESET
CLOCK
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
E-133
PARTS
OPTIONAL
NOTE : Whenever changes are made to the function settings after construction or
maintenance, be sure to record the added functions with an “○”, in the
“Check” column provided on the chart.
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
Other function selections
Now that you know how to change LOSSANY connectivity setting, there are several other settings that can be changed as well.
The following table lists the various settings that can be changed through the remote controller and the default settings.
Table 3.
Function
Power failure automatic recovery
Indoor temperature detecting
LOSSNAY connectivity
Auto mode (only for PUHZ)
Filter sign
Fan speed
Up/down vane setting
Settings
Not available
Available
Indoor unit operating average
Set by indoor unit’s remote controller
Remote controller’s internal sensor
Not supported
Supported (indoor unit is not equipped with outdoor-air intake)
Not supported (indoor unit is not equipped with outdoor-air intake)
Energy saving cycle automitically enabled
Energy saving cycle automitically disabled
100Hr
2500Hr
No filter sign indicator
Quiet
Standard
High ceiling
No vanes
Equipped with vanes (No.1 set)
Equipped with vanes (No.2 set)
PCA-RP·KA
*1
*1
○
○
○
○
○
○
*1 Power failure automatic recovery initial setting depends on the connecting outdoor unit.
Things to remember when entering function selections:
The basic procedure for entering function selections is the same as described for switching between LOSSNAY connectivity.
However, there are some differences at step for selecting the unit number, step for selecting the mode number
and step for selecting the setting number.
The following Tables 4 and 5 list the various function settings, mode numbers and setting numbers.
Table 4 details the function of the entire refrigerant system while Table 5 shows the function that can be set for
the indoor unit.
Table 4. Itemized functions of the entire refrigerant system (select unit number 00)
Mode
Remarks
Mode no. Setting no. Check
Settings
1
Power failure
Not available
Approximately 4-minutes waitautomatic recovery Available (Approximately 4-minutes wait-period after power 01
2
period after power is restored.
is restored.)
1
Indoor temperature Indoor unit operating average
2
detecting
Set by indoor unit’s remote controller
02
Remote controller’s internal sensor
3
LOSSNAY
Not supported
1
connectivity
Supported (indoor unit is not equipped with outdoor-air intake)
2
03
Not supported (indoor unit is not equipped with outdoor-air intake)
3
Auto mode
1
Energy saving cycle automitically enabled
05
(only for PUHZ)
Energy saving cycle automitically disabled
2
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Table 5. Itemized functions of the indoor unit (select unit numbers 01 to 04 or 07)
Mode
Remarks
Mode no. Setting no. Check
Settings
1
Filter sign
100Hr
2
2500Hr
07
3
No filter sign indicator
1
Fan speed
Quiet
2
standard
08
High ceiling
3
Up/down vane
No vanes
1
setting
Equipped with vaneas (No.1 set)
2
11
Equipped with vaneas (No.2 set)
3
Setting the unit numbers
Set “00” as the unit number when setting function from Table 4.
When setting function from Table 5.
- When setting function for an indoor unit in an independent system, set the unit number to 01.
- When setting function for a simultaneous-Twin Triple quadruple indoor unit system, assign unit numbers from 01 to 04 to
each indoor unit.
- When setting the same functions for an entire simultaneous Twin Triple quadruple-indoor unit system, assign “07” as
the unit number.
Selecting the mode number
Select from Table 4 and Table 5.
Selecting the setting number.
E-134
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
6 Self-Check
CHECK
Turn on the main power to the unit.
CHECK
Press the
button twice continuously.
(Start this operation from the status of remote controller display turned off.)
CHECK begins to light.
«00» begins to blink.
While pointing the remote controller toward the unit’s receiver, press
the h button. The check code will be indicated by the number of
times that the buzzer sounds from the receiver section and the number
of blinks of the operation lamp.
Press the ON/OFF button to stop the self-check.
ON/OFF
TEMP
MODE
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
TEST RUN
SET
h
min
RESET
CLOCK
● Refer to the following tables for details on the check codes.
Output pattern (Mr.Slim model / CITY MULTI model)
[Output pattern A]
Beeper sounds
OPERATION
INDICATOR
lamp blink
pattern
Beep
Beep Beep Beep
Off
Beep
1st
2 nd
3 rd
nth
On
On
On
On
Beep Beep
1st
Off
On
2 nd · · · Repeated
On
0.5 sec. Approx. 2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Self-check Approx. 2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
starts
(Start signal
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates the check Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates
received)
code in the following table (i.e., n=5 for “P5”)
the check code in the following table
[Output pattern B]
Beeper sounds
OPERATION
INDICATOR
lamp blink
pattern
Beep
Beep Beep Beep
Off
Self-check Approx. 2.5 sec.
starts
(Start signal
received)
On
Approx. 3 sec.
Beep
Beep
1st
2nd
3 rd
nth
1st
On
On
On
On
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Off
0.5 sec. Approx. 2.5 sec.
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates the check
code in the following table (i.e., n=5 for “U2”)
On
Approx. 3 sec.
On
Beep
2 nd · · · Repeated
On
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates
the check code in the following table
Check code (Mr.Slim model)
E-135
PARTS
Remark
OPTIONAL
[Output pattern A] Errors detected by indoor unit
Wireless remote controller Wired remote
controller
Symptom
Beeper sounds/OPERATION
INDICATOR lamp blinks Check code
(Number of times)
1
P1
Intake sensor error
P2, P9
Pipe (Liquid or 2-phase pipe) sensor error
2
3
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
E6,E7
4
Drain sensor error/Float switch connector open
P4
5
Drain pump error
P5
Freezing/Overheating safeguard operation
6
P6
Communication error between indoor and outdoor units
EE
7
Pipe temperature error
P8
8
Remote controller signal receiving error
E4
9
–
–
10
–
–
11
Indoor unit control system error (memory error, etc.)
Fb
12
––
No corresponding
No sound
Wireless Remote Controller Kit for Ceiling Suspended models PAR-SL94B-E
[Output pattern B] Errors detected by unit other than indoor unit (outdoor unit, etc.)
Wireless remote controller Wired remote
controller
Symptom
Remark
Beeper sounds/OPERATION
INDICATOR lamp blinks Check code
(Number of times)
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
E9
1
(Transmitting error) (Outdoor unit)
2
Compressor overcurrent interruption
UP
3
Open/short of outdoor unit thermistors
U3,U4
UF
4
Compressor overcurrent interruption (When compressor locked)
Abnormal high discharging temperature/
U2
5
For details, check
insufficient refrigerant
the LED display
Abnormal high pressure (63H worked)/Overheating
U1,Ud
6
of the outdoor
protection operation
controller board.
7
Abnormal temperature of heat sink
U5
8
Outdoor unit fan protection stop
U8
Compressor overcurrent interruption/Abnormal of power module
9
U6
Abnormality of super heat due to low discharge temperature
10
U7
Abnormality such as overvoltage or voltage shortage and
11
U9,UH
abnormal synchronous signal to main circuit/Current sensor error
–
–
12
–
–
13
Others
Other errors (Refer to the technical manual for the outdoor unit.)
14
*1 If the beeper does not sound again after the initial 2 beeps to confirm the self-check start signal was received and
the OPERATION INDICATOR lamp does not come on, there are no error records.
*2 If the beeper sounds 3 times continuously “beep, beep, beep (0.4 + 0.4 + 0.4 sec.)” after the initial 2 beeps to confirm
the self-check start signal was received, the specified refrigerant address is incorrect.
• On wireless remote controller
The continuous buzzer sounds from receiving section of indoor unit.
Blink of operation lamp
• On wired remote controller
Check code display in the LCD.
Check code (CITY MULTI model)
[Output pattern A] Errors detected by indoor unit or LOSSNAY unit
[Output pattern B] Errors detected by unit other than indoor unit (outdoor unit, etc.)
Wired remote
Wireless remote controller
controller
Remark
Beeper sounds/OPERATION
INDICATOR lamp blinks
Check code
(Number of times)
1
1000 ~ 1999
2
2000 ~ 2999
3
3000 ~ 3999
4
4000 ~ 4999
5000 ~ 5999
5
6000 ~ 6999
6
7000 ~ 7999
7
0000 ~ 0999
8
8000 over
9
*1 Refer to service handbook of outdoor unit for the detail.
*2 If the beeper does not sound again after the initial 2 beeps to confirm the self-check start signal was received and
the OPERATION INDICATOR lamp does not come on, there are no error records.
*3 If the beeper sounds 3 times continuously “beep, beep, beep (0.4 + 0.4 + 0.4 sec.)” after the initial 2 beeps to confirm
the self-check start signal was received, the specified address is incorrect.
• On wireless remote controller
The continuous buzzer sounds from receiving section of indoor unit.
Blink of operation lamp
• On wired remote controller
Check code display in the LCD.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-136
Contraller Holder for Wireless remote controller
MAC-1200RC
Descriptions
Photo
• Please use it for the prevention of leaving behind of wireless
remoto controller.
• Please use this item when you put remote controller on the
wall etc.
Applicable Models
MSZ-HC25VA
MSZ-HC35VA(B)
Specifications
Material
Color
Dimensions
Polystyrene
White
Unit : mm
OPTIONAL
1) Installation area
• Area in which the remote controller is not exposed to direct sunshine.
• Area in which there is no nearby heating source.
• Area in which the remote controller is not exposed to cold (or hot) winds.
• Area in which the remote controller can be operated easily.
• Area in which the remote controller is beyond the reach of children.
2) Installation method
Attach the remote controller holder to the desired location using two tapping screws.
Place the lower end of the controller into the holder.
# Remote controller
$ Wall
% Display panel
& Receiver
• The signal can travel up to approximately 7 meters (in a straight line) within 45
degrees to both right and left of the center line of the receiver.
E-137
PARTS
How to Use / How to Install
Remote Sensor
PAC-SE41TS-E
Descriptions
Figure
Enables to pick up the room tempreture at the remote position.
Applicable Models
SLZ-KA VA(L)
PKA-RP HAL/KAL
SEZ-KD VA(L)
PCA-RP KA/HA
PLA-RP BA(2)(3)
PEAD-RP JA(L)
PEA-RP GA
PSA-RP GA
Specifications
External dimensions (mm) 120 (H) x 70 (W) x 15 (D)
White gray (Munsell 4.48Y 7.92/0.66)
Exterior
Material: ABS resin
Operating conditions
Temperature: -20 to 65͠ Humidity: 30 to 90%RH (no condensation)
Installation method
Mounting on single-type switch box (JIS C8336) or directly mounting on wall
Accessory
2-wire cable (12m), Connector with post, Fixing screw (x2)
When combining with environmental measurement controller
Temperature measuring range -20 to 65͠
Measurement resolution
0.1͠ (10 to 35͠ ), 0.5͠ (other temperature ranges)
Dimensions
Unit : mm
%QXGT
%QTFGPVTCPEG
$CUG
4
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-138
ǾJQNG
%QTFGPVTCPEG
+PUVCNNCVKQPRKVEJ
4
Remote Sensor PAC-SE41TS-E
E-139
PARTS
OPTIONAL
How to Use / How to Install
Remote On/Off Adapter
PAC-SE55RA-E
Descriptions
Figure
• Operation other than ON/OFF (adjustment of temperature,
fan speed, and air direction, for exanple) can be performed
even when remote controller operation is prohibited.
Applicable Models
SLZ-KA VA(L)
PKA-RP HAL/KAL
SEZ-KD VA(L)
PCA-RP KA/HA
PLA-RP BA(2)(3)
PEAD-RP JA(L)
PEA-RP200/250GA
PSA-RP GA
Specifications
ON/OFF by external signal
External signal ON (remote control disabled) / OFF (remote control enabled) switchable
Input signal
No-voltage contact (ON/OFF level signal)
Connector
3P (connected to CN32 on outdoor unit control board)
Cable type
3-wire cable, for extension: Sheathed vinyl cord or cable (0.5 to 1.25mm2)
Cable length 2m (max. 10m when extended locally)
Function
Dimensions
Unit : mm
*GCVEQPVTCEVKQPKPUWNCVKQPVWDG
1TCPIG
4GF
$TQYP
4GUKUVQT
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-140
Remote On/Off Adapter PAC-SE55RA-E
E-141
PARTS
OPTIONAL
How to Use / How to Install
Remote Operation Adapter
PAC-SF40RM-E
Descriptions
Figure
Extraction of non-voltage contact output.
*Use of optional [Remote Operation Adapter] and "remote
display panel" Part to be provided at your site) provides
non-voltage contact outputs of signals (operation,error) and
operation/stop input function.
Applicable Models
SLZ-KA VA
PEA-RP200/250GA
SEZ-KD VA
PCA-RP KA/HA
PLA-RP BA(2)(3)
PSA-RP GA
PEAD-RP JA(L)
Specifications
Power
External dimensions (mm)
Exterior
Weight
Operating conditions
Connecting cable
(indoor unit)
Output signal
Number of Contacts
Contact capacity
Minimum load
Input signal
Number of Contacts
Input/output
Type
signal cable
Diameter
Supplied from indoor unit
160 x 70 x 30
Material: ABS resin, Color: Gray (Munsell 3.07Y 6.16/0.33)
200g
Indoor only Temperature: 0 to 40͠ , Humidity: 35 to 85%RH (no condensation)
5-wire (3 + 2) cable with connector (9-pin, 4-pin)
No-voltage "a" contact (relay contact method)
2 (Operation / Alarm)
200V AC (30V DC)/1A or less
10mA
Pulse signal (instantaneous non-voltage "a" contact), pulse width: 200ms or more
1 (start/stop)
CV, CVS, or equivalent sheathed vinyl cord/cable
Twisted: 0.5 to 1.25mm2, Single: Φ0.65 to Φ1.2mm
Output signal cable: Max. 100m
Distance
Input signal cable: Max. 10m (Extension relay must be used when exceeding 10m)
* This kit cannot be used with a wireless remote controller.
Water leakage alarm will not be displayed if the unit is built into the ceiling (PDH)
(locally prepared)
Dimensions
Unit : mm
OPTIONAL
PARTS
*QNGHQTYCNN
KPUVCNNCVKQP
VYGRNCEGU
E-142
.QECNN[RTGRCTGFECDNG
VCMKPIEWVJQNG
Remote Operation Adapter PAC-SF40RM-E
E-143
PARTS
OPTIONAL
How to Use / How to Install
Remote Operation Adapter PAC-SF40RM-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-144
E-145
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Remote Operation Adapter PAC-SF40RM-E
Connector Cable For Remote Display
PAC-SA88HA-E
Descriptions
Figure
• This adapter enables control of several units with a multiple
remote control display.
Applicable Models
SLZ-KA VA(L)
PKA-RP HAL/KAL
SEZ-KD VA(L)
PCA-RP KA/HA
PLA-RP BA(2)(3)
PEAD-RP JA(L)
PEA-RPRP200/250GA
PSA-RP GA
Specifications
Dimensions
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-146
Unit : mm
Function
Connecting cable to output status signal of the air
conditioner, and ON/OFF by external (pulse) signal.
Input signal
Pulse signal (no voltage instantaneous ON contact)
Pulse duration 200m/s or more.
Connector
5P (connector to CN51 or CN52 on indoor unit control
board)
Cable type
5-wire vinyl cable, for extension:sheathed vinyl cord or
cable (0.5 to 1.25mm²)
Cable lengh
Output capacity)
2m (max.10m when extended locally)
DC12V 75mA (Max 0.9W)
Connector Cable For Remote Display PAC-SA88HA-E
How to Use / How to Install
MULTIPLE REMOTE CONTROL DISPLAY
You can control several units with a multiple remote control display, by wiring an optional multiple remote controller adapter (PAC-SA88HA-E) with
relays and lamps on the market.
How to wire
(1) Connect the multiple remote controller adapter to the connector CN51
on the indoor controller board.
(2) Wire three of the five wires from the multiple remote controller adapter
as shown in the figure below.
<Wiring >
X2
GREEN
5
CN51
YELLOW
X1
ORANGE
RED
Electrical insulation is needed.
BROWN
1
connector(5P)
GL
X2
Optional multiple remote
controller adapter
X1
RL
Power
supply
Wiring at the actual place
The maximum distance between
indoor board and relay is 10m.
[Notes on Signs]
X1:Relay (for operation lamp)
X2:Relay (for check lamp)
RL:Operation Lamp
GL:Check Lamp
[Field supplied parts]
Relays:12V DC with rated coil power
consumption below 0.9W.
Lamps:Matching to power supply voltage.
<System>
Power
supply
3wires
3wires
3wires
2wires
No.1 unit
Remote
controller
cable
Muitiple remote control
ON-OFF display
(Field supply)
Remote
controller
No.2 unit
No.3 unit
Relay box
(Field supply)
Remote
controller
Remote
controller
(Operation check)
<Wiring diagram>
X1-1
GL-1
X2-1
RL-2
X1-2
GL-2
X2-2
RL-3
X1-3
GL-3
X2-3
X1-1
X2-1
X1-2
X2-2
X1-3
X2-3
Multiple Remote Control Display
1
Multiple remote
controller adapter
5
No.1 unit
1
No.2 unit
5
1
5
No.3 unit
connect to
the connector CN51
Relay box
E-147
PARTS
RL-1
OPTIONAL
Power
supply
Distribution Pipe
MSDD-50TR-E
* model change from MSDD-50SR-E
Descriptions
Photo
Branch pipe for Multi-System Twin type Twin use. (50:50)
Applicable Models
PU-P71/100/125/140
PUHZ-HRP71/100/125
PUH-P71/100/125/140
PUHZ-RP71/100/125/140
for Twin 50:50 use
Specifications
Distribution ratio
Main body
Number of
distribution pipes 1 each for liquid pipe and gas pipe
Pipe material
Accessory
Pipe cover
Joint
Dimensions
Outdoor unit capacity is divided into
two (50:50)
Phosphate deoxidized copper
C1220T-OL (JIS H3300)
Styrofoam molding (1 each for liquid
pipe and gas pipe)
7 joints (4 types)
Unit : mm
㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛㩷㪧㪠㪧㪜
㱢㪐㪅㪌㪉㩿㪠㪛㪀
㪠㪥㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㱢㪋㪍
㪈㪇㪇
㪈㪋㪉
㪈㪎㪉
㪦㪬㪫㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㪧㪠㪧㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩
䋨㪈㪎㪉㬍㪊㪊㪌㬍㪎㪉䋩
㪊㪊㪌
㪉㪄㱢㪐㪅㪌㪉䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪋㪊㪌
㪞㪘㪪㩷㪧㪠㪧㪜
㪉㪋㪇
㪈㪉㪇
㪈㪎㪇
㪦㪬㪫㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㱢㪌㪏
㪧㪠㪧㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩
䋨㪈㪎㪇㬍㪉㪋㪇㬍㪎㪋䋩
㪉㪄㱢㪈㪌㪅㪏㪏䋨㪠㪛䋩
㱢㪈㪌㪅㪏㪏䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪧㪠㪧㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩
㪉㪈㪇
㪏㪇
ΦA(ID) ΦB(OD) Amount
2
6.35
9.52
9.52
15.88
2
12.7
E-148
15.88
2
㱢䌄
㱢䌃
㱢䌂
㱢䌁
OPTIONAL
PARTS
㪡㪦㪠㪥㪫㩿㪘㪺㪺㪼㫊㫊㫆㫉㫐㪀
㪏㪇
ΦC(ID) ΦD(OD) Amount
1
19.05
15.88
㪠㪥㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
Distribution Pipe MSDD-50TR-E
How to Use / How to Install
Package Air-conditioner Optional Parts Instruction Sheet for Simultaneous Twin Distributing Pipe
Make sure that you have all the following parts before installation.
Instruction sheet
Gas pipe
This sheet 1 sheet
Liquid pipe
Pipe cover (for gas pipe)
1pc
1pc
See the following for the specifications of gas pipe
Pipe cover (for liquid pipe)
1pc
,and liquid pipe
Joint pipe
1pc
Flare nut
9.52
15.88
15.88
15.88
6.35····
12.7······
19.05····
9.52······
2pcs
2pcs
1pc
2pcs
1/4F ....2pcs
1/2F ....2pcs
For R410A indoor unit.
,
MSDD-50TR
Gas pipe
Liguid pipe
㧔Model name indication㧕
Procure the following at local site in addition to the above
࡮Tape for heat insulator sealing
࡮Extended pipe for refrigerant pipe
ID Ǟ9.52
㧔to outdoor unit㧕
Tag
ID Ǟ15.88
ID Ǟ15.88
㧔to outdoor unit㧕
㧔to indoor unit㧕
ID Ǟ9.52
㧔to indoor unit㧕
Pipe size and limit to refrigerant pipe
For R410A
Note 1
Gas pipe side
Liquid pipe side
Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧩 Indoor-Indoor Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side
RP35, 50
Ǟ9.52(3/8)
Ǟ12.7(1/2)
71(3Hp)
100㨪140
(4㨪6Hp)
Height Difference (m)
Actual pipe length (m)
Ǟ15.88
(5/8)
~
Ǟ9.52
3/8
RP60 125
Ǟ15.88(5/8)
RP35, 50
Ǟ6.35(1/4)
㧙
RP60㨪125
Ǟ9.52(3/8)
50m or less
75m or less
֥B㧙C֥㧩
8m or less
Note 1: Limit the number of bends for refrigerant pipes to 8 in each of the ‫ޛ‬A㧗B‫ ޜ‬and ‫ޛ‬A㧗C‫ ޜ‬ranges.
See the installation manual provided with the main unit for details on chargeless pipe length and refrigerant additional charge amount.
H=
30m or less
h=
1m or less
Number
of bends
15 or less
(Fig. 1)‫ޓ‬Indoor unit
B
Indoor unit
h
Outdoor
unit capacity
(Table 1-2)
Pipe size (mm)
H
C
Distributing pipe
Outdoor unit
A
Pipe connections
Combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units and
joints to be used:
(Fig. 2)
Gas pipe
Indoor side
Outdoor side
Liquid pipe
Indoor side
Joints
Outdoor side
Joints
1. Perform work, taking care with the followings:
Be sure to check the combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units and joints to be used (Table 2).
Be sure to observe the limits to refrigerant pipe length and number of bends (Table 1).
Insert the refrigerant pipe (procured at local site) and joint into the expanded pipe portions of distributing pipe
(this product) until they stop, and then connect them using anti-oxidization soldering.
There is no restriction on the orientation of distributing pipe (this product)during installation.
Take care that no foreign object, such as dust, enters during pipe connecting work.
Remove the tag of liquid pipe after checking it.
2. Pipe connections
The provided joints will be necessary depending on the capability of model used: See (Table 2), and connect
‫ޓ‬the joints as shown in (Fig. 2).
Do not bend or widen the distributing pipe (liquid pipe).
(Table 2-2)
For R410A
Outdoor unit Indoor unit
Joint to be used
Outer Ǟ15.88㧙inner Ǟ12.7 [indoor gas pipe side], Outer Ǟ9.52㧙inner Ǟ6.35 [indoor liquid pipe side]
71(3Hp)
35+35 (1.6+1.6)
Outer Ǟ15.88㧙inner Ǟ9.52 [indoor gas pipe side], Outer Ǟ9.52㧙inner Ǟ6.35 [indoor liquid pipe side]
100(4Hp)
50+50 (2+2) Outer Ǟ15.88㧙inner Ǟ12.7 [indoor gas pipe side], Outer Ǟ9.52㧙inner Ǟ6.35 [indoor liquid pipe side]
125(5Hp)
60+60 (2.5+2.5)
No joint is necessary.
140(6Hp)
71+71 (3+3)
Installation positions in brackets ( ).
Tape (procured at local site)
(Note 1)
Insulation material
Wrap margin
(procured at local site) (Note 1)
Pipe cover
Notes:
1. Cover the entire refrigerant pipe (procured at local site)
with heat insulation material. When using generally available
heat insulation material, heat-resistant insulation material
(at least 12 mm thick).
2. Pipe covers and will shrink slightly at high temperatures:
Provide wrap margins with insulation material.
OPTIONAL
Wrap margin (Note 2)
Pipe from local site
Fit gas pipe into pipe covers , and then seal the mated portion of pipe covers ԛ using heat insulation seal tape (procured at local site).
Process liquid pipe in the same way.
Please install contents other than this description on the main part of a product with an attached installation description, and use them as it.
E-149
PARTS
Heat insulation work
Distribution Pipe
MSDD-50WR-E
Descriptions
Photo
Branch pipe for Multi-System Twin type Twin use. (50:50)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-P200/250
PUHZ-RP200/250
for Twin 50:50 use
Specifications
Distribution ratio
Number of
distribution pipes 1 each for liquid pipe and gas pipe
Main body
Accessory
Dimensions
Pipe material
Phosphate deoxidized copper
C1220T-OL (JIS H3300)
Pipe cover
Styrofoam molding (for liquid pipe
and gas pipe)
Joint
5 joints (4 types)
Unit : mm
LIQUID PIPE
W9.52䋨ID䋩
W46
W12.7(ID)
100
142
172
OUTDOOR
UNIT
SIDE
INDOOR
UNIT
SIDE
PIPE COVER
W9.52䋨ID䋩
435
W58
120
170
GAS PIPE
OUTDOOR
UNIT
SIDE
W15.88䋨ID䋩
W25.4䋨ID䋩
PIPE COVER
210
275
WD
WC
WA
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-150
WB
JOINT(Accessory)
80
80
ΦA(ID) ΦB(OD) Amount
1
28.6
25.4
15.88
12.7
1
19.05 15.88
2
ΦC(ID) ΦD(OD) Amount
1
9.52
12.7
Outdoor unit capacity is divided into
two (50:50)
INDOOR
UNIT
SIDE
Distribution Pipe MSDD-50WR-E
How to Use / How to Install
Package Air-conditioner Optional Parts Instruction Sheet for Simultaneous Twin Distributing Pipe
Make sure that you have all the following parts in packing box before installation.
Instruction sheet
Gas pipe
This sheet 1 sheet
Liquid pipe
1pc
Pipe cover (for gas pipe)
1pc
Pipe cover (for liquid pipe)
1pc
See the following for the specifications of gas pipe
,and liquid pipe
Joint pipe
Flare nut
Ǟ12.7ψǞ 9.52 ········· 1pc
5/8F ....2pcs
Ǟ12.7ψǞ 15.88 ······· 1pc
Ǟ15.88ψǞ19.05 ······ 2pcs
For
R410A
indoor unit.
Ǟ25.4ψǞ28.6 ·········· 1pc
1pc
,
MSDD-50WR
Gas pipe
ID Ǟ25.4
㧔to outdoor unit㧕
Liguid pipe
㧔Model name indication㧕
Procure the following at local site in addition to the above
࡮Tape for heat insulator seal
࡮Extended pipe for refrigerant pipe
Tag
ID Ǟ12.7
ID Ǟ9.52
㧔to indoor unit㧕 㧔to outdoor unit㧕
ID 15.88
㧔to indoor unit㧕
Pipe size and limit to refrigerant pipe
For R407C fixed speed models
Outdoor
unit capacity
(Table 1-1)
Pipe size (mm)
Actual pipe length (m)
Height Difference (m)
Pipe size (mm)
Actual pipe length (m)
Height Difference (m)
Note 1
Number
Gas pipe side
Liquid pipe side
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧩 Indoor-Indoor Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor of bends
25.4
A+B=
200(8Hp)
(1)
Ǟ9.52
H=
h=
Ǟ19.05
Ǟ12.7
15 or less
70m or less ֥B㧙C֥㧩
A+C=
3/8
(3/4)
1/2
28.6
40m or less
1m or less
8m or less
250(10Hp)
50m or less
(1-1/8)
For R410A Power Inverter models
(Table 1-2)
Note 1
Number
Gas pipe side
Liquid pipe side
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧩 Indoor-Indoor Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor of bends
Ǟ25.4
(1)
250(10Hp)
Ǟ25.4
Ǟ28.6
(1-1/8)
RP1.6, 2,
35, 50
Ǟ12.7(1/2)
RP2.5㨪5,
60㨪125
Ǟ15.88(5/8)
Ǟ9.52
3/8
RP1.6, 2,
35, 50
A+B=
80m or less ֥B㧙C֥㧩
Ǟ6.35(1/4)
A+C=
8m or less
RP2.5㨪5, 80m or less
60㨪125
Ǟ9.52(3/8)
Ǟ12.7
1/2
Note 1: Limit the number of bends for refrigerant pipes
to 8 in each of the ‫ޛ‬A㧗B‫ ޜ‬and ‫ޛ‬A㧗C‫ ޜ‬ranges.
See the installation manual provided with the main
unit for details on chargeless pipe length and refrigerant additional charge amount.
Pipe connections
Combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units and
joints to be used:
(Fig. 2)
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Indoor side
Outdoor side Indoor side
Outdoor side
H=
40m or less
h=
1m or less
15 or less
(Fig. 1)‫ޓ‬Indoor unit
B
Indoor unit
h
200(8Hp)
C
H
Outdoor
unit capacity
Distributing pipe
Outdoor unit
A
Joints
Joints
1. Perform work, taking care with the followings:
Be sure to check the combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units and joints to be used (Table 2).
Be sure to observe the limits to refrigerant pipe length and number of bends (Table 1).
Insert the refrigerant pipe (procured at local site) and joint into the expanded pipe portions of distributing pipe
(this product) until they stop, and then connect them using anti-oxidization soldering.
There is no restriction on the orientation of distributing pipe (this product)during installation.
Take care that no foreign object, such as dust, enters during pipe connecting work.
Remove the tag of liquid pipe after checking it.
2. Pipe connections
The provided joints will be necessary depending on the capability of model used: See (Table 2), and connect
‫ޓ‬the joints as shown in (Fig. 2).
Do not bend or widen the distributing pipe (liquid pipe).
(Table 2-1)
(Table 2-2)
For R410A Power Inverter
For R407C fixed speed
Outdoor unit Indoor unit
Outdoor unit Indoor unit
Joint to be used
Joint to be used
200(8Hp)
100+100 (4+4) Outer Ǟ12.7㧙inner Ǟ9.52 [outdoor liquid pipe side]
200(8Hp)
100+100 (4+4) Outer Ǟ15.88㧙inner Ǟ19.05 [indoor gas pipe side]
HA:Outer Ǟ25.4㧙inner Ǟ28.6 [outdoor gas pipe side]
250(10Hp) 125+125 (5+5) Outer Ǟ25.4㧙inner Ǟ28.6 [outdoor gas pipe side]
250(10Hp) 125+125 (5+5)
HA2,KA:No joint necessary
‫ޓ‬Installation positions in brackets ‫ ޓ‬.
Tape (procured at local site)
(Note 1)
Insulation material
Wrap margin
(procured at local site) (Note 1)
Pipe cover
Notes:
1. Cover the entire refrigerant pipe (procured at local site)
with heat insulation material. When using generally
available heat insulation material, heat-resistant
2 insulation material (at least 12 mm thick).
Pipe covers and will shrink slightly at high
temperatures: Provide wrap margins with insulation
material.
OPTIONAL
Wrap margin (Note 2)
Pipe from local site
Fit gas pipe into pipe covers , and then seal the mated portion of pipe covers ԛ using heat insulation seal tape (procured at local site).
Process liquid pipe in the same way.
Please install contents other than this description on the main part of a product with an attached installation description, and use them as it.
E-151
PARTS
Heat insulation work
Distribution Pipe
MSDT-111R-E
Descriptions
Photo
3-branch pipe for Multi-System Triple use.(33:33:33)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-P140/200/250
PUHZ-RP140/200/250
PU(H)-P140
for 33:33:33 Triple use
Specifications
Distribution ratio
Outdoor unit capacity is divided into
three (33:33:33)
Number of
Main body distribution pipes 1 each for liquid pipe and gas pipe
Phosphate deoxidized copper
Pipe material
C1220T-OL (JIS H3300)
Accessory Pipe cover
10 joints (6 types)
Joint
Dimensions
Polyethylene foam molding
(for liquid pipe)
EPT sponge rubber type (for gas pipe)
Unit : mm
㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛㩷㪧㪠㪧㪜
㱢㪐㪅㪌㪉䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪈㪇㪇
㪧㪠㪧㪜㩷
㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩
䋨㪈㪋㪊㬍㪊㪋㪈㬍㪎㪏䋩
㪈㪋㪊
㪊㪄㱢㪐㪅㪌㪉䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪦㪬㪫㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㪠㪥㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㪈㪇㪇
㪋㪍㪇
㪊㪋㪈
㪞㪘㪪㩷㪧㪠㪧㪜
㪈㪌
㪊㪄㱢㪈㪌㪅㪏㪏䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪠㪥㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㪉㪋㪇
㪦㪬㪫㪛㪦㪦㪩
㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪠㪛㪜
㱢㪉㪌㪅㪋䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪈㪌
㪈㪉㪇
㪉㪇
㪈㪌
㪈㪉㪇
㪏㪇
ΦA(ID) ΦB(OD) Amount
1
12.7
9.52
28.6
25.4
1
E-152
㪏㪇
㱢㪛
㱢㪚
㱢㪙
OPTIONAL
PARTS
㪡㪦㪠㪥㪫㩿㪘㪺㪺㪼㫊㫊㪸㫉㫐㪀
㱢㪘
㪉㪋㪇
ΦC(ID) ΦD(OD) Amount
3
12.7
15.88
19.05
25.4
1
6.35
9.52
3
15.88
25.4
1
Distribution Pipe MSDT-111R-E
How to Use / How to Install
Package Air-conditioner Optional Parts Instruction Sheet for Simultaneous Triple Distributing Pipe exclusively used with Free Compo Multi-Units
MSDT-111R-E ާIndoor unit same-capacity triple 33:33:33ި············Outdoor unit PU(H)-P6, 140GA type (R407C fixed speed)
‫ޓޓޓ‬Outdoor unit PUHZ-RP6, 140HA type (R410A power inverter)
‫ޓޓ‬Outdoor unit PUH-P8㨪10, 200㨪250MYA type (R407C fixed speed)
Outdoor unit PUHZ-RP8㨪10, 200㨪250HA type (R410A power inverter)
Make sure that you have all the following parts in packing box before beginning installation:
Ԙ Instruction sheet ԙ Gas pipe
ԛ Pipe cover (for gas pipe) Ԝԝ Pipe covers (for gas pipe)
Ԛ Liquid pipe
Ԟ Pipe cover (for liquid pipe) ԟԠ Pipe covers
ԜOuterǞ50˜250㧙1pc
ԡ Bands
Ԣ Joint
ԣ Flare nut
ԟOuterǞ42˜180㧙1pc
With V cut
This sheet 1 sheet
1pc
/1/4F······3pcs
01/2F······3pcs
1pc
1pc
2pcs ԠOuterǞ38˜200㧙3pcs
ԝOuterǞ43˜350㧙2pc
8pcs
See Table 1.
For R410A
indoor unit.
٨See the following for the specifications of gas pipe ԙ and liquid pipe Ԛ :
ԙGas pipe
ԚLiquid pipe
Joint specifications and provided numbers ‫ޛ ޓ‬Table 1‫ޜ‬
Model name indication
Sizes of joint pipe ends (mm)
̪Procure the following at local site in addition to the above:
࡮Tape for heat insulator seal
࡮Extended pipe for refrigerant pipe
Tag
‫ޓ‬InnerǞ25.4
(to outdoor unit)
‫ޓ‬InnerǞ15.88
(to indoor unit)
InnerǞ9.52
(to indoor unit)
‫ޓ‬InnerǞ9.52
(to outdoor unit)
Numbers provided
OuterǞ9.52㧙InnerǞ6.35
OuterǞ9.52㧙InnerǞ12.7
OuterǞ15.88㧙InnerǞ12.7
OuterǞ25.4㧙InnerǞ19.05
OuterǞ25.4㧙InnerǞ15.88
OuterǞ25.4㧙InnerǞ28.6
3
1
3
1
1
1
Pipe size and limit to refrigerant pipe
‫ع‬For R407C fixed speed models
‫ޛ‬Table 2-1‫ޜ‬
Pipe size (mm)
Liquid pipe side
Height Difference (m)
Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧗D㧩 Indoor-Indoor
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side
Ǟ9.52
Ǟ19.05
㧙
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
‫ޛ‬3/4‫ޜ‬
Ǟ15.88
Ǟ9.52
Ǟ25.4
A+B=
200 (8Hp)
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
‫ޛ‬1‫ޜ‬
‫ޛ‬5/8‫ޜ‬
A+C=
Ǟ12.7
A+D=
‫ޛ‬1/2‫ޜ‬
Ǟ28.6
50m or less
250 (10Hp) ‫ޛ‬1-1/8‫ޜ‬
140 (6Hp)
Note 1
Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor
֥B㧙C֥㧩
֥B㧙D֥㧩
֥C㧙D֥㧩
70m or less
8m or less
H=
40m or less
h=
1m or less
200 (8Hp)
Ǟ25.4
‫ޛ‬1‫ޜ‬
250 (10Hp)
Ǟ28.6
‫ޛ‬1-1/8‫ޜ‬
Indoor unit
15 or less
Indoor unit
B
C
Indoor unit
‫ޛ‬Table 2-2‫ޜ‬
Actual pipe length (m)
Pipe size (mm)
Outdoor unit
Liquid pipe side
Gas pipe side
Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧗D㧩 Indoor-Indoor
capacity
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side
140 (6Hp)
‫ޛ‬Fig. 1‫ޓޜ‬
50m or less
‫ع‬For R410A Power Inverter models
Ǟ15.88
‫ޛ‬5/8‫ޜ‬
Number
of bends
h
Gas pipe side
Actual pipe length (m)
Ǟ12.7
‫ޛ‬1/2‫ޜ‬
Ǟ9.52
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ15.88
‫ޛ‬5/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ12.7
‫ޛ‬1/2‫ޜ‬
Ǟ6.35
‫ޛ‬1/4‫ޜ‬
㧙
75m or less
Ǟ9.52
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
A+B=
A+C=
A+D=
80m or less
80m or less
Height Difference (m)
D
Note 1
Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor
Number
of bends
H
Outdoor unit
capacity
Distributing pipe
Outdoor unit
H=
30m or less
֥B㧙C֥㧩
8m or less
H=
40m or less
h=
1m or less
15 or less
A
Note 1: Limit the number of bends for refrigerant pipes to 8 in each of the ‫ޛ‬A㧗B‫ޜ‬, ‫ޛ‬A㧗C‫ ޜ‬and ‫ޛ‬A㧗D‫ ޜ‬ranges.
̪See the installation manual provided with the main unit for details on charge-less pipe length and refrigerant additional charge amount.
Pipe connections
1. Perform work, taking care with the following:
࡮ Be sure to check the combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units, joints to be used ‫ޛ‬Table 3‫ޜ‬, pipe size ‫ޛ‬Table 1‫ ޜ‬and joint used Ԣ.
࡮ Be sure to observe the limits to refrigerant pipe length and number of bends ‫ޛ‬Table 2‫ޜ‬.
࡮ Insert the refrigerant pipe (procured at local site) and joint Ԣ into the expanded pipe portions of distributing pipe (this product) until they stop, and then connect them using anti-oxidization soldering.
࡮ There is no restriction on the orientation of distributing pipe (this product)during installation.
࡮ Take care that no foreign object, such as dust, enters during pipe connecting work.
࡮ Remove the tag of liquid pipe Ԛ after checking it.
2. Pipe connections
࡮ The provided joints Ԣ will be necessary depending on the capability of model used: See ‫ޛ‬Table 3‫ޜ‬, and connect the refrigerant piping.
࡮ Do not bend or widen the distributing pipe (liquid pipe).
Combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units and joints to be used:
‫ޛ‬Table 3-1‫ޜ‬
‫عޓ‬For R407C fixed speed
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
140 (6Hp) 50㧗50㧗50 (2㧗2㧗2)
200 (8Hp)
Joint to be used
60㧗60㧗60 (2.5㧗2.5㧗2.5)
250 (10Hp) 71㧗71㧗71 (3㧗3㧗3)
‫ޛ‬Table 3-2‫ޜ‬
‫عޓ‬For R410A Power Inverter
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
140 (6Hp) 50㧗50㧗50 (2㧗2㧗2)
200 (8Hp)
OuterǞ25.4㧙innerǞ19.05ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1㧘 outerǾ15.88㧙innerǾ12.7˜3ާindoor gas pipe sideި‫ޓ‬
OuterǞ9.52㧙innerǞ12.7ާindoor gas pipe sideި˜3
OuterǞ25.4㧙innerǞ28.6ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1
Joint to be used
OuterǞ25.4㧙innerǞ15.88ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1㧘 outerǞ15.88㧙innerǞ12.7ާindoor gas pipe sideި˜3㧘 outerǾ9.52㧙innerǞ6.35ާindoor gas pipe sideި˜3㧘
60㧗60㧗60 (2.5㧗2.5㧗2.5)
No Joint is necessary
OuterǞ9.52㧙innerǞ12.7ާoutdoor liquid pipe sideި˜1㧘 outerǞ25.4㧙innerǞ28.6ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1
250 (10Hp) 71㧗71㧗71 (3㧗3㧗3)
‫̪ޓ‬Installation positions in brackets ާ‫ިޓ‬.
Pipe cover Ԝ
̪
Liquid pipe
̪
Bandԡ
Bandsԡ
Pipe cover Ԡ
Viewed from A
Tape
(procured at local site)
Gas pipe ԙ
A
V cut
Pipe cover ԛ
Pipe cover ԝ
̪
Pipe cover ԝ
Pipe cover ԛ
(with V cut)
Gas pipe ԙ
㧔1㧕Wind pipe covers ԛ, Ԝ and ԝ
round gas pipe ԙ so that there is no
gap. Securely fit the V-cut portions of
pipe cover ԛ into the roots of pipe on
both sides to install the pipe cover.
Bandsԡ
Pipe cover Ԟ
Tape
(procured at local site)
㧔2㧕Completely seal the openings of pipe
covers ԛ, Ԝ and ԝ using heat insulation
seal tape (procured at local site). Wind
seal tape round the pipe crossing portion
in a crossed way so that there is no gap.
㧔3㧕Use band ԡ to tighten the ends of each
pipe cover.
Tape
(procured at local site)
Liquid pipe Ԛ
̪
㧔1㧕Fit liquid pipe Ԛ into 2 pipe
covers Ԟ, and then seal the mated
portion of pipe covers Ԟ using
heat insulation seal tape (procured
at local site).
Butt pipe covers
and seal them
Pipe cover ԟ
Bandԡ
㧔2㧕Fit pipe covers ԟ and Ԡ onto
liquid pipe Ԛ, and then securely seal
the mated portion of pipe covers Ԟ
using heat insulation seal tape
(procured at local site).
㧔3㧕Use band ԡ to tighten the ends of
each pipe cover.
Notes:
1. Cut off any surplus pipe cover
to make appropriate length.
2. Use pipe covers to completely
cover the connection portions
of refrigerant pipe (procured at
local site), gas pipe ԙ and
liquid pipe Ԛ.
3. Cover the entire refrigerant
pipe (procured at local site)
with heat insulation material.
When using generally available
heat insulation material, make
sure it is heat-resistant
insulation material (at least 12
mm thick).
OPTIONAL
Gas pipe
Please install contents other than this description on the main part of a product with an attached installation description, and use them as it.
E-153
PARTS
Heat insulation work
Distribution Pipe
MSDF-1111R-E
Descriptions
Photo
4-branch pipe for Multi-System Quadruple use.(25:25:25:25)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-P200/250
PUHZ-RP200/250
for 25:25:25:25 Quadruple use
Specifications
Distribution ratio
Outdoor unit capacity is divided into
four (25:25:25:25)
Number of
Main body distribution pipes 1 each for liquid pipe and gas pipe
Phosphate deoxidized copper
Pipe material
C1220T-OL (JIS H3300)
Pipe cover
Polyethylene foam molding (for liquid
pipe)
EPT sponge rubber type (for gas pipe)
Joint
11 joints (5 types)
Band
7 bands
Accessory
Dimensions
Unit : mm
㪣㪠㪨㪬㪠㪛㩷㪧㪠㪧㪜
㪋㪍㪇
㪊㪋㪈
㪉㪋
㱢㪈㪉㪅㪎䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪈㪏㪊
㪋㪎
㪋㪄㱢㪐㪅㪌㪉䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪈㪇㪇
㪧㪠㪧㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩
䋨㪈㪏㪊㬍㪊㪋㪈㬍㪎㪏䋩
㪍㪇
㪞㪘㪪㩷㪧㪠㪧㪜
㪍㪇
㪍㪇
㱢㪈㪌㪅㪏㪏䋨㪠㪛䋩
㱢㪉㪌㪅㪋䋨㪠㪛䋩
㪊㪎㪇
㪊㪐㪉
㪈㪉㪇
ΦA(ID) ΦB(OD) Amount
1
28.6
25.4
15.88
12.7
1
E-154
㱢㪛
㱢㪚
㱢㪙
㱢㪘
OPTIONAL
PARTS
㪡㪦㪠㪥㪫㩿㪘㪺㪺㪼㫊㫊㫆㫉㫐㪀
㪈㪉㪇
ΦC(ID) ΦD(OD) Amount
4
12.7
15.88
6.35
9.52
4
9.52
12.7
1
㪈㪍㪇
㪎㪇
㪈㪋㪇
㪧㪠㪧㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩
䋨㪈㪍㪇㬍㪊㪐㪉㬍㪋㪏䋩
Distribution Pipe MSDF-1111R-E
How to Use / How to Install
Package Air-conditioner Optional Parts Instruction Sheet for Simultaneous Quadruple Distributing Pipe exclusively used with Free Compo Multi-Units
Model MSDF-1111R-E ާIndoor unit(quadruple)With same-capacity 25:25:25:25ި̖̖̖ Outdoor unit PUH-P8㨪10, 200㨪250MYA type (R407C fixed speed)
Outdoor unit PUHZ-RP8㨪10, 200㨪250HA type (R410A power inverter)
Make sure that you have all the following parts in packing box before beginning installation:
Ԙ Installation manual ԙ Gas pipe
Ԛ Liquid pipe
This sheet 1 sheet
1pc
ԛ Pipe cover ( gas pipe)
1pc
Ԝ Pipe covers (liquid pipe) ԝԞ Pipe cover
ԟ Band
ԝOD.Ǟ42˜180L㧙1pc
2pcs
1pc
Ԡ Joint
ԡ Flare nut
Ǟ9.52ψǞ6.35······ 4pcs
Ǟ12.7ψǞ9.52······ 1pcs
Ǟ12.7ψǞ15.88···· 1pcs
Ǟ15.88ψǞ12.7···· 4pcs
Ǟ25.4ψǞ28.6······· 1pcs
7pcs
ԞǞ38˜200L㧙4pcs
1/4F·····4pcs
1/2F·····4pcs
For R410A
indoor unit.
٨ the gas pipe ԙ and liquid pipe Ԛ are specified as shown below.
ԙGas pipe
̪ The following ltems must be obtained locally in addition to the packed parts.
࡮Heat insulating seallng tape.
࡮Extension pipe for refrigerant pipe.
ԚLiquid pipe
IDǞ9.52
(indoor unit side)
‫ޓ‬IDǞ25.4
(outdoor unit side)
Tag
‫ޓ‬IDǞ15.88
(indoor unit side)
‫ޓ‬IDǞ12.7
(outdoor unit side)
Pipe size and refrigerant pipe limits.
‫ع‬For R407C fixed speed models
‫ޛ‬Table 1-1‫ޜ‬
Ǟ25.4
‫ޛ‬1‫ޜ‬
200 (8Hp)
250 (10Hp)
Ǟ28.6
‫ޛ‬1-1/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ15.88
‫ޛ‬5/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ12.7
‫ޛ‬1/2‫ޜ‬
Ǟ9.52
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
A+B=
A+C=
A+D=
A+E=
50m or less
֥B㧙C֥㧩
֥B㧙D֥㧩
֥B㧙E֥㧩
70m or less ֥C㧙D֥㧩
֥C㧙E֥㧩
֥D㧙E֥㧩
8m or less
Height Difference (m)
Note 1
Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor
Number
of bends
Indoor unit
h=
1m or less
H=
40m or less
B
15 or less
‫ޛ‬Table 1-2‫ޜ‬
200 (8Hp)
Ǟ25.4
‫ޛ‬1‫ޜ‬
Ǟ12.7
‫ޛ‬1/2‫ޜ‬
Ǟ9.52
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ6.35
‫ޛ‬1/4‫ޜ‬
250 (10Hp)
Ǟ28.6
‫ޛ‬1-1/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ15.88
‫ޛ‬5/8‫ޜ‬
Ǟ12.7
‫ޛ‬1/2‫ޜ‬
Ǟ9.52
‫ޛ‬3/8‫ޜ‬
A+B=
A+C=
A+D=
A+E=
80m or less
֥B㧙C֥㧩
֥B㧙D֥㧩
֥B㧙E֥㧩
80m or less ֥C㧙D֥㧩
֥C㧙E֥㧩
֥D㧙E֥㧩
8m or less
Indoor unit
D
‫ع‬For R410A Power Inverter models
Actual pipe length (m)
Pipe size (mm)
Outdoor unit
Liquid pipe side
Gas pipe side
Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧗D㧩 Indoor-Indoor
capacity
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side
Indoor unit
C
h
Pipe size (mm)
Actual pipe length (m)
Gas pipe side
Liquid pipe side
Indoor-Outdoor A㧗B㧗C㧗D㧩 Indoor-Indoor
Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side Outdoor unit side Indoor unit side
Height Difference (m)
Note 1
Indoor-Outdoor Indoor-Indoor
H
Outdoor unit
capacity
Indoor unit
E
Outdoor unit
Distributor pipe
(Packed part)
Number
of bends
A
H=
40m or less
h=
1m or less
15 or less
Note 1: The number of bends in the refrigerant pipes is respectlvely 8 or less in the range of ‫ޛ‬A㧗B‫ޛޜ‬A㧗C‫ޛޜ‬A㧗D‫ޛޜ‬A㧗E‫ޜ‬.
Pipe connections
1. Perform work, taking care with the following:
࡮ Be sure to check the combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units, joints to be used ‫ޛ‬Table 2‫ޜ‬, pipe size and joint used Ԡ.
࡮ Be sure to observe the limits to refrigerant pipe length and number of bends ‫ޛ‬Table 1‫ޜ‬.
࡮ Insert the refrigerant pipe (procured at local site) and joint Ԡ into the expanded pipe portions of distributing pipe (this product) until they stop, and then connect them using anti-oxidization soldering.
࡮ There is no restriction on the orientation of distributing pipe (this product)during installation.
࡮ Take care that no foreign object, such as dust, enters during pipe connecting work.
࡮ Remove the tag of liquid pipe Ԛ after checking it.
2. Pipe connections
࡮ The provided joints Ԡ will be necessary depending on the capability of model used: See ‫ޛ‬Table 2‫ޜ‬, and connect the refrigerant piping.
࡮ Do not bend or widen the distributing pipe (liquid pipe).
Combination pattern of indoor and outdoor units and joints to be used:
‫عޓ‬For R407C fixed speed
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
No Joint is necessary
200 (8Hp) 50㧗50㧗50㧗50 (2㧗2㧗2㧗2)
250 (10Hp) 60㧗60㧗60㧗60 (2.5㧗2.5㧗2.5㧗2.5) OuterǞ25.4㧙innerǞ28.6ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1
‫ޛ‬Table 2-1‫ޜ‬
Joint to be used
‫ޛ‬Table 2-2‫ޜ‬
‫عޓ‬For R410A Power Inverter
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Joint to be used
200 (8Hp) 50㧗50㧗50㧗50 (2㧗2㧗2㧗2) OuterǞ15.88㧙innerǞ12.7ާindoor gas pipe sideި˜4㧘OuterǾ9.52㧙innerǞ6.35ާindoor liquid pipe sideި˜4㧘OuterǞ12.7㧙innerǞ9.52ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1㧘
250 (10Hp) 60㧗60㧗60㧗60 (2.5㧗2.5㧗2.5㧗2.5) OuterǞ25.4㧙innerǞ28.6ާoutdoor gas pipe sideި˜1
Heat insulation work
Liquid pipe
̪
Header ԙ
Band ԟ
On-slte plplng
㧔1㧕After assembling header ԙ into pipe
cover ԛ remove the release paper from
inside pipe cover ԛ and wrap header ԙ
with pipe cover ԛ.
Pipe cover ԛ
Band ԟ
Butt the
pipe covers
agalnst
each other.
and seal them.
Tape
(prepared by site)
Remove release paper
Tape
(prepared by site)
Pipe cover Ԝ
Pipe cover ԛ
Band ԟ
Tape
(locally purchased)
Band ԟ
㧔2㧕Clamp both ends of the lndoor branch
connection of pipe cover ԛ with band ԟ
as shown above. Cut off the excess
length of the band.
㧔3㧕Tlghtly seal the joints of the pipe cover
with tape (locally purchased).(lncomplete
sealing can result in dew condensation.)
̪
Pipe cover Ԟ
Pipe cover ԝ
Liquid pipe Ԛ
Band ԟ
㧔1㧕Install the liquid pipe Ԛ while
aligning it with the pipe cover Ԝ
(2 pcs).Seal the joint ares of the
pipe cover Ԝ with hest lnsulating
sealing tape ( obtalnlocally).
㧔1㧕As shown above, install the liquid
pipe Ԛ on the pipe cover ԟ and Ԟ,
and securely seal with heat lnsulating
seal- ing tape ( obtain locally).
㧔3㧕Fasten the end of each pipe cover
with band ԟ
Notes:
1. Cut the excesslve part of
each pipe cover
2. Securely cover the joint
areas (̪) of the refrlgerant
pipe (obtained locally) to
the gas pipes ԙ and llquid
pipe Ԛ with the pipe covers.
3. Cover the entire refrigerant
pipe (obtained locally) with
heat insulating materal.if
commercial heat insulating
material is used, it must be
12mm or thicker.
Please install contents other than this description on the main part of a product with an attached installation description, and use them as it.
E-155
PARTS
̪
OPTIONAL
Gas pipe
Distribution Pipe
MSDD-50AR-E
Descriptions
Photo
For double-branching of the refrigerant piping to connect 2
branch boxes. (Flare connection type)
Applicable Models
MXZ-8A140VA
PAC-AK30BC
PAC-AK50BC
Dimensions
Unit : mm
LIQUID PIPE
(143)
82
91
W9.52(3/8F)
(To outdoor unit)
W9.52(3/8F)
(To Branch box)
GAS PIPE
(186)
100
W15.88(5/8F)
(To outdoor unit)
93
OPTIONAL
PARTS
W15.88(5/8F)
(To Branch box)
E-156
Distribution Pipe MSDD-50AR-E
How to Use / How to Install
2--BRANCH PIPE(JOINT) (MSDD--50AR--E)
Applicable model
MXZ-8A140VA(R410A type)
PAC-AK50BC
PAC-AK30BC
※In case of 2 branch box connection for flare connection
The kit contains followings
② Liquid pipe
(small:φ9.52)
① Manual
This one-sheet manual
③ Gas pipe
④ Heat-insulation
(Iarge:φ15.88)
cover(small)
X1
X1
⑤ Heat-insulation
cover(Iarge)
X1
Note:Besides these, please procure
the following locally:
(1)Tape for sealing the heat
insulation covers.
(2)Extension pipes for the
refrigerant system.
X1
During installation, be careful about the followings
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note the limit Iength of the refrigerant pipe refer to the installation manual of outdoor unit and branch box.
Note the limits for installing the indoor units refer to the installation manual of outdoor unit and branch box.
In connecting pipes, take care not to let any dirt or other foreign matter enter any pipe.
Put a heat insulato into every refrigerant pipe.
Outline of system and pipe size
Outdoor unit
2branches pipe(joint):optional part explained by this manual
A
A
Branch box #1
A
B
B
B
B
A
B
Liquid(mm) φ9.52 Refer to installation manual of
Gas(mm) φ15.88 outdoor unit and branch box
B
Branch box #2
See the following for the specifications of liquid pipe, and gas pipe
②Liquid pipe
〈Prohibition〉
③Gas pipe
Please do not make the following connection.
To Branch box
3/8F φ9.52
(To Branch box)
3/8F φ9.52
(To outdoor unit)
To Branch box
5/8F φ15.88
(To Branch box)
5/8F φ15.88
(To outdoor unit)
To outdoor unit
Installing the refrigerrant piping
90゜ ± 0.5゜
A
45゜ ± 2゜
Ⓐ
Ⓑ
Ⓑ
Ⓐ
φA
R0
.4
∼
・When bending the pipes, be careful not to break them.Bend radii of
100mm to 150mm are sufficient.
R0
・Make sure the pipes do not contact the compressor. Abnormal noise
.8
or vibration may reuslt.
Ⓓ
Ⓒ
Pipes must be connected starting from the indoor unit.
Flare unts must be tightened with a torgus wrench.
Flare the Iiguid pipes and gas pipes and apply a thin layer of
refringeration oil (Applied on site).
When usual pipe seaaling is used, refer to Table 1 for flaring of
R410A refrigerant pipes.
The size adjustment gauge can be used to confirm A measurements.
Ⓐ Flare cutting dimensions
Ⓑ Flare nut tighening torgue
Ⓐ
Copper pipe O.D.
(mm)
φ9.52
φ15.88
Ⓑ
Copper pipe O.D.
(mm)
Flare dimensions
φA dimensions (mm)
12.8-13.2
19.3-19.7
Table 1
Flare nut O.D.
(mm)
Tightening torque
(N・m)★
22
29
34-32
68-82
φ9.52
φ15.88
ⒶDie
ⒷCopper pipe
Copper pipe O.D.
(mm)
φ9.52(3/8″)
φ15.88(5/8″)
A (mm)
Flare tool for R410A
Flare tool for R22-R407C
Clutch type
1.0-1.5
0-0.5
0-0.5
1.0-1.5
Installation direction of joint
Horizontal direction
Vertical direction
Within ±15°
Within ±30°
Installing Heat Insulation Cover and Heat Insulators
Heat insulator
(to be locally procured)
(Note1)
・The liquid pipe (small:φ9.52) Make it fit the heat-insulation cover(small).
Seal the mating of the heat-insulation cover with the tape for sealing
heat insulators (to be locally procured).
・Do the same with the gas pipe (large:φ15.88),using the heat-insulation
cover (large), as with the liquid pipe (small).
Wrapping margin(Note2)
Heat-insulation
cover④
Wrapping margin(Note2)
Note 1 : Install a heat insulator on every part of the refrigerant pipes
(to be locally procured).
If you want to use commercially-available heat insulators,use
heat-resistant heat insulators (at least 12mm thick).
Note 2 : The pipe covers shrink a little under high heat.
Therefore, allow for some wrapping margin in the heat insulators.
E-157
PARTS
Tape
(to be locally procured)
OPTIONAL
(Liquid pipe)
Distribution Pipe
MSDD-50BR-E
Descriptions
Photo
For double-branching of the refrigerant piping to connect
2 branch boxes. (Brazing type)
Applicable Models
MXZ-8A140VA
PAC-AK30BC
PAC-AK50BC
Dimensions
Unit : mm
LIQUID PIPE
100
80
IDW9.52
(To outdoor unit)
IDW9.52
(To Branch box)
GAS PIPE
150
IDW15.88
(To outdoor unit)
80
OPTIONAL
PARTS
IDW15.88
(To Branch box)
E-158
Distribution Pipe MSDD-50BR-E
How to Use / How to Install
2-BRANCH PIPE(JOINT) (MSDD-50BR-E)
The kit contains followings
② Liquid pipe
(small:Ǿ9.52)
① Manual
This one-sheet manual
Applicable model
MXZ-8A140VA(R410A type)
※In case of 2 branch box connection for welding
③ Gas pipe
④ Heat-insulation
(Iarge:Ǿ15.88)
cover(small)
X1
X1
⑤ Heat-insulation
cover(Iarge)
X1
⑥ Pipe
(Gas pipe use:Ǿ15.88→Ǿ19.05)
X1
X3
Note:Besides these, please procure
the following locally:
(1)Tape for sealing the heat
insulation covers.
(2)Extension pipes for the
refrigerant system.
During installation, be careful about the followings
1.
2.
3.
4.
Note the limit Iength of the refrigerant pipe refer to the installation manual of outdoor unit and branch box.
Note the limits for installing the indoor units refer to the installation manual of outdoor unit and branch box.
Us solder in connecting any branch joint with any piping system or with the pipe. Insoldering, use oxygen-free solder.
Each branch joint has a stopper.
In connecting any pipe to any branch joint, thrust the pipe home till it ocks.
5. In connecting pipes, take care not to let any dirt or other oreign matter enter any pipe.
6. Put a heat insulator into every refrigerant pipe.
Outline of system and pipe size
2branches pipe(joint):optional part
explained by this manual
Outdoor unit
A
Outdoor unit:R410A type (MXZ-8A140VA)
A
B
Liquid(mm) Ǿ9.52 Refer to installation manual of
Gas(mm) Ǿ15.88 outdoor unit and branch box
A
Branch box #1
A
B
B
B
B
B
Branch box #2
See the following for the specifications of liquid pipe, and gas pipe
When outdoor unit is R22 type (MXZ-7A140VC), please connect three pipe⑥ to Gas pipe③ according to Fig.1 .
②Liquid pipe
③Gas pipe(When outdoor unit is R410A type)
ID Ǿ9.52
(To Branch box)
ID Ǿ9.52
(To outdoor unit)
ID Ǿ15.88
(To outdoor unit)
ID Ǿ15.88
(To Branch box)
〈Prohibition〉
Please do not make the following connection.
To Branch box
To Branch box
(To outdoor unit)
Installation direction of joint
Horizontal direction
Vertical direction
Within ±30゜
Within ±15゜
Installing Heat Insulation Cover and Heat Insulators
Tape
(to be locally procured)
Heat insulator
(to be locally procured)
(Note1)
・The liquid pipe (small) Make it fit the heat-insulation cover (small) .
Seal the mating of the heat-insulation cover with the tape for sealing
heat insulators(to be locally procured).
OPTIONAL
・Do the same with the gas pipe(large), using the heat-insulation
cover (large), as with the liquid pipe (small).
Wrapping margin(Note2)
Heat-insulation
cover④
Wrapping margin(Note2)
Note 1 : Install a heat insulator on every part of the refrigerant pipes
(to be locally procured).
If you want to use commercially-available heat insulators, use
heat-resistant heat insulators(at least 12mm thick).
Note 2 : The pipe covers shrink a little under high heat.
Therefore, allow for some wrapping margin in the heat insulators.
E-159
PARTS
(Liquid pipe)
Joint Pipe
Unit W6.35
PAC-SG72RJ-E
Pipe W9.52
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W6.35 → W9.52)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP
PUHZ-P
PUHZ-HRP
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
Dimensions
6.35
C 1220T - OL
Unit : mm (inch)
㪌㪐㪅㪌
㱂㪐㪅㪌㪉㩷㩿㪊㪆㪏㩹㪀
㱂㪍㪅㪊㪌㩷㩿㪈㪆㪋㩹㪀
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG72RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ6.35 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
PAC-SG73RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.70 diameter)
PAC-SG74RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ12.70 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-SG75RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ15.88 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ19.05 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
̌Refrigerant pipe connection̍in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
When pipe of 19.05 diameter is used, be sure to turn ON the SW8-1 on outdoor unit control board.
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ19.05㧔3/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe㧔mm㧕 flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
Ǿ6.35
8.7㨪9.1
the table above. B size can
Ǿ9.52
12.8㨪13.2
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2㨪16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4㨪R0.8
Ǿ15.88
19.3㨪19.7
adjustment.
Ǿ19.05
23.6㨪24.0
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
B
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4㧕After refrigerant pipe is connected,
Securely tighten flare nut using torque
2㧕Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3㧕
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
‫ޛ‬Proper tightening torque using torque wrench‫ ޜ‬inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N࡮m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf࡮cm)
5㧕
Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49㨪61㧔490㨪610㧕
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68㨪82
㧔
680㨪820㧕
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6㧕
Perform test run according to the
be loosened.)
Ǿ19.05
100㨪120㧔1000㨪1200㧕
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-160
Joint Pipe
Unit W9.52
PAC-SG73RJ-E
Pipe W12.7
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W9.52 → W12.7)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP
PUHZ-P
PUHZ-HRP
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
Dimensions
9.52
C 1220T - OL
Unit : mm (inch)
㪍㪍㪅㪌
㱂㪈㪉㪅㪎㩷㩿㪈㪆㪉㩹㪀
㱂㪐㪅㪌㪉㩷㩿㪊㪆㪏㩹㪀
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG72RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ6.35 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
PAC-SG73RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.70 diameter)
PAC-SG74RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ12.70 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-SG75RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ15.88 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ19.05 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
̌Refrigerant pipe connection̍in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
When pipe of 19.05 diameter is used, be sure to turn ON the SW8-1 on outdoor unit control board.
4㧕After refrigerant pipe is connected,
Securely tighten flare nut using torque
2㧕
Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3㧕
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
‫ޛ‬Proper tightening torque using torque wrench‫ ޜ‬inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N࡮m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf࡮cm)
5㧕
Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49㨪61㧔490㨪610㧕
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68㨪82
㧔
680㨪820㧕
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6㧕
Perform test run according to the
be loosened.)
Ǿ19.05
100㨪120㧔1000㨪1200㧕
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-161
PARTS
Copper pipe
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe㧔mm㧕 flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
Ǿ6.35
8.7㨪9.1
the table above. B size can
Ǿ9.52
12.8㨪13.2
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2㨪16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4㨪R0.8
Ǿ15.88
19.3㨪19.7
adjustment.
Ǿ19.05
23.6㨪24.0
OPTIONAL
dies
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ19.05㧔3/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
B
Joint Pipe
Unit W12.7
PAC-SG74RJ-E
Pipe W15.88
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W12.7 → W15.88)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP
PUHZ-P
PUHZ-HRP
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
Dimensions
12.7
C 1220T - OL
Unit : mm (inch)
㪎㪌
㱂㪈㪌㪅㪏㪏㩷㩿㪌㪆㪏㩹㪀
㱂㪈㪉㪅㪎㩷㩿㪈㪆㪉㩹㪀
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG72RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ6.35 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
PAC-SG73RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.70 diameter)
PAC-SG74RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ12.70 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-SG75RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ15.88 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ19.05 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
̌Refrigerant pipe connection̍in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
When pipe of 19.05 diameter is used, be sure to turn ON the SW8-1 on outdoor unit control board.
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ19.05㧔3/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe㧔mm㧕 flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
Ǿ6.35
8.7㨪9.1
the table above. B size can
Ǿ9.52
12.8㨪13.2
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2㨪16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4㨪R0.8
Ǿ15.88
19.3㨪19.7
adjustment.
Ǿ19.05
23.6㨪24.0
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
B
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4㧕After refrigerant pipe is connected,
2㧕Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3㧕Securely tighten flare nut using torque
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
‫ޛ‬Proper tightening torque using torque wrench‫ ޜ‬inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N࡮m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf࡮cm)
5㧕
Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49㨪61㧔490㨪610㧕
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68㨪82
㧔
680㨪820㧕
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6㧕
Perform test run according to the
be loosened.)
Ǿ19.05
100㨪120㧔1000㨪1200㧕
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-162
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG75RJ-E
Pipe W19.05
Unit W15.88
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W15.88 → W19.05)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP
PUHZ-P
PUHZ-HRP
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
Dimensions
15.88
C 1220T - OL
Unit : mm (inch)
㪎㪏㪅㪌
㱂㪈㪐㪅㪇㪌㩷㩿㪊㪆㪋㩹㪀
㱂㪈㪌㪅㪏㪏㩷㩿㪌㪆㪏㩹㪀
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG72RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ6.35 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
PAC-SG73RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.70 diameter)
PAC-SG74RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ12.70 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-SG75RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ15.88 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ19.05 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
̌Refrigerant pipe connection̍in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
When pipe of 19.05 diameter is used, be sure to turn ON the SW8-1 on outdoor unit control board.
4㧕After refrigerant pipe is connected,
Securely tighten flare nut using torque
2㧕
Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3㧕
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
‫ޛ‬Proper tightening torque using torque wrench‫ ޜ‬inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N࡮m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf࡮cm)
5㧕Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49㨪61㧔490㨪610㧕
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68㨪82
㧔
680㨪820㧕
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6㧕Perform test run according to the
be loosened.)
Ǿ19.05
100㨪120㧔1000㨪1200㧕
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-163
PARTS
Copper pipe
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe㧔mm㧕 flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
Ǿ6.35
8.7㨪9.1
the table above. B size can
Ǿ9.52
12.8㨪13.2
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2㨪16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4㨪R0.8
Ǿ15.88
19.3㨪19.7
adjustment.
Ǿ19.05
23.6㨪24.0
OPTIONAL
dies
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ19.05㧔3/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
B
Joint Pipe
Unit W9.52
PAC-SG76RJ-E
Pipe W15.88
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different
diameter. (Unit W9.52 → W15.88)
Applicable Models
MXZ-4A71VA
MXZ-8A140VA
MXZ-4A80VA
PAC-AK30BC
MXZ-5A100VA
PAC-AK50BC
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
Dimensions
9.52
C 1220T - OL
Unit : mm (inch)
ϫ:/63!)409#*
ϫ26/99!)609#*
212/6
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG76RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-493PI (unit side:Ǟ6.32 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A454JP-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.7 diameter)
MAC-A455JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A456JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
㩷 㩷㵰 Refrigerant pipe connection㵱 in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe(mm) flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45゜± 2゜
Ǿ6.35
8.7∼9.1
the table above. B size can
12.8∼13.2
Ǿ9.52
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2∼16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4∼R0.8
19.3∼19.7
Ǿ15.88
adjustment.
90゜± 0.5゜
φA
B
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4䋩After refrigerant pipe is connected,
2䋩Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3䋩Securely tighten flare nut using torque
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
〈Proper tightening torque using torque wrench〉 inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N・m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf・cm)
5䋩Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14∼18(140∼180)
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34∼42(340∼420)
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49∼61(490∼610)
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68∼82(680∼820)
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6䋩Perform
test run according to the
be loosened.)
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-164
Joint Pipe
Unit W6.35
PAC-493PI
Pipe W9.52
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different
diameter. (Unit W6.35 → W9.52)
Applicable Models
MXZ-4A80VA
PAC-AK30BC
MXZ-5A100VA
PAC-AK50BC
MXZ-8A140VA
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
Dimensions
6.35
C 1220T - OL
Unit : mm (inch)
ϫ7/46!)205#*
ϫ:/63!)409#*
71/6
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG76RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-493PI (unit side:Ǟ6.32 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A454JP-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.7 diameter)
MAC-A455JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A456JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
㩷 㩷㵰 Refrigerant pipe connection㵱 in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
4䋩After refrigerant pipe is connected,
2䋩Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3䋩Securely tighten flare nut using torque
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
〈Proper tightening torque using torque wrench〉 inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N・m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf・cm)
5䋩Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14∼18(140∼180)
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34∼42(340∼420)
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49∼61(490∼610)
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68∼82(680∼820)
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6䋩Perform
test run according to the
be loosened.)
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-165
PARTS
Copper pipe
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe(mm) flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45゜± 2゜
Ǿ6.35
8.7∼9.1
the table above. B size can
12.8∼13.2
Ǿ9.52
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2∼16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4∼R0.8
19.3∼19.7
Ǿ15.88
adjustment.
OPTIONAL
dies
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
90゜± 0.5゜
φA
B
Joint Pipe
Unit W9.52
MAC-A454JP-E
Pipe W12.7
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W9.52 → W12.7)
Applicable Models
MXZ-3A54VA
MXZ-5A100VA
MXZ-4A71VA
MXZ-8A140VA
MXZ-4A80VA
PAC-AK30BC
PAC-AK50BC
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
9.52
C 1220T - OL
* photo model: PAC-493PI
Dimensions
Unit : mm (inch)
ϫ:/63!)409#*
ϫ23/8!)203#*
75
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG76RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-493PI (unit side:Ǟ6.32 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A454JP-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.7 diameter)
MAC-A455JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A456JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
㩷 㩷㵰 Refrigerant pipe connection㵱 in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe(mm) flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45゜± 2゜
Ǿ6.35
8.7∼9.1
the table above. B size can
12.8∼13.2
Ǿ9.52
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2∼16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4∼R0.8
19.3∼19.7
Ǿ15.88
adjustment.
90゜± 0.5゜
φA
B
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4䋩After refrigerant pipe is connected,
2䋩Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3䋩Securely tighten flare nut using torque
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
〈Proper tightening torque using torque wrench〉 inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N・m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf・cm)
5䋩Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14∼18(140∼180)
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34∼42(340∼420)
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49∼61(490∼610)
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68∼82(680∼820)
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6䋩Perform
test run according to the
be loosened.)
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-166
Joint Pipe
Unit W12.7
MAC-A455JP-E
Pipe W9.52
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect the refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W12.7 → W9.52)
Applicable Models
MXZ-4A71VA
PAC-AK30BC
MXZ-4A80VA
PAC-AK50BC
MXZ-5A100VA
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
12.7
C 1220T - OL
* photo model: PAC-493PI
Dimensions
Unit : mm (inch)
ϫ23/8!)203#*
ϫ:/63!)409#*
71/6
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG76RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-493PI (unit side:Ǟ6.32 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A454JP-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.7 diameter)
MAC-A455JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A456JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
㩷 㩷㵰 Refrigerant pipe connection㵱 in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
4䋩After refrigerant pipe is connected,
2䋩Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3䋩Securely tighten flare nut using torque
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
〈Proper tightening torque using torque wrench〉 inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N・m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf・cm)
5䋩Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14∼18(140∼180)
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34∼42(340∼420)
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49∼61(490∼610)
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68∼82(680∼820)
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6䋩Perform
test run according to the
be loosened.)
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-167
PARTS
Copper pipe
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe(mm) flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45゜± 2゜
Ǿ6.35
8.7∼9.1
the table above. B size can
12.8∼13.2
Ǿ9.52
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2∼16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4∼R0.8
19.3∼19.7
Ǿ15.88
adjustment.
OPTIONAL
dies
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
90゜± 0.5゜
φA
B
Joint Pipe
Unit W12.7
MAC-A456JP-E
Pipe W15.88
Descriptions
Photo
A part to connect refrigerant pipes of the different diameter.
(Unit W12.7 → W15.88)
Applicable Models
MXZ-4A71VA
MXZ-8A140VA
MXZ-4A80VA
PAC-AK30BC
MXZ-5A100VA
PAC-AK50BC
Specifications
Pipe diameter
Pipe material
12.7
C 1220T - OL
* photo model: PAC-493PI
Dimensions
Unit : mm (inch)
ϫ23/8!)203#*
ϫ26/99!)609#*
77/6
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts, in addition to this manual in this box:
Joint Pipe
PAC-SG76RJ-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
PAC-493PI (unit side:Ǟ6.32 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A454JP-E (unit side:Ǟ9.52 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ12.7 diameter)
MAC-A455JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ9.52 diameter)
MAC-A456JP-E (unit side:Ǟ12.7 diameter, onsite pipe side:Ǟ15.88 diameter)
Unit side
Onsite piping side
Installation procedure
(carefully read the following before installing.)
This optional part is used to connect indoor/outdoor unit to
onsite pipes of different diameters.
When installing this optional part, be sure to read
㩷 㩷㵰 Refrigerant pipe connection㵱 in the installation manual
attached to outdoor unit.
Apply flare processing to onsite pipes to adapt to R410A, according to the table on the right.Use optional accessory flare nut at this time.
Check the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for advisability on whether or not onsite (existing) pipes can be used.
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Pipe diameter
R410A flare tool R22/R407C flare tool
(mm)
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ12.70㧔1/2̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
Ǿ15.88㧔5/8̍㧕
0∼0.5
1.0∼1.5
When flare processing for Outer diameter of Processing size of
refrigerant R410A is applied
Flare shape
copper pipe(mm) flare section (mm)
using current tool, refer to
45゜± 2゜
Ǿ6.35
8.7∼9.1
the table above. B size can
12.8∼13.2
Ǿ9.52
be secured using copper
Ǿ12.70
16.2∼16.6
pipe gauge for margin
R0.4∼R0.8
19.3∼19.7
Ǿ15.88
adjustment.
90゜± 0.5゜
φA
B
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4䋩After refrigerant pipe is connected,
2䋩Remove caps (both ends) for protection against 3䋩Securely tighten flare nut using torque
be sure to perform gas leakage
wrench according to the table on the right.
mixing of foreign materials from optional part,
and thinly apply refrigerat or oil
〈Proper tightening torque using torque wrench〉 inspection for onsite connection
pipes (including this optional part)
(locally procured) on flare surface.
Outer diameter of Tightening torque N・m
and indoor/outdoor unit.
Refrigerator oil application point
copper pipe (mm)
(kgf・cm)
5䋩Heat insulation is necessary for
Apply refrigerator oil to entire circumference of
Ǿ6.35
14∼18(140∼180)
flare sheet surface.
this optional part: Wrap heat insulator
(locally procured) around the onsite
Ǿ9.52
34∼42(340∼420)
pipes and also the optional part
Ǿ12.70
49∼61(490∼610)
(for dewdrop dripping prevention).
Do not apply to thread section.
Ǿ15.88
68∼82(680∼820)
(If applied to threads, flare nut can easily
6䋩Perform
test run according to the
be loosened.)
installation manual of the unit,
making sure to also perform operation check.
E-168
Filter Dryer
(for Liquid Pipe of W6.35)
PAC-SG81DR-E
Descriptions
Photo
Removes minute dirt particles in the refrigerant pipe, when
replacing an air-conditioning unit. (for Liquid Pipe of W6.35)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP35
PUHZ-RP50
TO BE CONFIRMED
Specifications
Pipe size
Applicable refrigrant
Dimensions
Liquid side : Φ6.35 flare
R407C / R410A
Unit : mm
㪈㪉㪉㫧㪈㪅㪍
E-169
PARTS
OPTIONAL
㱂㪍㪎㫧㪇㪅㪏
㪎㪍㫧㪈㪅㪌
Filter Dryer for Liquid Pipe of W6.35 PAC-SG81DR-E
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts.
ԘFilter dryer
ԙConnection pipe
ԚHeat insulator
PAC-SG81DR-E (for diameter of Φ6.35) PAC-SG81DR-E (for diameter of Φ6.35) PAC-SG81DR-E (for diameter of Φ6.35)
PAC-SG82DR-E (for diameter of Φ9.52) PAC-SG82DR-E (for diameter of Φ9.52) PAC-SG82DR-E (for diameter of Φ9.52)
For diameter
of 6.35 or 9.52
For diameter
of 6.35 or 9.52
One piece
For diameter
of 6.35 or
9.52
One piece
One piece
Installation Procedures (carefully read the following before installation.)
Cautions: 1) This optional part is used to remove moisture within refrigerant pipe to prevent compressor failures.
However, if too much impurity inside refrigerant cycle has accumulated, such as amount of mixed moisture,
dryer must be replaced after one season elapses. (Amount of allowable moisture absorption: 3 -7 cc)
2) Install the filter dryer to refrigerant pipe mid way on liquid side.
3) Filter dryer can be installed outside of the unit. Installation inside the unit is possible only when installation
space can be secured.
1‫ޓ‬Preparation for installation
In the following parts, the installation for PUHZ-RP3VHA is highlighted as a representive.
㧕Refer to the installation manual of the unit for procedure of refrigerant piping and vacuuming, etc.
Remove the panel from outdoor unit. (See Fig. 1.)
㧕Removing the panel
Remove the service panel, front pipe cover and back pipe cover.
Remove back pipe cover only when taking it from back pipe.
㧕Pipe connection
When bending pipe, take bending R (R100㨪R150) just enough, and take care that pipe des not fold.
Apply pipe processing without touching compressor. (If the pipe touches, it may cause abnormal sound or vibration.)
Apply flare processing to connection pipe, arranging this on site.
Thinly apply refrigerator oil (locally procured) to flare sheet surface.
Outer diameter of
copper pipe㧔mm㧕
Processing size of
flare section (mm)
Ǿ6.35
Ǿ9.52
8.7㨪9.1
12.8㨪13.2
Refrigerator oil application point
Flare shape
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
‫ޣ‬Fig. 1‫ޤ‬
Panel disassembly diagram
Apply refrigerator oil to entire
circumference of flare sheet
surface.
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
R0.4㨪R0.8
‫ޛ‬Proper tightening torque using torque wrench‫ޜ‬
Outer diameter of
copper pipe (mm)
Ǿ6.35
Ǿ9.52
Tightening torque
N࡮m (kgf࡮cm)
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
B
Pipe
diameter
(mm)
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Back pipe cover
R410A flare tool R22, R407C flare tool
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
̪When flare processing for refrigerant R410A is applied using current tool, refer to the table
‫ޓ‬above. B size can be secured using copper pipe gauge for margin adjustment.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-170
Service panel
Front pipe cover
Removal direction
of service panel
Filter Dryer for Liquid Pipe of W6.35 PAC-SG81DR-E
2˴Installation of Filter dryer
Be sure to install filter dryer on liquid side (narrow side).
㧕When filter dryer is being installed inside the unit, refer to Figs 2 and 3, according to the installation space for dryer.
˴˴If installation space for dryer cannot be secured, install it outside of the unit.Install referring to Item 2-ii).
‫ޣ‬Fig. 2‫ޤ‬
Filter dryer installation diagram (Installation inside the unit)
Enlarged diagram of Fig. 2
Pipe (liquid side)
ԙConnection pipe
ԘFilter dryer
ԚHeat insulator
‫ޣ‬Fig. 3‫ޤ‬
Filter dryer installation diagram (horizontal installation inside the unit)
Enlarged diagram of Fig. 3
Pipe (liquid side)
ԘFilter dryer
Connection pipe (liquid side)
Nut (on site arrangement)
ԚHeat insulator
㧕When installing outside of the unit, install it at optional position of extension pipe.
Make and arrange connection pipe on the site. (See Fig. 4.)
‫ޣ‬Fig. 4‫ޤ‬
Filter dryer installation diagram (Installation outside of the unit)
Enlarged diagram of Fig. 4
ԚHeat insulator ԘFilter dryer
Connection pipe (liquid side)
Nut (on site arrangement)
㧕Perform heat insulation work. (To prevent dewdrops forming)
After dryer is installed, wrap heat insulator around dryer section.
˴̪Apply taping to joint of heat insulator ensuring that there is no gap. Also wrap heat insulator around pipe.
OPTIONAL
4˴Test run
㧕Perform test run according to the installation manual of the unit, and be sure to perform gas leak check and operation check.
E-171
PARTS
3 Filter dryer installation is now complete. Reattach service panel as it was.
Filter Dryer
PAC-SG82DR-E
(for Liquid Pipe of W9.52)
Descriptions
Photo
Removes minute dirt particles in the refrigerant pipe, when
replacing an air-conditioning unit. (for Liquid Pipr of W9.52)
Applicable Models
TO BE CONFIRMED
MXZ-8A140VA
PUHZ-RP140
PUHZ-P200
PUHZ-RP60
PUHZ-RP200
PU(H)-P71
PUHZ-RP71
PUHZ-HRP71
PU(H)-P100
PUHZ-RP100
PUHZ-HRP100
PU(H)-P125
PUHZ-RP125
PUHZ-HRP125
PU(H)-P140
Specifications
Pipe size
Applicable refrigrant
Dimensions
Unit : mm
㪈㪌㪈㫧㪈㪅㪍
㱂㪍㪎㫧㪇㪅㪏
㪐㪎㫧㪈㪅㪌
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-172
Liquid side: Φ 9.52 flare
R407C / R410A
Filter Dryer for Liquid Pipe of W9.52 PAC-SG82DR-E
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts.
ԘFilter dryer
ԙConnection pipe
ԚHeat insulator
PAC-SG81DR-E (for diameter of Φ6.35) PAC-SG81DR-E (for diameter of Φ6.35) PAC-SG81DR-E (for diameter of Φ6.35)
PAC-SG82DR-E (for diameter of Φ9.52) PAC-SG82DR-E (for diameter of Φ9.52) PAC-SG82DR-E (for diameter of Φ9.52)
For diameter
of 6.35 or 9.52
For diameter
of 6.35 or 9.52
For diameter
of 6.35 or
9.52
One piece
One piece
One piece
Installation Procedures (carefully read the following before installation.)
Cautions: 1) This optional part is used to remove moisture within refrigerant pipe to prevent compressor failures.
However, if too much impurity inside refrigerant cycle has accumulated, such as amount of mixed moisture,
dryer must be replaced after one season elapses. (Amount of allowable moisture absorption: 3 -7 cc)
2) Install the filter dryer to refrigerant pipe mid way on liquid side.
3) Filter dryer can be installed outside of the unit. Installation inside the unit is possible only when installation
space can be secured.
1‫ޓ‬Preparation for installation
In the following parts, the installation for PUHZ-RP3VHA is highlighted as a representive.
㧕Refer to the installation manual of the unit for procedure of refrigerant piping and vacuuming, etc.
Remove the panel from outdoor unit. (See Fig. 1.)
㧕Removing the panel
Remove the service panel, front pipe cover and back pipe cover.
Remove back pipe cover only when taking it from back pipe.
㧕Pipe connection
When bending pipe, take bending R (R100㨪R150) just enough, and take care that pipe des not fold.
Apply pipe processing without touching compressor. (If the pipe touches, it may cause abnormal sound or vibration.)
Apply flare processing to connection pipe, arranging this on site.
Thinly apply refrigerator oil (locally procured) to flare sheet surface.
Outer diameter of
copper pipe㧔mm㧕
Processing size of
flare section (mm)
Ǿ6.35
Ǿ9.52
8.7㨪9.1
12.8㨪13.2
Refrigerator oil application point
Flare shape
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
‫ޣ‬Fig. 1‫ޤ‬
Panel disassembly diagram
Apply refrigerator oil to entire
circumference of flare sheet
surface.
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
R0.4㨪R0.8
‫ޛ‬Proper tightening torque using torque wrench‫ޜ‬
Tightening torque
N࡮m (kgf࡮cm)
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
Pipe
diameter
(mm)
dies
Copper pipe
B size (mm)
Back pipe cover
R410A flare tool R22, R407C flare tool
Clutch type
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
̪When flare processing for refrigerant R410A is applied using current tool, refer to the table
‫ޓ‬above. B size can be secured using copper pipe gauge for margin adjustment.
Service panel
Front pipe cover
Removal direction
of service panel
E-173
PARTS
B
OPTIONAL
Outer diameter of
copper pipe (mm)
Ǿ6.35
Ǿ9.52
Filter Dryer for Liquid Pipe of W9.52 PAC-SG82DR-E
2˴Installation of Filter dryer
Be sure to install filter dryer on liquid side (narrow side).
㧕When filter dryer is being installed inside the unit, refer to Figs 2 and 3, according to the installation space for dryer.
˴˴If installation space for dryer cannot be secured, install it outside of the unit.Install referring to Item 2-ii).
‫ޣ‬Fig. 2‫ޤ‬
Filter dryer installation diagram (Installation inside the unit)
Enlarged diagram of Fig. 2
Pipe (liquid side)
ԙConnection pipe
ԘFilter dryer
ԚHeat insulator
‫ޣ‬Fig. 3‫ޤ‬
Filter dryer installation diagram (horizontal installation inside the unit)
Enlarged diagram of Fig. 3
Pipe (liquid side)
ԘFilter dryer
Connection pipe (liquid side)
Nut (on site arrangement)
ԚHeat insulator
㧕When installing outside of the unit, install it at optional position of extension pipe.
Make and arrange connection pipe on the site. (See Fig. 4.)
‫ޣ‬Fig. 4‫ޤ‬
Filter dryer installation diagram (Installation outside of the unit)
Enlarged diagram of Fig. 4
ԚHeat insulator ԘFilter dryer
Connection pipe (liquid side)
Nut (on site arrangement)
㧕Perform heat insulation work. (To prevent dewdrops forming)
After dryer is installed, wrap heat insulator around dryer section.
˴̪Apply taping to joint of heat insulator ensuring that there is no gap. Also wrap heat insulator around pipe.
3 Filter dryer installation is now complete. Reattach service panel as it was.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
4˴Test run
㧕Perform test run according to the installation manual of the unit, and be sure to perform gas leak check and operation check.
E-174
Filter Dryer (for Liquid Pipe of W 12.7)
PAC-SG85DR-E
Descriptions
Photo
Removes minute dirt particles in the refrigerant pipe. Is used
when replacing an air-conditioning unit. (for Liquid Pipe of
W12.7)
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP250
PUHZ-P250
Specifications
Pipe size
Applicable refrigrant
Dimensions
Liquid side: Φ 12.7 flare
R407C / R410A
Unit : mm
㪈㪎㪎㫧㪈㪅㪍
E-175
PARTS
OPTIONAL
㱂㪏㪇㫧㪇㪅㪏
㪈㪈㪎㫧㪈㪅㪌
Filter Dryer for Liquid Pipe of W12.7 PAC-SG85DR-E
How to Use / How to Install
Make sure that you have all the following parts.
ԘFilter dryer
ԙConnection pipe
ԚHeat insulator
With PAC-SG85DR-E
(forǾ12.7)
With PAC-SG81DR-E (forǾ6.35)
or PAC-SG82DR-E (forǾ9.52)
or
˜
˜
˜
˜
Installation Procedures (carefully read the following before installing)
Cautions This optional part is used to remove moisture inside the refrigerant pipe and prevent fault of compressor. However,
if there is excessive contamination inside the refrigerant cycle, such as a large amount of mixed moisture, etc., the
dryer must be replaced after it is used during one season (the amount of allowable moisture absorption: 3-7 cc).
Install the filter dryer to refrigerant pipe midway on liquid side, using flare connection.
The filter dryer can be attached outside the unit. It can also be attached to the inside of unit only if the space for
installation can be secured
1˴Preparations for Installation
γ㧕Refer to the installation manual of outdoor unit for the procedures of removing
outdoor unit panel, refrigerant piping, vacuuming, etc.
δ㧕Removing panel
Remove the service panel and cover.
ε㧕Connecting pipes
When bending pipe, allow enough bending R (R100-150), and take
care that the pipe is not folded.
Lay out the pipe so that it does not come into contact with the compressor.
(Being in contact could cause abnormal sound or vibrations.)
Apply flare processing to the connection pipe procured at local site.
Thinly coat the flare sheet surface with refrigerant oil
(procured at local site).
Ǿ6.35
Ǿ9.52
Ǿ12.7
8.7㨪9.1
12.8㨪13.2
16.2㨪16.6
Dies
Copper tube
Refrigerant oil coating point
45ࠑr 2ࠑ
Coat the entire circumference of
sheet surface with refrigerant oil.
R0.4㨪R0.8
2˴Installing Filter Dryer
Dimension B (mm)
Pipe
diameter
(mm)
R410A flare tool
Ǿ 6.35㧔1/4̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 9.52㧔3/8̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
Ǿ 12.7㧔1/2̍㧕
0㨪0.5
1.0㨪1.5
R22/R407C flare tool
Clutch type
̪Use the above table as a reference when processing the flare for refrigerant
˴R410A using the conventional tool. Dimension B can be secured when using
˴a copper pipe gauge for outgoing margin adjustment.
Flare shape
90ࠑr 0.5ࠑ
ǾA
Outer diameter of Processing size of
copper pipe (mm) flare portion ǾA (mm)
B
‫ޛ‬Appropriate tightening force with torque wrench‫ޜ‬
Outer diameter of
copper pipe (mm)
Tightening force N.m
(kgf-cm)
Ǿ6.35
Ǿ9.52
Ǿ12.7
14㨪18㧔140㨪180㧕
34㨪42㧔340㨪420㧕
49㨪61㧔490㨪610㧕
Be sure to attach the filter dryer on the liquid pipe (narrower one)
γ㧕When installing the filter dryer inside the unit, refer to Fig. 1 or Fig. 2 according to the space in unit and install it.
˴˴If there is no space for the dryer to be installed in unit, install it outside the unit (see Fig. 3).
Install the filter dryer
inside or outside the unit.
Indoor unit
Outdoor
unit
Liquid pipe
‫ޣ‬Fig1‫ޤ‬
Gas pipe
Filter dryer attachment diagram
(installing in unit)
With PAC-SG81DR-E or PAC-SG82DR-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Valve (liquid side)
E-176
Valve (liquid side)
ԙConnection pipe
ԙConnection pipe
ԘFilter dryer
ԘFilter dryer
ԚHeat insulator
ԚHeat insulator
With PAC-SG85DR-E
Adjust the pipe attachment
orientation, taking care with
the position of knockout hole
in the bottom of outdoor unit.
Filter Dryer for Liquid Pipe of W12.7 PAC-SG85DR-E
‫ޣ‬Fig2‫ޤ‬Filter dryer attachment diagram (horizontal attachment in unit)
Valve (liquid side)
ԙConnection pipe
˴(liquid side)
ԘFilter dryer
ԚHeat insulator
δ㧕When installing the filter dryer outside the unit, attach it to any position of extended pipe.
˴˴Procure the connection pipe at local site.
‫ޣ‬Fig3‫ޤ‬Filter dryer attachment diagram (attachment outside unit)
'PNCTIGFXKGY
ԚHeat insulator
ԘFilter dryer
Outdoor unit
Gas pipe
Connection pipe (liquid side)
Liquid pipe
ε㧕Heat insulation (to prevent dripping)
After attaching the filter dryer, wrap the heat insulator around the dryer.
˴̪Tape the seam of heat insulator so that no gap is produced.
Also wrap heat insulator around other pipes.
3 The attachment of filter dryer is now complete.
Reattach the service panels, etc. to the original position.
4˴Test Run
E-177
PARTS
OPTIONAL
γPerform test run according to the installation manual of unit, and be sure to execute gas leakage check and operation check.
Branch Box Outer Cover
PAC-AK350CVR-E
(for outdoor installation)
Descriptions
Photo
Enables outdoor installation of branch box in case its
installation is impossible.
Applicable Models
MXZ-8A140VA
PAC-AK30BC
PAC-AK50BC
Specifications
Exterior
Color (Munsell)
Surface treatment
Material
Weight
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Acrylic resin coating
Alloy hot-dip Zinc-coated carbon steel sheet
3.5kg
Dimensions
Unit : mm
*1
rear opening
completed view
*1 Minimum dimension 330mm is required when
distribution pipe is bent 90q
hanger bolt pitch
*1
min230
320
43
63
13
15
280
(273)
19
450
hanger bolt pitch
402
53
77
OPTIONAL
PARTS
front
rear
553
E-178
min300
min50
198
240
100
(190)
4-hole
12
Branch Box
min250
776
min250
Branch Box Outer Cover for outdoor installation PAC-AK350CVR-E
How to Use / How to Install
Please check if you have all the following parts in the packing before installation:
ԘTOP COVER
ԙSIDE COVER-L ԚSIDE COVER-R
1
1pc
ԝSCREW(5˜12)
1pc
3 Installation:
‫ޣ‬fig.㧝‫ޤ‬
hanger bolt
ԜFRONT COVER
1pc
ԞWASHER(insulated)
20pcs
ԛUNDER COVER
1pc
ԟHANGER
8pcs
1pc
ԠINSTALLATION PROCEDURE
2pcs
This sheet 1 sheet
WASHER(insulated)Ԟ
nut(to be locally prepared)
TOP COVERԘ
SCREW(5˜12)ԝ
FRONT COVERԜ
SIDE COVER-Lԙ
key hole
hook hole
Branch Box
WASHER
(Branch Box accessories)
HANGERԟ
SIDE COVER-RԚ
TOP COVERԘ
UNDER COVERԛ
nut
(to be locally
prepared)
hanger bolt
‫ޣ‬fig.㧟‫ޤ‬
WASHER(insulated)
㨇Branch Box accessories㨉
min30
Branch Box
LEG
WASHER
[Branch Box accessories?
‫ޣ‬fig.㧠‫ޤ‬
TOP COVERԘ
Branch Box
nut
(to be locally
prepared)
Branch Box
accessories
WASHER
(insulated)
WASHER
hanger bolt
E-179
PARTS
‫ޝ‬Installation Procedures‫ޞ‬
1.Install hanger bolts to match with the holes on the Branch Box
(and the outer cover).
2.Put a nut(to be locally purchased) and a WASHERԞ to the each hanger bolts.
3.Fix the TOP COVERԘ to the hanger bolts with WASHERsԞ and nuts.‫ޣ‬fig.㧞‫ޤ‬
Make sure to level the TOP COVERԘ before fixing it.
4.Put one insulated WASHER each (which come with the Branch Box) to 4 hanger bolts.‫ޣ‬fig.3‫ޤ‬
5.Put one WASHER and one nut each (which come with the Branch Box)
to 2 hanger bolts either at front side or back side.‫ޣ‬fig.㧟‫ޤ‬
6.Hook two LEGs on the pre-fixed WASHERs and nuts first.
Then insert hanger bolts to two LEGs on the oppostie side and fix
them with WASHERs and nuts (which come with the Branch Box).‫ޣ‬fig.㧠‫ޤ‬
Make sure to level the Branch Box before fixing it.
̪Make sure that all 16 nuts are tightly fixed.
7.Install pipings and wirings etc, following the installation manual of the Branch Box.
̪Piping must be installed within the Outer Cover.
8.Fix the SIDE COVERsԙ&Ԛ on both sides to the TOP COVERԘ with SCREWsԝ.
First, put SCREWsԝ tentatively to the holes at the both upper ends
of the SIDE COVERsԙ&Ԛ, then hook them to the key holes on the TOP COVERԘ.
9.Fix the UNDER COVERԛ to the SIDE COVERsԙ&Ԛ with SCREWsԝ.
Hook HANGERsԟ first to the rear holes on the SIDE COVERsԙ&Ԛ and
then hook the other end of the HANGERs to the rear hole on the UNDER
COVERԛ. Thus you can avoid the UNDER COVERԛ falling and the installation
work will be easier.(facilitated).
10.Fix the FRONT COVERԜ to the TOP COVERԘ and the UNDER COVERԛ with SCREWsԝ.
̪Make sure that all 20 SCREWs are tightly fixed.
‫ޣ‬fig.㧞‫ޤ‬
WASHER
(insulated)Ԟ
OPTIONAL
hook hole
Air Outlet Guide
MAC-889SG
Descriptions
Photo
A part for changing the air direction from outdoor unit.
Can also be used to prevent short cycles.
Applicable Models
MUZ-FD25/35/50VA(BH)
MU(H)-GD80VB
MUZ-GE25/35/42/50VA(H)
MXZ-2A30/40/52VA
MUZ-GA60/71VA
MUZ-HC25/35VA(B)
MU(H)-GA20/25/35/60VB
MU(H)-GE50VB
Specifications
Exterior
Weight
Dimensions
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-180
Unit : mm
Color (Munsell)
Surface treatment
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Polyester resin coating
Material
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet
2.6kg
Air outlet Guide MAC-889SG
How to Use / How to Install
Selecting the installation location
• To select a location for installation, refer to "Selecting the installation location" in the
installation manual included with the unit.
1. Preparations before installation to the unit
(Depending on the size of the outdoor unit, the locations for the screw holes are different.)
For 800(W)x550(H)x285(D) outdoor units
• Remove the front panel from the outdoor unit.
• Drill Ø4.0mm screw holes in the front panel at the 4 locations shown at the right.
(Be sure to remove the front panel before drilling the holes.Otherwise, the heat exchanger and
electrical components could be damaged if the drill bit travels too far into the unit).
E-181
PARTS
OPTIONAL
For 710(W)x540(H)x255(D) outdoor units
• Remove the front panel from the outdoor unit.
• Drill 4.0mm screw holes in the front panel at the 4 locations shown at the right.
(Be sure to remove the front panel before drilling the holes.Otherwise, the heat exchanger and
electrical components could be damaged if the drill bit travels too far into the unit).
MAC-889SG Air outlet Guide
For 800(W)x600(H)x300(D) outdoor units
• Remove the front panel from the outdoor unit.
• Drill 4.0mm screw holes in the front panel at the 4 locations shown at the right.
(Be sure to remove the front panel before drilling the holes.Otherwise, the heat exchanger and
electrical components could be damaged if the drill bit travels too far into the unit).
For 684(W)x540(H)x255(D) outdoor units
• Peel off the trademark.
• Remove the front panel from the outdoor unit.
• Drill 4.0mm screw holes in the front panel at the 4 locations shown at the right.
(Be sure to remove the front panel before drilling the holes.Otherwise, the heat exchanger and
electrical components could be damaged if the drill bit travels too far into the unit).
2. Installation to the unit
• Install the front panel to the outdoor unit.
• Install the air outlet guide to the outdoor unit using the4 included screws.*
(Install the guide so that the air will be directed upward.)
*For 684(W)x540(H)x255(D) outdoor units, use oval holes for the upper right and lower left holes.
• Affix the trademark (for 684(W)x540(H)x255(D) outdoor units).
Affix the included trademark at the location of the stamped marks shown at the right.
Note
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws.Otherwise, a chattering sound could be produced due to
vibration if the screws are loose.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-182
Air Outlet Guide
MAC-856SG
Descriptions
Photo
A part to change air direction from outdoor unit.
Can also be used to prevent short cycles.
Applicable Models
MXZ-3A54VA
MXZ-4A80VA
MXZ-4A71VA
MXZ-5A100VA
Specifications
Color (Munsell)
Material
Air outlet direction
Ivory (3.0Y7.8/1.1)
Air outlet grille: PP resin
Changeable between up and down
Accessory name × Qty.
<Material/Surface treatment>
Support A × 2 (Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated
carbon steel sheet / Acrylic resin coating)
Support B × 2 (Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated
carbon steel sheet / Acrylic resin coating)
Screw (5×10) × 14 (Iron/Zinc nickel alloy
plated)
Exterior
Dimensions
Unit : mm
Air outlet grille
591
Support
Components
Air outlet guide
80
Support A
Screw 5 10
Support B
577
There is a
cut part.
How to Use / How to Install
Fix the support B to the support A with 3 screws (5 10)
on each right and left side.
Front panel of the product
Remove 4 fixing screws of the grille.
Note) Do not remove the grille.
Support A
Screw 5 10
3 screws on each side
Grille of the suport
Support B
Grille
Fix the air outlet guide to the support B with 4 screws 5 10.
The directons of the air outlet can be selected from 4
directions, up, down, left, and right. Choose the appropriate
direction according to the installation environment.
Front panel of the product
Grille of the product
Support B
4 Screws 5 10
Air outlet guide
Screw removed in 1)
Grille of the product
Support A
The side which has 3 holes
E-183
PARTS
Note) Support A for right side and left side are identical with
each other. The side which has 2 holes should face the product,
and the other side which has 3 holes faces the outside.
Front panel of the product
OPTIONAL
Insert the support A between the product and the grille, and
reinstall the screws that removed in 1).
Air Outlet Guide
PAC-SG58SG-E
(to change air blowing direction)
Descriptions
Photo
A part to change air direction from outdoor unit. Can also be
used to prevent short cycles.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP35/50
only 1 piece required
Specifications
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Air outlet grille: PP resin
Weight
2.0kg
Air outlet direction
Changeable between up, down or sideways
Support x 4 (Alloy hot-dip zincAccessory name x Qty.
<Material/Surface treatment> coated carbon steel sheet / Acrylic
resin coating)
Exterior
Dimensions
Color (Munsell)
Material
Screw (M5x10) x 4 (Iron/Zinc nickel
alloy plated)
Screw (M4x10) x 8 (Iron/Zinc nickel
alloy plated)
Unit : mm
㪌㪎㪈㪅㪋
㪌㪌㪐㩷㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪸㫀㫉㩷㫆㫌㫋㫃㪼㫋㩷㪾㫉㫀㫃㫃㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㪀
㪌㪈㪇㩷
㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪌㪈㪎㪅㪎
㪉㪋
㪊㪉㫦
㪉㪇㩷 㪉㪋㩷㩿㪔㪋㪏㪇㪀
㪋㪄㪍㬍㪏㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼
㬍
㪪㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋
CAUTION
OPTIONAL
PARTS
* Air Guide prevents reverse rotation of outdoor unit fan when it enters low speed rotation mode with fan controller
being operated. It is also used for protection of fan when strong winds, such as a typhoon, wind blowing through tall
buildings, etc., directly strike the air outlet. In addition, installation of this product is necessary when cooling opetation
is to be performed in outdoor tempreture of -5͠ or lower (down to -15͠).
Note the followings when installing this guide:
1) Be sure not to use "upward discharge" in a place where snowing is possible. Snow may accumulate in the
guard, which could damage the fan, etc.
2) Attaching this unit will decrease the performance (by 2-3%) and increase noise from outdoor unit (by approx. 1-2 dB).
3) Do not use "upward discharge" when there are any obstacles at the back and on both sides of outdoor unit
(air is taken in from top of unit): This could cause a short cycle.
4) To eliminate the influence of external wind, be sure to install the unit with its back facing to wall.
5) Do not install this unit in a place where wind directly blows to the back of the unit.
E-184
㪌㪎㪈㪅㪋
㪊㪇㪊㩷㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪋㪄㱢㪌㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼
㪈㪎㪅㪏
㪋㪐㪅㪎
㪌㪌㪐㩷㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪸㫀㫉㩷㫆㫌㫋㫃㪼㫋㩷㪾㫉㫀㫃㫃㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㪀
㪘㫀㫉㩷㫆㫌㫋㫃㪼㫋㩷㪾㫉㫀㫃㫃㪼
㪊㪌
Air Outlet Guide to change air blowing directions PAC-SG58SG-E
How to Use / How to Install
Note that two sets of this product are necessary for RP100, RP125, RP140.
1‫ޓ‬Checking provided parts
Make sure that you have the following parts
ԘAir Discharge guide ˜ 1
ԙSupport ˜ 2
(For the upper and lower sides)
ԚSupport ˜ 2
(For right and left)
ԛAttachment screw ˜ 4
̪PAC-SG58SG-E
(Screw hole˜6)
PAC-SG58SG-E
(Screw hole˜2)
PAC-SG58SG-E(5˜10)
PAC-SG59SG-E(5˜35)
ԝSpacer ˜ 4
̪PAC-SG59SG-E
ԜAttachment screw ˜ 8
PAC-SG58SG-E(4˜10)
(In the following diagrams, dimensions in parentheses are for RP4 and higher number models.
Dimensions not in parentheses are common for all series models. Unit: mm)
٨Secure the necessary surrounding space shown below and select a place with less obstacles, to prevent a short cycle.
1) Surrounding space needed when installing one unit
࡮Do not use "upward discharge" in cases of figures (3) and (5) below.
2‫ޓ‬Checking Installation Space
(4) Obstacles at back, and sides
(open at front and top)
(3) Obstacles at back and top
(open at front and sides)
(5) Obstacles at back, sides
and top (open at front)
s
s
r le
ss
r le
0o
0o
50
1000 or more
㧔1500㧕
(2) Obstacles at back and front
(open at sides and top)
50
1000 or more
(1) Obstacle at front
(open at back, sides and top)
10
0
㧔 or m
20 or
0㧕 e
10
ore
rm
0 o 0㧕
10 㧔15
re
o
r m 0㧕
0o 0
50 㧔10
ore
rm
0o
50
0o
㧔 rm
20 or
0 oRP1 0㧕 e
r m .6,
or 2
e
e
or
rm 㧕
0 o 00
20 㧔3
35
e
or
m
or
0 00㧕
3
㧔
15
0
㧔 or m
25 or
0㧕 e
15
0
㧔 or m
2
35 RP 50㧕ore
0 o 1.6
r m ,2
ore
20
e
or
rm
0 o 0㧕
30 㧔50
2) Surrounding space needed when installing multiple units
࡮When installing units horizontally in a series, leave at least 350 mm space between units for 56-type or lower models,
and at least 10 mm for 63-type or higher models.
࡮Do not use "upward discharge" in case of figure (3) below.
(2) Obstacles at back and front
(open at sides and top)
(3) Obstacles at back and top
(open at front and sides)
re
or
mo
re
mo
or 0㧕
00 50
10 㧔1
(4) Installing units, one in each row
re
̪Limit of 3 units can be installed horizontally
in series. When installing a larger number
of units, maintain the space between units
shown above.
ore
rm
0 o 00㧕
5
㧔
30
(5) Installing multiple units in multiple rows
ore
rm
0o
10 150㧕
e
r
o
㧔
rm
0 o 0㧕
50 00
discharge
re 㧔1
mo
r
0o 㧕
̪Keep at least 1000 (2000) when using
40 00
re 㧔6
o
discharge guide in directions other than
r m 0㧕
0 o 00
50 㧔1
"upward discharge".
re
mo
or 㧕
0
00
10 150
e
㧔
or
rm
0o
40 600㧕
ore 㧕㧔
m
r
0
0 o 50
00 㧔1
ore
rm
0o 㧕
30 500
㧔
̪Keep
at least 2000 (3000) when using
discharge guide in directions other
than "upward discharge".
1
E-185
PARTS
00
10
or le
10
0
㧔 0 or
15 m
00 ore
㧕
10
㧔 00 o
15 r
00 mo
㧕
ore
rm
0 o 0㧕
30 㧔50
1000 or more
㧔1500㧕
ss
300
OPTIONAL
(1) Obstacle at front
(open at back, sides and top)
Air Outlet Guide to charge air blowing directions PAC-SG58SG-E
3‫ޓ‬Installation Complete Diagrams
64
86
188
14
Air Discharge guide
㧨Models RP35,50㧪
㧨Models RP60,71㧪
㧨Models RP100㨪RP140HA㧪
4‫ޓ‬Installation Method
For RP1.6 or 2:
1) Fix the two supports (2) and two supports (3), using four screws (5) to make a frame.
2) Attach the assembled supports to the outdoor unit using four screws (5), and then attach blowout guide (1)
to the support (2), using four screws (4).
࡮Four blowout directions can be selected: Check the orientation of blowout vane, and attach the blowout guide in the direction
that matches the situation at local site.
For RP2.5 - 6: (Two sets of support and blowout guide are necessary for two-fan type models.)
1) Remove the 4 screws that hold the existing fan guard.
2) Fit the 4 spacers into the hole in fan guard, and then use the 4 screws to install the provided blowout guide
to the
outdoor unit above the existing fan guard.
‫࡮ޓ‬The four blowout directions can be selected: Check the orientation of blowout vane, and install the blowout guide in the
direction that matches the circumstance at local site. (Two sets of fan guide are necessary for RP4 and higher models.)
㧨RP35,50㧪
Ԛ
㧨RP60~㧪
ԙ
ԛ Ԙ
ԛԘ
Ԝ
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-186
㧨Setting blow-off direction㧪
fanguard
ԝ
Upward
Discharge vane
Air Discharge guide
Downward
Sideways (to left or right)
Air Outlet Guide
PAC-SG59SG-E
(to charge air blowing direction)
Descriptions
Photo
A part to change air direction from outdoor unit. Can also be
used to prevent short cycles.
Applicable Models
MXZ-8A140VA
2 pieces required
PUHZ-P125-250
2 pieces required
PUHZ-RP60/71
only 1 piece required
PUHZ-HRP71/100/125
2 pieces required
PUHZ-P100
only 1 piece required
PU(H)-P71/100
only 1 piece required
PU(H)-P125/140
2 pieces required
Specifications
Exterior
Color (Munsell)
Material
Weight
Air outlet direction
Accessory name x Qty.
Washer faced screw (M5x35) x 4 (Iron
<Material/Surface treatment> wire (SWCH18A)/Zinc nickel plated)
Unit : mm
㪌㪎㪈㪅㪋
㪌㪌㪐㩷㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪸㫀㫉㩷㫆㫌㫋㫃㪼㫋㩷㪾㫉㫀㫃㫃㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㪀
㪋㪄㪍㬍㪏㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼
㪉㪋
㪉㪇㩷 㪉㪋㩷㩿㪔㪋㪏㪇㪀
㪌㪈㪎㪅㪎
㬍
* Air Guide prevents reverse rotation of outdoor unit fan when it enters low speed rotation mode with fan controller
being operated. It is also used for protection of fan when strong winds, such as a typhoon, wind blowing through tall
buildings, etc., directly strike the air outlet. In addition, installation of this product is necessary when cooling opetation
is to be performed in outdoor tempreture of -5͠ or lower (down to -15͠).
Note the followings when installing this guide:
1) Be sure not to use "upward discharge" in a place where snowing is possible. Snow may accumulate in the
guard, which could damage the fan, etc.
2) Attaching this unit will decrease the performance (by 2-3%) and increase noise from outdoor unit (by approx. 1-2 dB).
3) Do not use "upward discharge" when there are any obstacles at the back and on both sides of outdoor unit
(air is taken in from top of unit): This could cause a short cycle.
4) To eliminate the influence of external wind, be sure to install the unit with its back facing to wall.
5) Do not install this unit in a place where wind directly blows to the back of the unit.
E-187
PARTS
CAUTION
OPTIONAL
㪊㪉㫦
㪌㪌㪐㩷㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪈㪎㪅㪏
㪋㪐㪅㪎
㪌㪎㪈㪅㪋
Dimensions
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Air outlet grille: PP resin
1.2kg
Changeable between up, down or sideways
Air Outlet Guide to change air blowing directions PAC-SG59SG-E
How to Use / How to Install
2-fan type outdoor unit
1‫ޓ‬Checking provided parts
Make sure that this package has the following parts as well as the installation sheet:
ԙSupport ˜ 2
ԘAir Discharge guide ˜ 1
(For the upper and lower sides)
̪PAC-SG58SG-E
(Screw hole˜6)
ԚSupport ˜ 2
(For right and left)
PAC-SG58SG-E
(Screw hole˜2)
ԛAttachment screw ˜ 4
PAC-SG58SG-E(5˜10)
PAC-SG59SG-E(5˜35)
ԝSpacer ˜ 4
̪PAC-SG59SG-E
ԜAttachment screw ˜ 8
PAC-SG58SG-E(4˜10)
(In the following diagrams, dimensions in parentheses are for 2 fan type models.
Dimensions not in parentheses are common for all series models. Unit: mm)
٨Secure the necessary surrounding space shown below and select a place with less obstacles, to prevent a short cycle.
1) Surrounding space needed when installing one unit
࡮Do not use "upward discharge" in cases of figures (3) and (5) below.
(4) Obstacles at back, and sides
(5) Obstacles at back, sides
2‫ޓ‬Checking Installation Space
(open at front and top)
(3) Obstacles at back and top
(open at front and sides)
ss
0
50
le
or
and top (open at front)
ss
r le
0o
1000 or more
㧔1500㧕
(2) Obstacles at back and front
(open at sides and top)
50
1000 or more
(1) Obstacle at front
(open at back, sides and top)
10
r
0o
ore
rm
0 o 0㧕
10 㧔15
re
mo
50
0
50
re
mo
or 000㧕
1
㧔
0
㧔 or m
20 or
0㧕 e
10
0o
RP 㧔 r m
35 1.6 200 ore
㧕
0o ,2
r m , 35
or , 5
e
0
e
or
rm 㧕
0 o 00
20 㧔3
e
or
m
or
0 00㧕
3
㧔
20
15
0
㧔 or m
25 or
0㧕 e
15
0
RP 㧔2 or m
35 1.6, 50㧕ore
0 o 2,
r m 35
ore , 50
2) Surrounding space needed when installing multiple units
࡮When installing units horizontally in a series, leave at least 350 mm space between units for RP2, 50 type or lower
models, and at least 10 mm for RP2.5, 60 type or higher models.
࡮Do not use "upward discharge" in case of figure (3) below.
(1) Obstacle at front
(open at back, sides and top)
(2) Obstacles at back and front
(open at sides and top)
(3) Obstacles at back and top
(open at front and sides)
(4) Installing units, one in each row
re
00
o
rm
o
re
mo
or 0㧕
00 50
10 㧔1
10
10
㧔 00 o
15 r
00 mo
㧕 re
ore
rm
0 o 0㧕
30 㧔50
1000 or more
㧔1500㧕
ss
300
or le
10
0
㧔
0o
15 r m
00 ore
㧕
̪Limit of 3 units can be installed horizontally
in series. When installing a larger number
of units, maintain the space between units
shown above.
e
or
rm
0 o 0㧕
30 㧔50
ore
rm
0 o 00㧕
5
㧔
ore
rm
0o
10 50㧕
ore 㧔1
rm
0 o 0㧕
50 100
ore 㧔
rm
0o 㧕
40 600
ore 㧔
r m 0㧕
0 o 00
50 㧔1
discharge
̪Keep at least 1000 (2000) when using
discharge guide in directions other than
"upward discharge".
30
(5) Installing multiple units in multiple rows
3‫ޓ‬Installation Complete Diagrams
64
Air Discharge guide
re
mo
or 㧕
0
00
10 150
㧔
ore
86
rm
0o
40 600㧕
ore 㧔
r m 0㧕
0 o 150
0
10 㧔
188
14
ore
rm
0o 㧕
30 500
㧔
̪Keep at least 2000 (3000) when using
discharge guide in directions other
than "upward discharge".
㧨Models RP1.6, 2, 35, 50㧪 㧨Models RP2.5, 3, 60, 71㧪 㧨Models RP4㨪6,100㨪140㧪
4‫ޓ‬Installation Method
For RP1.6, 2, 35, 50㧦
1) Fix the two supports (2) and two supports (3), using four screws (5) to make a frame.
2) Attach the assembled supports to the outdoor unit using four screws (5), and then attach blowout guide (1)
to the support (2), using four screws (4).
࡮Four blowout directions can be selected: Check the orientation of blowout vane, and attach the blowout guide in the direction
that matches the situation at local site.
For (R)P2.5㨪6, 60㨪140: (Two sets of support and blowout guide are necessary for two-fan type models.)
1) Remove the 4 screws that hold the existing fan guard.
2) Fit the 4 spacers into the hole in fan guard, and then use the 4 screws to install the provided blowout guide
to the
outdoor unit above the existing fan guard.
‫࡮ޓ‬The four blowout directions can be selected: Check the orientation of blowout vane, and install the blowout guide in the
direction that matches the circumstance at local site.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
㧨RP1.6, 2, 35, 50㧪
Ԛ
㧨
R)P2.5㨪6, 60㨪140㧪
ԙ
fanguard
ԛ Ԙ
ԛԘ
Ԝ
E-188
ԝ
㧨Setting blow-off direction㧪
Upward
Discharge vane
Air Discharge guide
Downward
Sideways (to left or right)
Air Outlet Guide
PAC-SH96SG-E
(to charge air blowing direction)
Descriptions
Figure
A part to change air direction from outdoor unit. Can also be
used to prevent short cycles.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP100~250KA
2 pieces required
Specifications
Exterior
Air outlet guide
Color (Munsell)
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Material
Air outlet grille: Alloy hot-dip zinccoated carbon steel sheet
Weight
7kg
Air outlet direction
Changeable between up, down or sideways
Accessory name x Qty.
Washer faced screw (M5x15) x 12 (Iron
<Material/Surface treatment> wire (SWCH18A)/Zinc nickel plated)
Washer x 12, Spring washer x 12
Dimensions
Unit : mm
Air outlet grile
Support
150
285
626
6×85(=510)
85
°
45
638
CAUTION
Note the followings when installing this guide:
1) Be sure not to use "upward discharge" in a place where snowing is possible. Snow may accumulate in the
guard, which could damage the fan, etc.
2) Attaching this unit will decrease the performance (by 2-3%) and increase noise from outdoor unit (by approx. 1-2 dB).
3) Do not use "upward discharge" when there are any obstacles at the back and on both sides of outdoor unit
(air is taken in from top of unit): This could cause a short cycle.
4) To eliminate the influence of external wind, be sure to install the unit with its back facing to wall.
5) Do not install this unit in a place where wind directly blows to the back of the unit.
E-189
PARTS
* Air Guide prevents reverse rotation of outdoor unit fan when it enters low speed rotation mode with fan controller
being operated. It is also used for protection of fan when strong winds, such as a typhoon, wind blowing through tall
buildings, etc., directly strike the air outlet. In addition, installation of this product is necessary when cooling opetation
is to be performed in outdoor tempreture of -5͠ or lower (down to -15͠).
OPTIONAL
625
285
598
Air Outlet Guide to change air blowing directions PAC-SH96SG-E
How to Use / How to Install
2-fan type outdoor unit
1 Checking provided parts
Make sure that this package has the following parts as well as the installation sheet:
ԘAir Discharge guide
2
ԙSupport
1
ԚScrew(5%15)
1
ԛWasher
12
ԜSpring washer
12
12
Checking Installation Space (Unit: mm)
٨Secure the necessary surrounding space shown below and select a place with less obstacles, to prevent a short cycle.
1) Surrounding space needed when installing one unit
࡮Do not use "upward discharge" in cases of figures (3) and (5) below.
(4) Obstacles at back, and sides
(5) Obstacles at back, sides
(open at front and top)
(3) Obstacles at back and top
(open at front and sides)
ss
r le
0o
50
ss
r le
0o
50
20
ore
0o
rm
rm
0o
re
o
rm
o
00
r
0o
5
15
re
mo
or
e
e
50
00
or
r
mo
0o
(2) Obstacles at back and front
(open at sides and top)
00
rm
3
25
0o
e
20
or
or
rm
m
ore
3
or
e
2) Surrounding space needed when installing multiple units
࡮When installing units horizontally in a series, leave at least 10 mm space between units.
࡮Do not use "upward discharge" in case of figure (3) below.
(1) Obstacle at front
(open at back, sides and top)
and top (open at front)
ore
0
00
o
1
0
00
m
or
1
(1) Installing units, one in each row
ore
rm
0o
100
600
ore
or m
0
100
or
re
mo
00
or
̪Limit of 3 units can be installed horizontally
in series. When installing a larger number
of units, maintain the space between units
shown above.
mo
re
ore
rm
0o
50
(2) Installing multiple units in multiple rows
150
or
re
mo
500
or
re
mo
ore
rm
0o
150
̪Keep at least 2000 when using
discharge guide in directions other than
"upward discharge".
ore
ore
0
150
3 Installation Method
1500 or more
15
ore
rm
50
or le
or m
600
or m
̪Keep at least 3000 when using
discharge guide in directions other
than "upward discharge".
࡮4 blowout directions can be selected: Check the orientation of blowout vane, and attach the blowout guide in the direction
that matches the situation at local site.
(1)Attach the support to the outdoor unit (2)Set the orientation of the blowout vane
of the discharge guide to the desired
using the washers , spring washers direction and install the vane to the
and screws (at the 6 points) on the
outdoor unit using the washers , spring
existing fan guard
washers and screws (at 6 points). 㧨Setting blow-off direction㧪
Upward
Discharge vane
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Air Discharge guide
E-190
0o
50
(3) Obstacles at back and top
(open at front and sides)
0o
ore
rm
0o
ss
re
e
or
25
rm
300
o
rm
1500 or more
(2) Obstacles at back and front
(open at sides and top)
1000 or more
(1) Obstacle at front
(open at back, sides and top)
Downward Sideways (to left or right)
Air Protect Guide
PAC-SG56AG-E
(for cooling at -15)
Descriptions
Photo
Enables operation even when the outside temperature is low.
Protect the unit from cold wind.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP35/50
only 1 piece required
Specifications
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Acrylic resin coating
Exterior
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
Material
sheet
Weight
3.4kg
Washer faced screw (M4x10) x 18
Accessory name x Qty.
<Material/Surface treatment> <SUS410/Passivated>
Color (Munsell)
Surface treatment
Dimensions
Unit : mm
㪉㪇
㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋
㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋
㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪟㫆㫃㪼
㪉㪊
㪈㪊㪌
㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㪙
㪌㪈㪇
㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪊㪇㪊
㪌㪈㪇 㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪌㪉㪎
㪉㪇㪇
㪈㪍㪇
㪇
㪩㪉
㪇
㪩㪉
㪉㪊
㪈㪊㪌
㪟㫆㫃㪼
㪈㪊㪌
㪟㫆㫃㪼
㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㪘
㪋㪄㱢㪌㩷㪿㫆㫃㪼
㩿 㪉㪇㪇 㪀
㪚㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪦㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
OPTIONAL
* Air Guide prevents reverse rotation of outdoor unit fan when it enters low speed rotation mode with fan controller
being operated. It is also used for protection of fan when strong winds, such as a typhoon, wind blowing through tall
buildings, etc., directly strike the air outlet. In addition, installation of this product is necessary when cooling opetation
is to be performed in outdoor tempreture of -5͠ or lower (down to -15͠).
Note the followings when installing this guide:
1) Be sure not to use "upward discharge" in a place where snowing is possible. Snow may accumulate in the
guard, which could damage the fan, etc.
2) Attaching this unit will decrease the performance (by 2-3%) and increase noise from outdoor unit (by approx. 1-2 dB).
3) Do not use "upward discharge" when there are any obstacles at the back and on both sides of outdoor unit
(air is taken in from top of unit): This could cause a short cycle.
4) To eliminate the influence of external wind, be sure to install the unit with its back facing to wall.
5) Do not install this unit in a place where wind directly blows to the back of the unit.
E-191
PARTS
CAUTION
Air Protect Guide for cooling at -15PAC-SG56AG-E
How to Use / How to Install
For 2-fan type outdoor unit, two pieces are required.
1‫ޓ‬Checking parts
Make sure that all the following parts, in addition to this manual, are in this box:
Ԙ Front plate
㧝
ԙ Side plate
㧞
Ԛ Side plate
㧞 ԛ Connecting plate
̪Only for
PAC-SG56AG-E
㧞
ԜMounting screw 㧡˜㧟㧡
㧠
̪Only for
PAC-SG57AG-E
Ԟ Spacer
̪Only for
PAC-SG57AG-E
㧠
ԠWasher (for screw Ԝ)
̪Only for
PAC-SG57AG-E
㧠
ԝMounting screw 㧠˜㧝㧜 ԟMounting screw 㧠˜㧝㧞 ԡWasher (for screw ԟ)
For PAC-SG56AG-E
㧝㧠
㧠
㧠
For PAC-SG57AG-E
㧢
150㨪400
500 or more
Wall surface
Wall surface
150㨪400
150㨪400
2‫ ޓ‬Requirements of space for installation
㧔㧝㧕One unit installation:
150 or more
500 or more
Wall
surface
500 or more
Air guide
Wall surface
150㨪400
㧔㧞㧕Multiple unit installation:‫̪ޓ‬Installation of multiple units in series must be no more than five units.
150 or more
Wall surface
500 or more
500 or more
500 or more
3‫ޓ‬Installation procedure
For RP1.6, 2, 35, 50
㧔 㧝 㧕ԙ ԝ Ԛ
٨Fix side plates ԙ and Ԛ (two each)
using four screws ԝ and attach them
to outdoor unit using holes on side
plate Ԛ.
For other models:
㧔㧝㧕
ԜԠ ԙ Ԟ
㧔 㧞㧕ԟԡ ԛ
㧔㧟㧕 ԝ Ԙ
٨Attach two connecting plates ԛ to side
plate ԙ, using four screws ԟ with four
washers ԡ.
ԟԡ ԛ
㧔㧞㧕
٨Attach front plate Ԙ to side plate ԙ,
using six screws ԝ.
㧔㧟㧕ԝ Ԙ
OPTIONAL
PARTS
٨For RP2.5㨪6, 60㨪140, remove the four
screws securing fan guard from its
circumference.
٨Attach two side plates ԙ to outdoor unit
using four screws Ԝ.
E-192
٨Attach two connecting plates ԛ to
side plate ԙ, using four screws ԟ
with four washers ԡ.
٨Attach front plate Ԙ to side plate ԙ,
using six screws ԝ.
Air Protect Guide
(for cooling at -15)
PAC-SH63AG-E *
* model change from PAC-SG57AG-E from Sep 2005
Descriptions
Photo
Enables operation even when the outside temperature is low.
Protect the unit from cold wind.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP60/71
PUHZ-HRP71/100/125
only 1 piece required
PUHZ-P100
2 pieces required
PU(H)-P71/100
only 1 piece required
PUHZ-P125-250
only 1 piece required
PU(H)-P125/140
2 pieces required
2 pieces required
Specifications
Exterior
Color (Munsell)
Surface treatment
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Acrylic resin coating
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet
Weight
3.3kg
Washer faced screw (M5x15) x 4
Accessory name x Qty.
<Material/Surface treatment> <Iron wire (SWCH18A)/Zinc nickel
plated>
Material
㪉㪇㪇
㪈㪌㪌
㪌㪏㪏
㪌㪌㪐 㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪟㫆㫃㪼
㪩㪉
㪩㪉
㪟㫆㫃㪼
㩿㪉㪇㪇㪀
㪦㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼
CAUTION
* Air Guide prevents reverse rotation of outdoor unit fan when it enters low speed rotation mode with fan controller
being operated. It is also used for protection of fan when strong winds, such as a typhoon, wind blowing through tall
buildings, etc., directly strike the air outlet. In addition, installation of this product is necessary when cooling opetation
is to be performed in outdoor tempreture of -5͠ or lower (down to -15͠).
Note the followings when installing this guide:
1) Be sure not to use "upward discharge" in a place where snowing is possible. Snow may accumulate in the
guard, which could damage the fan, etc.
2) Attaching this unit will decrease the performance (by 2-3%) and increase noise from outdoor unit (by approx. 1-2 dB).
3) Do not use "upward discharge" when there are any obstacles at the back and on both sides of outdoor unit
(air is taken in from top of unit): This could cause a short cycle.
4) To eliminate the influence of external wind, be sure to install the unit with its back facing to wall.
5) Do not install this unit in a place where wind directly blows to the back of the unit.
E-193
PARTS
㪈㪊㪇
㪋㪄㱢㪎㪿㫆㫃㪼
OPTIONAL
㪟㫆㫃㪼
㪋㪇
㪈㪊㪇
㪋㪇
㪈㪊㪇
㪉㪌
Unit : mm (inch)
㪌㪌㪐 㩿㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫇㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㫆㪽㩷㪹㫆㪸㫉㪻㩷㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫆㫌㫋㪻㫆㫆㫉㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪀
㪌㪏㪋
Dimensions
Air Protect Guide for cooling at -15PAC-SH63AG-E
How to Use / How to Install
When 2-fan type outdoor unit is used, note that two sets of this product will be necessary.
1 Checking parts
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-194
Air Protect Guide for cooling at -15PAC-SH63AG-E
2 Requirements of space for installation
E-195
PARTS
OPTIONAL
3 Installation procedure
Air Protect Guide
PAC-SH95AG-E
(for cooling at -15)
Descriptions
Photo
Enables operation even when the outside temperature is low.
Protect the unit from cold wind.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-P100/125/140/200/250KA
2 pieces required
Specifications
Exterior
Color (Munsell)
Surface treatment
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Acrylic resin coating
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet
Weight
3.5kg
Washer faced screw (M5x15) x 4
Accessory name x Qty.
<Material/Surface treatment> <Iron wire (SWCH18A)/Zinc nickel
plated>
Material
Dimensions
Unit : mm (inch)
638(Installation pitch of outdoor unit)
16
48
0
0
48
586
150
R2
R2
6-ø7 hole
285
285
(Installation pitch of outdoor unit) (Installation pitch of outdoor unit)
627.8
40
150
10
653
0
R3
0
150
R2
155
200
102.5
CAUTION
OPTIONAL
PARTS
* Air Guide prevents reverse rotation of outdoor unit fan when it enters low speed rotation mode with fan controller
being operated. It is also used for protection of fan when strong winds, such as a typhoon, wind blowing through tall
buildings, etc., directly strike the air outlet. In addition, installation of this product is necessary when cooling opetation
is to be performed in outdoor tempreture of -5͠ or lower (down to -15͠).
Note the followings when installing this guide:
1) Be sure not to use "upward discharge" in a place where snowing is possible. Snow may accumulate in the
guard, which could damage the fan, etc.
2) Attaching this unit will decrease the performance (by 2-3%) and increase noise from outdoor unit (by approx. 1-2 dB).
3) Do not use "upward discharge" when there are any obstacles at the back and on both sides of outdoor unit
(air is taken in from top of unit): This could cause a short cycle.
4) To eliminate the influence of external wind, be sure to install the unit with its back facing to wall.
5) Do not install this unit in a place where wind directly blows to the back of the unit.
E-196
Air Protect Guide for cooling at -15PAC-SH95AG-E
How to Use / How to Install
When 2-fan type outdoor unit is used, note that two sets of this product will be becessary.
1 Checking parts
Make sure that all the following parts, in addition to this manual, are in this box:
ԙMounting screw
(5%15)
6
ԚWasher
6
ԛSpring washer
6
E-197
PARTS
1
OPTIONAL
ԘAir Guide
Air Protect Guide for cooling at -15PAC-SG95AG-E
2 Requirements of space for installation
(Unit : mm)
Wall
surface
Wall
surface
150~400
150~400
150~400
Min.500
(1)One unit installation
150 or more
Min.500
Wall
surface
Min. 500
Air guide
Wall
surface
150~400
(2)Multiple unit installation : Installation of multiple units in series must be no more than 5 units.
Min. 500
Wall surface
Min. 500
Min. 500
Min. 500
3 Installation procedure
(1)Install the air guide on the outdoor unit using washers , spring washers and screws .
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-198
Drain Socket
PAC-SF37DS-E
Descriptions
Photo
Cap the unnecessary holes on the outdoor unit (bottom) and
centralize the drainage when using a drain pipe.
Applicable Models
PU(H)-P71-140V(Y)HA
Specifications
PVC VP-25 or vinyl hose (ID: 25mm)
No freezing allowed
Operating conditions (Never to be used in cold climates)
Drain pipe
Material
Component
Dimensions
EPT rubber
Drain socket x 1, Drain cap x 5
Heat insulator x 3
(1 for liquid pipe, 1 large and 1 small insulator
for gas pipe),
Band x 8
Unit : mm
&TCKPUQEMGV
&TCKPECR
Ǿ
Ǿ
Ǿ
Ǿ
Ǿ
E-199
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Ǿ
㧔&TCKPRKRGEQPPGEVKQP㧕
Drain Socket PAC-SF37DS-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Accessory
Be aware that the following parts are put in the package together with the
instruction manual.
ԘDrain socket࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮1 pcs
ԙDrain cap࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮5 pcs
ԚInsulation part (for liquid pipe)࡮
࡮࡮࡮1 pc
with 2 holes
(common part to
all the models)
ԛInsulation part (for gas pipe)࡮
࡮࡮࡮࡮1 pc ԜBand࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮
࡮8 pcs
Common part to
all the models.
with 1 hole
2. Installation method for drain unit
‫ڏ‬Prepare the adhesive in the field.
(1) Glue the drain socket Ԙ to the hole that is used to centralize the drainage among several
holes at the bottom of the unit with the glue (Prepared in the field)
(2) Glue the drain caps ԙ to close all the other unnecessary holes with the glue
(Prepared in the field)
‫ޛ‬Note‫ ޜ‬Apply the glue securely, as the glue will work as seal to prevent water from leaking.
‫ޛ‬Note‫ ޜ‬Use the adhesive for the rubber and metal.
‫ޛ‬Recommended product‫ޜ‬
Supper X sirees made by CEMEDINE Co., Ltd.
(3) Insert a vinyl tube of which inner diameter 25 mm available commercially or a hard vinyl tube
VP25 to the drain socket Ԙ.
ԙ
Ԙ
Vinyl tube or hard vinyl tube (VP25)
3. Installation method for insulation parts
Install the insulation parts to stop valve of the outdoor unit.
̪The insulation parts should be installed after the tube has been connected to the unit.
̪Some units are provided with a check valve near stop valve. In this case,
cut the insulation parts Ԛ and ԛ so that they will fit the stop valve properly.
(1) Install the insulation part Ԛ with 2 holes to the liquid pipe side so that the holes
fit the valve caps and cover the stop valve entirely.
(2) Fix the insulation part Ԛ securely with bands Ԝ.
Install the other insulation part ԛ to the gas pipe side with the same procedure.
࡮Cut both ends of the insulation
part ԛ for gas tube side for the
model P71 or less.
Ԛ
Caps
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Tighten the bands
securely to completely
close the gap.
Stop valve
Ԝ
Cut the shaded portion
E-200
Cut the tip of the bands
after tightening.
Drain Socket
PAC-SG61DS-E
Descriptions
Photo
Cap the unnecessary holes on the outdoor unit (bottom) and
centralize the drainage when using a drain pipe.
Applicable Models
MXZ-8A140VA
PUHZ-RP100VKA/YKA
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP125VKA/YKA
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP140VKA/YKA
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-HRP71/100/125VHA2
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-P100/125/140/200/250
Specifications
PVC VP-25 or vinyl hose (ID: 25mm)
Drain pipe
Operating conditions No freezing allowed (Never to be used in cold
climates)
Material
Component
Dimensions
EPT rubber
Drain socket x 1, Drain cap x 5
Heat insulator x 3 (1 for liquid pipe, 1 large and
1 small insulator for gas pipe), Band x 8
Unit : mm
&TCKPUQEMGV
&TCKPECR
㱢㪋㪎
㱢㪊㪊
㱢㪊㪊
㪉㪌
㪋
㪋
㱢㪋㪎
㱢㪉㪌
㧔&TCKPRKRGEQPPGEVKQP㧕
E-201
PARTS
OPTIONAL
㱢㪉㪇
Drain Socket PAC-SG61DS-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Accessory
Make sure that the following parts are put in the package.
Drain socket࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮1 pcs
Drain cap࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮5 pcs
Insulation part (for liquid pipe)࡮࡮࡮࡮1 pc Insulation part (for gas pipe)࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮1 pc Band࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮࡮8 pcs
Small size
Large size
‫ڏ‬Prepare the adhesive in the field.
2. Installation method for drain unit
(1) Glue the drain socket Ԙ to the hole that is used to centralize the drainage among several
holes at the bottom of the unit with the glue (Prepare in the field).
(2) Glue the drain caps ԙ to close all the other unnecessary holes with the glue (Prepare in the field).
‫ޛ‬Note‫ ޜ‬Apply the glue securely, as the glue (Prepare in the field) will work as seal to prevent
water from leaking.
‫ޛ‬Note‫ ޜ‬Use the adhesive for the rubber and metal.
‫ޛ‬Recommended product‫ ޜ‬Supper X series made by CEMEDINE CO., Ltd.
(3) Insert a vinyl tube of which inner diameter 25 mm available commercially or a hard vinyl tube
VP25 to the drain socket Ԙ.
Ԙ
ԙ
Vinyl tube or hard vinyl tube (VP25)
3. Installation method for insulation parts
Install the insulation parts to stop valve of the outdoor unit.
̪The insulation parts should be installed after the tube has been connected to the unit.
̪Some units are provided with a check valve near stop valve. In this case,
cut the insulation parts Ԛ and ԛ so that they will fit the stop valve properly.
(1) Install the insulation part Ԛ with 2 holes to the liquid pipe side so that the holes
fit the valve caps and cover the stop valve entirely.
(2) Fix the insulation part Ԛ securely with bands Ԝ.
Install the other insulation part ԛ to the gas pipe side with the same procedure.
࡮Cut both ends of the insulation
part Ԝ for gas tube side for the
model RP71 or less.
Ԛ
Caps
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Tighten the bands
securely to completely
close the gap.
Stop valve
Ԝ
Cut the shaded portion
E-202
Cut the tip of the bands
after tightening.
Centralized Drain Pan
PAC-SG63DP-E
Descriptions
Photo
A drain pan for the drain water generated from the outdoor
unit.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP35
PUHZ-RP50
Specifications
Drain outlet size
R3/4 screw (20A)
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Color (Munsell)
Exterior
Surface treatment Acrylic resin coating
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
Material
sheet (t1.6)
Weight
6.3kg
Mounting bolt
M10 (or W3/8), length: 48mm or less
(locally prepared)
extrusion from drain pan's undersurface
Unit : mm
40
Drain socket 3/4B (20A),
external thread
370
40
20
35
279
300
330
Drain outlet
20
500
15
30 48
800
15
Dimensions
E-203
PARTS
OPTIONAL
Four 12x17 long
holes for installation bolts
Outdoor unit
(shown by line with two dots) 810
Front View of Unit
Centralized Drain Pan PAC-SG63DP-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Installation Method
(1) When installing on installation frame
1) The installation frame must have structure and strength that can sufficiently
support the outdoor unit and drain pan. Securely install the outdoor unit and drain
pan so that they cannot fall or drop as a result of earthquake, strong wind, etc.
2) The drain socket of drain pan is at the center in the longitudinal direction.
When constructing the installation frame, be careful that no part of the frame
interferes with the socket.
3) The drain pan is tightened with the outdoor unit. Punch approx. Ǿ13 holes in the
installation frame at pitches to install the outdoor unit.
4) Fix the frame, drain pan and outdoor unit together to join them firmly (at the 4 points).
The bolt length must be no more than 60 mm.
Outdoor unit
Drain pan
Frame
(to be constructed
at local site)
Double nuts
(to be procured at local site)
Washer
(to be procured at local site)
Drain socket
(must be at the rear
of outdoor unit)
Outdoor unit installation
support
Reinforce members
equally at the positions
on the left and right.
Height of
drain pan
Drain pan
Frame
(to be constructed at local site)
Reinforcing member at the center is unacceptable
since it will hit the drain socket.
30 18 or less
Passage
Installation
Drain pan
Frame
M10x50 bolt
(to be procured at local site)
(2) When installing on foundation
●Since concentrated drain disposal is necessary, make the foundation at least 150 mm high measured
from the ground as shown in the figure below.
If it is less than 150 mm, drain piping will not be possible because the drain socket protrudes 48 mm.
Foundation bolt
(M10, 48 mm long or less)
Front of outdoor unit
Rear of outdoor unit
Socket
length
2 Drain Piping
Foundation
48
150 or more
150 or more
Drain pan
Elbow
48
(1) When connecting steel pipe:
Vinyl pipe
Connect 3/4B internally threaded pipe.
(to be procured at
(2) When connecting vinyl pipe (soft):
local site)with Ǿ25
Joint for PVC pipe
internal dia.
(to be procured at
Use a Ǿ25 mm internal dia. pipe, and fix the connected
local site)
section with a hose band, etc.
3/4B
(20A)
Ǿ27.2
Adherence
Hose band
external thread
(3) When connecting PVC pipe (hard):
(to be procured at
(to be procured
Securely seal with seal tape.
local site)
Use VP-20 and connect with a joint for PVC pipe.
at local site)
PVC pipe (VP-20)
‫̪ ޓ‬In all cases, seal the socket threaded section securely
Lay the drain pipe so that it slants at least
with a seal tape, etc., and make sure that water does not leak.
1/100 downward.
3 Refrigerant Piping ̪For PAC-SG64DP-E only
●The refrigerant pipe can be laid in from four directions: front, right, rear and bottom. When laying, be sure to perform the following:
(1) Piping from the bottom:
Cut out the rubber bush to match the thickness of
refrigerant pipe insulator. Pass the refrigerant pie
through the rubber bush and fit it into the burring hole.
Seal it with adhesive that is equivalent to Cemedyne 366
(to be procured at local site) to prevent water leak.
(2)Piping from other directions:
Block the burring hole of the bottom piping section in
the drain pan with rubber bush. Seal it with adhesive
that is equivalent to Cemedyne 366 (to be procured
at local site) to prevent water leak.
Refrigerant pipe
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Cut out to match the
thickness of insulator
Rubber bush
Insulator
Rubber bush
Seal
Drain pan
Burring hole
E-204
Seal
Drain pan
Burring hole
Centralized Drain Pan
PAC-SG64DP-E
Descriptions
Photo
A drain pan for the drain water generated from the outdoor unit.
Applicable Models
MXZ-8A140VA
PUHZ-P100-250
PUHZ-HRP71/100/125
PUHZ-RP60
PUHZ-RP71
Specifications
Drain outlet size
Color (Munsell)
Exterior
Surface treatment
Material
Weight
Unit : mm
59
Four 12x17 long
holes for installation
bolts
Outdoor unit
(shown by line with two dots)
36.7
439.3
960
Front View of Unit
㧔
Drain socket 3/4B (20A),
external thread
Rubber bush
Refrigerant pipe bottom intake
(burring hole)
̪with rubber bush
˴Only is case of PAC-SG64DP-E
E-205
PARTS
In
side
㧔˴
㧾˴
23
㧕
87.2 23.7
328
370
31
419
45
330
e 㧕
sid 7˴.5
In ˴
2
㧾
OPTIONAL
Drain outlet
32
18
600
10
30 48
950
15
Dimensions
Mounting bolt
(locally prepared)
R3/4 screw (20A)
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Acrylic resin coating
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet (t1.6)
7.8kg
M10 (or W3/8), length: 60mm or
less extrusion from drain pan's
undersurface
Centralized Drain Pan PAC-SG64DP-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Installation Method
(1) When installing on installation frame
1) The installation frame must have structure and strength that can sufficiently
support the outdoor unit and drain pan. Securely install the outdoor unit and drain
pan so that they cannot fall or drop as a result of earthquake, strong wind, etc.
2) The drain socket of drain pan is at the center in the longitudinal direction.
When constructing the installation frame, be careful that no part of the frame
interferes with the socket.
3) The drain pan is tightened with the outdoor unit. Punch approx. Ǿ13 holes in the
installation frame at pitches to install the outdoor unit.
4) Fix the frame, drain pan and outdoor unit together to join them firmly (at the 4 points).
The bolt length must be no more than 60 mm.
Outdoor unit
Drain pan
Frame
(to be constructed
at local site)
Double nuts
(to be procured at local site)
Washer
(to be procured at local site)
Drain socket
(must be at the rear
of outdoor unit)
Outdoor unit installation
support
Reinforce members
equally at the positions
on the left and right.
Height of
drain pan
Drain pan
Frame
(to be constructed at local site)
Reinforcing member at the center is unacceptable
since it will hit the drain socket.
30 30 or less
Passage
Installation
Drain pan
Frame
M10x60 bolt
(to be procured at local site)
(2) When installing on foundation
●Since concentrated drain disposal is necessary, make the foundation at least 150 mm high measured
from the ground as shown in the figure below.
If it is less than 150 mm, drain piping will not be possible because the drain socket protrudes 48 mm.
Foundation bolt
(M10, 60 mm long or less)
Front of outdoor unit
Rear of outdoor unit
Socket
length
2 Drain Piping
Foundation
48
150 or more
150 or more
Drain pan
Elbow
48
(1) When connecting steel pipe:
Vinyl pipe
Connect 3/4B internally threaded pipe.
(to be procured at
(2) When connecting vinyl pipe (soft):
local site)with Ǿ25
Joint for PVC pipe
internal dia.
(to be procured at
Use a Ǿ25 mm internal dia. pipe, and fix the connected
local site)
section with a hose band, etc.
3/4B
(20A)
Ǿ27.2
Adherence
Hose band
external thread
(3) When connecting PVC pipe (hard):
(to be procured at
(to be procured
Securely seal with seal tape.
local site)
Use VP-20 and connect with a joint for PVC pipe.
at local site)
PVC pipe (VP-20)
‫̪ ޓ‬In all cases, seal the socket threaded section securely
Lay the drain pipe so that it slants at least
with a seal tape, etc., and make sure that water does not leak.
1/100 downward.
3 Refrigerant Piping ̪For PAC-SG64DP-E only
●The refrigerant pipe can be laid in from four directions: front, right, rear and bottom. When laying, be sure to perform the following:
(1) Piping from the bottom:
Cut out the rubber bush to match the thickness of
refrigerant pipe insulator. Pass the refrigerant pie
through the rubber bush and fit it into the burring hole.
Seal it with adhesive that is equivalent to Cemedyne 366
(to be procured at local site) to prevent water leak.
(2)Piping from other directions:
Block the burring hole of the bottom piping section in
the drain pan with rubber bush. Seal it with adhesive
that is equivalent to Cemedyne 366 (to be procured
at local site) to prevent water leak.
Refrigerant pipe
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Cut out to match the
thickness of insulator
Rubber bush
Insulator
Rubber bush
Seal
Drain pan
Burring hole
E-206
Seal
Drain pan
Burring hole
Centralized Drain Pan
PAC-SH97DP-E
Descriptions
Photo
A drain pan for the drain water generated from the outdoor unit.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-RP KA
Specifications
Drain outlet size
Color (Munsell)
Exterior
Surface treatment
Alloy hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel
sheet (t1.6)
8.8kg
M10 (or W3/8), length: 60mm or
less extrusion from drain pan's
undersurface
Material
Weight
Mounting bolt
(locally prepared)
Dimensions
R3/4 screw (20A)
Ivory (3.0Y 7.8/1.1)
Acrylic resin coating
Unit : mm
Air intake side
30 48
27.5
)
32
18
Drain outlet
10
600
419
328
(23.7)
370
330
insid
e(R
Drain socket
3/4B(20A)
external thread
Rubber bush
(36.7)
489.3
1060
45
Refrigerant pipe bottom intake(burring hole)
with rubber bush
Air outlet side
990
E-207
PARTS
Space for drain piping work Min.150mm
OPTIONAL
Outdoor unit
(shown by line with 2dots)
15
Holes for installation
4-12×17oval hole
(87.2)
31
59
inside(R23)
Centralized Drain Pan PAC-SH97DP-E
How to Use / How to Install
1 Installation Method
(1) When installing on installation frame
1) The installation frame must have structure and strength that can sufficiently
support the outdoor unit and drain pan. Securely install the outdoor unit and drain
pan so that they cannot fall or drop as a result of earthquake, strong wind, etc.
2) The drain socket of drain pan is at the center in the longitudinal direction.
When constructing the installation frame, be careful that no part of the frame
interferes with the socket.
3) The drain pan is tightened with the outdoor unit. Punch approx. Ǿ13 holes in the
installation frame at pitches to install the outdoor unit.
4) Fix the frame, drain pan and outdoor unit together to join them firmly (at the 4 points).
The bolt length must be no more than 60 mm.
Outdoor unit
Drain pan
Frame
(to be constructed
at local site)
Double nuts
(to be procured at local site)
Washer
(to be procured at local site)
Drain socket
(must be at the rear
of outdoor unit)
Outdoor unit installation
support
Reinforce members
equally at the positions
on the left and right.
Height of
drain pan
Drain pan
Frame
(to be constructed at local site)
Reinforcing member at the center is unacceptable
since it will hit the drain socket.
30 30 or less
Passage
Installation
Drain pan
Frame
M10(or W 3/8) x60 bolt
(to be procured at local site)
(2) When installing on foundation
●Since concentrated drain disposal is necessary, make the foundation at least 150 mm high measured
from the ground as shown in the figure below.
If it is less than 150 mm, drain piping will not be possible because the drain socket protrudes 48 mm.
Foundation bolt
M10(or W3/8) protrusion length: 60 mm or less
Front of outdoor unit
Rear of outdoor unit
Socket
length
2 Drain Piping
Foundation
48
150 or more
150 or more
Drain pan
Elbow
48
(1) When connecting steel pipe:
Vinyl pipe
Connect 3/4B internally threaded pipe.
(to be procured at
(2) When connecting vinyl pipe (soft):
local site)with Ǿ25
Joint for PVC pipe
internal dia.
(to be procured at
Use a Ǿ25 mm internal dia. pipe, and fix the connected
local site)
section with a hose band, etc.
3/4B
(20A)
Ǿ27.2
Adherence
Hose band
external thread
(3) When connecting PVC pipe (hard):
(to be procured at
(to be procured
Securely seal with seal tape.
local site)
Use VP-20 and connect with a joint for PVC pipe.
at local site)
PVC pipe (VP-20)
‫̪ ޓ‬In all cases, seal the socket threaded section securely
Lay the drain pipe so that it slants at least
with a seal tape, etc., and make sure that water does not leak.
1/100 downward.
3 Refrigerant Piping
●The refrigerant pipe can be laid in from four directions: front, right, rear and bottom. When laying, be sure to perform the following:
(1) Piping from the bottom:
Cut out the rubber bush to match the thickness of
refrigerant pipe insulator. Pass the refrigerant pie
through the rubber bush and fit it into the burring hole.
Seal it with adhesive that is equivalent to Cemedyne 366
(to be procured at local site) to prevent water leak.
(2)Piping from other directions:
Block the burring hole of the bottom piping section in
the drain pan with rubber bush. Seal it with adhesive
that is equivalent to Cemedyne 366 (to be procured
at local site) to prevent water leak.
Refrigerant pipe
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Cut out to match the
thickness of insulator
Rubber bush
Insulator
Rubber bush
Seal
Drain pan
Burring hole
E-208
Seal
Drain pan
Burring hole
M-NET Converter
PAC-SF81MA-E
Model change from PAC-SF80MA-E
Descriptions
Photo
A-control Mr. SLIM models can be connected to "M-NET"
through optional M-NET converter so that they can be
monitored / controlled effictively and meticulously.
Applicable Models
All PU(H)-P
All PUHZ-RP
All PUHZ-P outdoor Units (A-control)
All PUHZ-HRP
Specifications
Supplied from control board
0.6W (at 5V DC, 12V DC)
Mounted inside the electrical utility box of outdoor
Operating conditions unit. (Tempreture : -20 to 60 , humidity : 90% or
less (no condensation))
Power
Power consumption
Dimensions
Weight
0.3kg
Unit : mm
CN5
(Connect to outdoor controller board)
CN2M(M-NET)
LED5
LED4 LED3 LED2
1 2
12345
㪪㪮㪈
123
1234
50
LED1
140
SW11(M-NET Address<1s digit>)
E-209
PARTS
SW12(M-NET Address<10s digit>)
OPTIONAL
CND
(Connect to outdoor controller board)
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR A-M CONVERTER
This manual is written only for the models
A:
B:
C:
D:
PUHZ-RP1.6/2VHA
PUHZ-RP35/50VHA type
PUZ-A18NHA, PUY-A12/18NHA
PUHZ-RP2.5∼6VHA(-A)
PUHZ-(H)(R)P60∼140VHA type
PUZ-A24∼42NHA, PUY-A24∼42NHA
PUHZ-RP100∼140VKA
PU(H)-P1∼4VGA(A), P25∼100VGAA
PU(H)-P1.6∼6YGA(A), P35∼140YGAA
PUH-P8/10YE, P8/10MYA, P200/250MYA
E:
F:
PUHZ-RP4∼6YHA
PUHZ-(H)RP100∼140YHA type
PUHZ-RP100∼140YKA
PUHZ-RP8/10YHA(-A), RP200/250YHA(-A)
PUHZ-RP200/250YHA1(-A)
G:
PU(H)-P71/100VHA, PU(H)-P71∼140YHA
H:
PUHZ-P200/250YHA(3), PUHZ-RP200/250YHA2, PUHZ-RP200/250YKA
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
●Before starting installation, read the "Safety Precautions" described below.
●The following precautions must be observed as it describes the serious matters
●The
for safety.
safety precautions are described with the degree of danger.
WARNING
When you handle wrong, it can lead to death or serious injury.
CAUTION
When you handle wrong, it can lead to injury or damage to building and furniture.
●After
installation, make test operation and confirm that it works properly, and explain the safety precautions, operation method,
and maintenance to your customers.
Tell your customers to keep this installation manual together with operation manual with them, and when they give or sell this
machine to other person put this installation manual and operation manual with it.
WARNING
The installation must be done by dealer or qualified person.
●If
the customers do the installtion by themselves and it is not
perfectly installed it can cause water leak, electric shock, or fire.
The wiring must be securely done by using proper cable. The wires should
be connected to the terminals not to have external force of the cable.
●Unperfect
connections can cause heat or fire.
The termial cover (panel) of the unit must be installed securely.
The installation must be done in accordance with this manual.
●If
the installation is not perfectly done, it can cause water leak,
electric shock, or fire.
Never try any modification.
●For
repair, ask your dealer.
If the machine is modified or repaired unperfectly, it can cause water
leak, electric shock, or fire.
●Unperfect
installation can cause fire or electric shock by dust or water.
The electric installation must be done by qualified person in accordance
with this installation manual. Use the separate circuit only for this machine
and use rated voltage and circuit breaker.
●If
the electric circuit power is not sufficient or the wiring is not
properly done, it can cause electric shock or fire.
Never move or reinstall the machine by the customers.
the installation is not perfectly done, it can cause water leak,
electric shock, or fire. Ask your dealer or qualified person.
●If
Before electric wiring
CAUTION
Put ground wire.
Install a circuit breaker depending upon the location.
●Without
a circuit breaker, it can cause electric shock.
●Never
ground to gas pipe, water pipe, lightning conductor, or
telephone ground wire.
Unperfrect ground can cause short-circuit.
Use standard wires which meet current capacity.
●Otherwise,
it can cause short-circuit, heat, or fire.
Use proper fuses
Wires must not have tension.
●It
●If
you use larger size fuses or neelde wire, it can cause failure or fire.
can cause snipping, heat, or fire.
Before test operation
CAUTION
Turn the power on 12 hours or more before operation.
●If
you start operation as soon as the power on, it can cause failure.
Never turn the power off during season.
Never operate the switches with your hand wet.
●It
can cause electric shock.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Never touch refrigerant pipes while the machine running.
Never operate the machine without panel or guard off.
●It
can cause serious injury being caught by rotating part or burn or
electric shock by high voltage part.
Never operate the machine without air filter off.
●It
E-210
can cause failure by dust.
●The
refrigerant pipes becomes high and low temperature while the
machine running. If you touch the pipes by hand, it can cause
chilblain or burn.
Never turn the power off as soon as the machine stops.
●Wait
for 5 minutes or more. It can cause water leak or failure.
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
1. Parts List
ͳ
&GUETKRVKQP
(KIWTG
Ԙ
/0'6DQCTF
YKVJKPUWNCVKQP
UJGGVUCPF
UWRRQTVU
ԙ
2NCVG
(QTOQWPVKPI
EKTEWKVDQCTF
Ԛ
+PUWNCVKQPUJGGVU
5/.
3V[
#
$
٤
٤
٤
5
٤
/
/
٤
.
.
٤
5
#RRNKECDNGOQFGNU
'
(
%
&
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
)
*
٤
٤
٤
٤
ԛ
6GTOKPCNDCUG
Ԝ
5ETGY
/˜
٤
㧔㧕
ԝ
6GTOKPCNDNQEM
/0'6
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
Ԟ
6GTOKPCNUETGY
/Z
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
ԟ
.CDGN
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
%'064#.+<'&%10641.
/0'6
㧭
㧮
㧿
0QVG
٤
٤
٤
㧔㧕 㧔㧕 㧔㧕
㧮㧳㧣㧥㧴㧣㧠㧠㧴㧜㧞
Wire Marking : INV type Always
%QNQT4GF
Ԡ
.GCFYKTG#
YKTGU
٤
.GPIVJOO
Wire Marking : NON-INV
%QNQT9JKVG
ԡ
.GCFYKTG$
YKTGU
٤
٤
Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model
match. If used incorrectly, parts
could be damaged.
٤
.GPIVJOO
Ԣ
make sure that the markings and
the applicable model match.
If used incorrectly, parts could be
damaged.
.GCFYKTG%
YKTGU
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
.GPIVJOO
ԣ
.GCFYKTG&
YKTGU
.GPIVJOO
ԥ
2WNNVKIJV
Ԧ
2NCVG
(QTOQWPVKPI
EKTEWKVDQCTF
GCEJ
㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕㧔٤㧕
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
٤
E-211
PARTS
)TQWPFYKTGCPF
UETGY
/˜
OPTIONAL
Ԥ
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure 【Applicable model : Group A】
●To protect the wires connected to M-NET board from the edges of
sheet-metal component, paste the insulation on the edge surface of panel
sheet-metal before proceeding with the following work.
1 Affix insulation sheets and ③ to the
backside of the flange surface on the
top of the side panel.
③Insulation sheet
1
2 Starting from the bottom, mount
③Insulation sheet
lnsulation Sheet ③ to the “L” bend
section on the back of the noise filter
mounting panel.
3 Position the chamfered section of Plate
② so that it faces the fan side (the left
side of the drawing) and mount it using
Screw ⑤.
4 As shown in the illustration, position
(Top view of Electric box)
CN2M
CN5
SW12 SW11
CND
①M-NET board
Control board
Chamfered section
2 3
4
③Insulation sheet
⑤Screw
②Plate
Terminal block
M-NET board ① (insulation sheet, with
support) on the four corners of Plate ②
so that the DIP switches (SW11, SW12)
are on the terminal block side and then
mount.
※Push it firmly until you hear it “click”
5 Use terminal screw ⑦ to secure terminal
block ⑥
※Terminal block ⑥ has a round boss
for positioning:Fit the round boss into
the positioning hole in steel-plate.
6 Paste label ⑧
7 Use lead wire-A⑨ to connect CN5 of
Power board
M-NET board ① connection and
CNMNT of outdoor control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:INV type, Connector
color:Red Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model
match. If used incorrectly, parts could
be damaged.
Noise filter
(When viewed from the side of Electric box)
8 Use lead wire-C ⑪ to connect CND of
Terminal block (M-NET)
5
L
N
A
B
S
BG79H744H02
6
CENTRALIZED CONTROL(M-NET)
Noise filter
S1 S2 S3
Terminal block
M-NET board ① connection and
CNVMNT of outdoor control board.
9 Use lead wire-D ⑫ to connect CN2M of
M-NET board ① connection and
terminals A and B of terminal block ⑥
Polarity is not a concern.
※Connect the wire firmly making sure
that the screws on terminal block are
not loose.
10 The lead wires should be tied together
with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
It progresses to the xx page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
E-212
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure 【Applicable model : Group B】
●To protect the wires connected to M-NET board from the edges of
sheet-metal component, paste the insulation on the edge surface of panel
sheet-metal before proceeding with the following work.
1 Pate insulation sheet ③ on sheet-metal
so that it completely envelops the edge
surface of sheet-metal.
1 Paste insulation sheet ③ on sheet-metal so that it
completely envelops the edge surface of sheet-metal.
Install M-NET board ① (with insulation
2 sheets and supports) on the side of
(When viewed from the side of Electric box)
Electric box so that the rotary switch
faces up (at the four points indicated by
arrows).
※Push it firmly until you hear it
“click”.
SW12 SW11
①M-NET board
CND
CN2M
CN5
Use terminal screw ⑦ to secure terminal
3 block⑥
※Terminal block⑥ has a round boss for
positioning:Fit the round boss into the
positioning hole in steel-plate.
2
4
Paste label ⑧ under terminal block ⑥
Use lead wire-A ⑨ to connect CN5 of
5 M-NET board ① connection and
CNMNT of outdoor control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:INV type, Connector
color:Red Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model
match. If used incorrectly, parts could
be damaged.
Control board
Use lead wire-C ⑪ to connect CND of
6 M-NET board ① connection and
CNVMNT of outdoor control board.
Use lead wire-D ⑫ to connect CN2M of
7 M-NET board ① connection and
(When viewed from the side of Electric parts box)
terminals A and B of terminal block ⑥
Polarity is not a concern.
※Connect the wire firmly making sure
that the screws on terminal block are
not loose.
N
S1 S2 S3
3
CENTRALIZED CONTROL(M-NET)
A
B
S
BG79H744H02
4
The lead wires should be tied together
8 with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
It progresses to the page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
E-213
PARTS
L
OPTIONAL
7
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure【Applicable model : Group C】
1 Install the M-NET board ① so that the
SW12 SW11
1
①M-NET board
Address switches
(SW11, SW12) come front.
※Put it securely until it sounds click.
2 Install the Terminal block (M-NET) ⑥ on
the Terminal base ④.
※The Terminal base ④ has round boss
for positioning.
Match the round boss to the holes of
the Terminal base ④.
3 Put the Label ⑧ on the Terminal base ④
.
※Not to close the Hole for M-NET
ground.
Control board
4 Install the Terminal base ④ on the
bottom inside of the electric box.
Terminal block
4
⑤Screw
(M4×8)
A B S
Mounting hole
2
Position hole
⑦Screw (M3×20)
⑥Terminal block (M-NET)
Hole for M-NET ④Terminal base
ground
3
A
M-NET)
NTROL(
LIZED CO
CENTRA
B
S
⑧Label
Hole for M-NET ground
5 Connection of M-NET board (CN5) and Control board (CNMNT)
⑩Lead wire-B
Right side of
electric box
5 Connect the lead wire-B ⑩ to both the
connector CN5 on the M-NET board ①
and the connector CNMNT on the
control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:NON-INV, Connector
color:White Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model match.
If used incorrectly, parts could be
damaged.
6 Connect the lead wire-C ⑪ to both the
connector CND on the M-NET board ①
and the connector CNVMNT on the
control board.
CNVMNTCNMNT
7 Connect the lead wire-D ⑫ to both the
CN5
Control board
①M-NET
board
CN2M
CND
Terminal block
CENTRALIZED CONTROL(M-NET)
A
B
8 The lead wires should be tied together
with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
S
OPTIONAL
PARTS
⑫Lead wire-D
7 Connection of M-NET board (CN2M) and
Terminal block (Terminals A & B)
⑪Lead wire-C
6 Connection of M-NET board (CND) and
Control board (CNVMVT)
E-214
connector CN2M on the M-NET board
① and the terminals A & B on the
terminal block (M-NET) ⑥.
It progresses to the xx page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure【Applicable model : Group D】
1
1 Install the M-NET board ① so that the
①M-NET board
(SW11, SW12) come front.
※Put it securely until it sounds click.
SW12 SW11
Address switches
2 Install the Terminal block (M-NET) ⑥ on
the base of the electric box.
3 Put the Label ⑧ on the base of the
electric box.
Control board
2 Mounting hole
⑦Screw (M3×20)
Position hole
Terminal
block
Terminal
block
⑥Terminal block (M-NET)
3
Hole for M-NET ground
A
①M-NET board
B
S
⑧Label
⑫Lead wire-D
6 Connection of
CND
CN2M
M-NET board (CN2M)
and Terminal block
(Terminals A & B)
CN5
4 Connect the lead wire-B ⑩ to both the
connector CN5 on the M-NET board ①
and the connector CNMNT on the
control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:NON-INV, Connector
color:White Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model match.
If used incorrectly, parts could be
damaged.
5 Connect the lead wire-C ⑪ to both the
connector CND on the M-NET board ①
and the connector CNVMNT on the
control board.
6 Connect the lead wire-D ⑫ to both the
CNVMNT
⑩Lead wire-B
CNMNT
4 Connection of
M-NET board (CN5)
and Control board
(CNMNT)
Control board
⑪Lead wire-C
connector CN2M on the M-NET board
① and the terminals A & B on the
terminal block (M-NET) ⑥.
7 The lead wires should be tied together
with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
5 Connection of
Terminal
block
A
B
S
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
E-215
PARTS
Terminal
block
It progresses to the xx page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
OPTIONAL
M-NET board (CND)
and Control board
(CNVMNT)
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure【Applicable model : Group E】
Control board
1 Attach the Plate 2 ⑮, using two screws
⑤.
2 Install M-NET board ① (with insulation
sheets and supports) on the Plate2 ⑮ .
※Push it firmly until you hear it“click”.
3 Use terminal screw ⑦ to secure terminal
block⑥
※Terminal block⑥ has a round boss for
positioning:Fit the round boss into the
positioning hole in steel-plate.
4 Paste label ⑧
5 Use lead wire-A ⑨ to connect CN5 of
CENTRALIZED CONTROL(M-NET)
A
B
S
B G79H744H02
⑧Label
4
M-NET board ① connection and
CNMNT of outdoor control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:INV type, Connector
color:Red Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model
match. If used incorrectly, parts could
be damaged.
⑬Ground wire
6 Use lead wire-C ⑪ to connect CND of
3
⑦Terminal screw
⑥Terminal block
M-NET board ① connection and
CNVMNT of outdoor control board.
7 Use lead wire-D ⑫ to connect CN2M of
1
⑤Screws
⑮Plate2
8 The lead wires should be tied together
with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
2
CN2M
CND
CN5
It progresses to the xx page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
SW12 SW11
①M-NET board
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-216
M-NET board ① connection and
terminals A and B of terminal block ⑥
Polarity is not a concern.
※Connect the wire firmly making sure
that the screws on terminal block are
not loose.
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure【Applicable model : Group F】
(When viewed from the side of electrical parts box)
1 Install M-NET board ① (with insulation
sheets and supports) on the side of
electric box .
At the four point indicated by arrows.
※Push it firmly until you hear it“click”.
Control board
2 Use terminal screw ⑦ to secure terminal
1
block⑥
※Terminal block⑥ has a round boss for
positioning:Fit the round boss into the
positioning hole in steel-plate.
3
Paste label ⑧ under terminal block ⑥
4
CN2M
CND
CN5
SW12 SW11
L3
N
S1
S2
S3
①M-NET board
Use lead wire-D ⑫ to connect CN2M of
M-NET board ① connection and
terminals A and B of terminal block ⑥
Polarity is not a concern.
※Connect the wire firmly making sure
that the screws on terminal block are
not loose.
7
2
6
L1
3
CENTRALIZED CONTROL(M-NET)
A
B
Use lead wire-C ⑪ to connect CND of
M-NET board ① connection and
6 CNVMNT of outdoor control board.
S
B G79H744H02
The lead wires should be tied together
with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
It progresses to the xx page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
E-217
PARTS
L2
OPTIONAL
L1
Use lead wire-A ⑨ to connect CN5 of
M-NET board ① connection and
CNMNT of outdoor control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:INV type, Connector
color:Red
Always make sure that the markings
and the applicable model match. If
used incorrectly, parts could be
5 damaged.
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
2. Installation procedure 【Applicable model : Group G】
1 The M-NET board ① is installed in the
bottom of electric box so that the DIP
switches (SW11,SW12) come front.
※Push it firmly until you hear it
“click”.
CN5
CN2M
SW12 SW11
CND
1
①M-NET board
(Top view of Electric box without top panel)
2
CN2M
CND
CN5
SW12 SW11
3
4
Use terminal screw ⑦ to secure terminal
block⑥
※Terminal block⑥ has a round boss for
positioning:Fit the round boss into the
positioning hole in steel-plate.
Paste label ⑧ under terminal block ⑥
Use lead wire-B ⑩ to connect CN5 of
M-NET board ① connection and
CNMNT of outdoor control board.
※Caution
Wire Marking:NON-INV, Connector
color:White Always make sure that the
markings and the applicable model
5 match. If used incorrectly, parts could
be damaged.
(Front view of Electric box)
Use lead wire-C ⑪ to connect CND of
6 M-NET board ① connection and
CNVMNT of outdoor control board.
Control board
2
⑥Terminal block
(M-NET)
Use lead wire-D ⑫ to connect CN2M of
M-NET board ① connection and
terminals A and B of terminal block ⑥
Polarity is not a concern.
※Connect the wire firmly making sure
that the screws on terminal block are
7
not loose.
The lead wires should be tied together
with the other lead wires with
the pull tight ⑭ not to loose.
Wiring length is adjusted according to
apparatus.
3
CENTRALIZED CONTROL(M-NET)
A
B
S
It progresses to the xx page
“3.Wiring method for M-NET”
B G79H744H02
Note1:Use ground wire and screw ⑬ as
required to connect the shield of
M-NET transmission line to the unit.
Note2:Take great care that no lead wire is
caught on anything when instaling
panels.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-218
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
E-219
PARTS
OPTIONAL
2. Installation procedure 【Applicable model : Group H】
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
3. Wiring method for M-NET
(1) Attention
① Outside of the unit, the wires for transmission (called for transmit wires later) should keep away (5 cm
or more) from power cable not to receive electric noise. (Never put the transmit wires and power cable
in the same cable pipe.)
② Never supply voltage 220V-240V to the terminals (TB7) for transmission. If the voltage is supplied, it
can break the electronic parts on the A-M CONVERTER board.
③ Use the shielded cable (CVVS, CPEVS) of 1.25mm square thickness with 2 wires for the transmission
cable. Never use transmit wires of different system with a cable which contains multi wires. The
communication of transmit signals will not work properly and it can cause wrong operation.
Group remote
controller
Refrigerant address
00
M-NET address
01
Power supply unit
for transmit cable
Slim A control
( remote control )
Refrigerant address
00
M-NET address
02
Slim A control
( remote control )
Refrigerant address
00
M-NET address
03
Slim A control
( remote control )
Between the outdoor units, it is OK that only M-NET wiring (2 wires, no polarity) is done.
(2) M-NET address setting
Make M-NET setting and refrigerant address setting on only outdoor unit.
There is no address settings for outdoor unit and remote controller like City Multi system.
The M-NET address setting for taking into centralized control system should be done only to the
outdoor unit.
The address set number should be 1-50 same as for City Multi indoor unit and make set in order of
number for the same group.
A control slim
City Multi (M-NET)
Indoor unit
1∼50
51∼100
101∼150
〈 Example 〉
M-NET address No.
23
9 01
9 01
90
9 01
23
456
23
456
23
9 01
23
9 01
123
456
50
456
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-220
SW12
(2nd digit)
2
456
Switch
setting
SW11
(1st digit)
1
45
The setting should be done by rotary switches SW11 for
one figure and SW12 for double figures on A-M CONVERTER
of the outdoor unit. (Factory settings are all zero.)
78
201∼250
78
Group remote controller
78
201∼250
678
System controller
78
Remote controller
78
Outdoor unit
1∼50
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
(3) Refrigerant address setting
In case that the A control Slim is set for group between different refrigerant (when multiple refrigerant
system is set in one group), it is necessary to make refrigerant address setting besides the wiring for
remote controller (TB5) between the indoor untis.
In case that the group setting is not done, be sure to leave the refrigerant address set for 00.
The refrigerant address is set by dip switch SW1 (3-6) on the outdoor controller of the outdoor unit.
(Factory settings are all OFF ・・・・・Refrigerant address 00).
(SW1)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
ON
Refrigerant
address
1 2 3 4 5 6
8
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
9
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
11
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
5
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
12
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
13
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
14
1 2 3 4 5 6
15
(4) Limitation for address settings
In case of group operation, the M-NET address settings and the refrigerant address settings should be
done with the procedure above.
However, make the minimum M-NET address settings in the group for the outdoor unit which has the
refrigerant address 00.
GROUP A
Group remote
controller
Refrigerant address
00
M-NET address
01
Power supply unit
for transmit cable
GROUP B
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 02
GROUP C
Refrigerant address
00
M-NET address
04
Refrigerant
address 01
M-NET
address 03
TB5
Slim A control
remote control
※It does not matter if the refrigerant address settings are same with the different group.
GROUP A
Group remote
controller
Power supply unit
for transmit cable
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 01
GROUP B
Refrigerant
address 01
M-NET
address 02
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 04
Refrigerant
address 01
M-NET
address 03
Refrigerant
address 02
M-NET
address 05
TB5
OPTIONAL
※It is not good with the above setting in the group B because the outdoor unit which has the refrigerant
address 00 does not have the minimum M-NET address 3 in the group. Make the outdoor unit of the
refrigerant address set with the minimum address in the group like the group A.
E-221
PARTS
Slim A control
remote control
M-NET Converter PAC-SF81MA-E
Attention for A control Slim M-NET connection
Pay attention to the next points for wiring of shielded wires.
CAUTION
The shielded wires of M-NET transmission should be
connected with the ground wire at any only one place of
the unit to be connected.
It can cause the transmission error due to noise.
Outdoor unit digital LED display reads "Ed" error.
Centralized control remote controller reads "0403" error.
×Bad example (Multiple ground of shielded wire)
○Good example (One spot ground of shielded wire)
Centralized
control remote
controller
Power supply
unit
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
M-NET transmit wire
Centralized
control remote
controller
Power supply
unit
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
M-NET transmit wire
○Good example (One spot ground of shielded wire)
Centralized
control remote
controller
Power supply
unit
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
OPTIONAL
PARTS
M-NET transmit wire
※In case that the outdoor unit is grounded, connect the ground
wire supplied as accessory to the S terminal (secondary)
of M-NET terminal block and M-NET Ground terminal inside of
electric box with using screws supplied.
E-222
Ground wire
(accessory)
M-NET
terminal block
A
B
S
Transmit Shielded
wire
wire
※
Outdoor unit
corresponds
to M-NET
Control / Service Tool
PAC-SK52ST
Descriptions
Photo
This item is used to display operation and self-diagnosis state.
Applicable Models
All PUHZ-HRP
All PU(H)-P
TO
T
OB
BE
E CONFIRMED
CONFIRMED
All PUHZ-RP outdoor Units (A-control)
All PUHZ-P
Specifications
5V DC (supplied from outdoor unit control board)
-20 to 60, Humidity: 90%RH or less (no
condensation)
External dimensions 69 (W) x 91 (H) x 27 (D) (mm), excluding lead
wires
Weight
0.05kg
Power
Temperature
How to Use / How to Install
● Notes on Use
• Before installing / removing a control / service tool, nake sure that the main power to this unit is turned OFF.
• The connector for control / service tool has a lock. Connection / removal of the connector must be dine with the locking lever
pressed.
● How to Use
E-223
PARTS
OPTIONAL
1. Connect the control / servide tool connector to the [CNM] connector on the outdoor unit control board.
2. Operating the control / service tool's DIP switch "SW2" causes "LED1" to display the operation state and inspection code
description using 2-digit value and symbols. "SW2" setting varies with the unit to be connected. For details of the display
content, refer to the appropriate service handbook.
3. After the control / service tool has been used, remove it from the outdoor unit control board.
Remote On/Off Input Signal Adaptor
PAC-SC36NA
Descriptions
Photo
·This adapter connects the relay circuit and the outdoor unit
control board to enable low noise mode or demand function
using external input.
·All parts besides the wires for connection (timer,switch,relay,
etc.) must be procured locally.
Applicable Models
PUHZ-HRP·HA2
PU(H)-P·HA
PUHZ-RP·HA4/KA
MXZ-8A140VA
PUHZ-P·HA3
Specifications
Dimensions
Function
Inputs signal of low noise mode or demand
function to the outdoor unit control board.
Input signal
No-voltage contact (ON/OFF level signal)
Connector
3P(connector to CNDM,CN3D,CN3S on outdoor
unit control board)
Cable type
3-wire cable,for extension:sheathed vinyl cord
or cable (0.5 to 1.25mm²)
Cable length
3m (max.10m when extended locally)
Unit : mm
How to Use / How to Install
CNDM
1
Orange
X
X
Low noise mode (on-site modification) (Fig. 1)
Brown
SW1
Red
Fig. 1
3
Outdoor unit control board
Max. 10 m
Power supply for relay
Circuit diagram example (low noise mode)
On-site arrangement
External input adapter (PAC-SC36NA)
X: Relay
PUHZ-HRP/P type, MXZ-8A140VA
Fig. 2
Orange
Brown
~
SW2
Y
Red
Y
CNDM
PUHZ-RP·HA4/KA
OPTIONAL
PARTS
Y
X
SW2
SW3
Orange
X
CNDM
1
Brown
Red
Y
3
Fig. 3
By performing the following modification, operation noise of the outdoor unit can be
reduced by about 3-4 dB.
The low noise mode will be activated when a commercially available timer or the
contact input of an ON/OFF switch is added to the CNDM connector (option) on the
control board of the outdoor unit.
• The ability varies according to the outdoor temperature and conditions, etc.
Complete the circuit as shown when using the external input adapter (PACSC36NA). (Option)
SW1 ON: Low noise mode
SW1 OFF: Normal operation
Demand function (on-site modification) (Fig. 2)(Fig. 3)
By performing the following modification, energy consumption can be reduced to 0
–100% of the normal consumption.
The demand function will be activated when a commercially available timer or the
contact input of an ON/OFF switch is added to the CNDM connector (option) on the
control board of the outdoor unit.
Complete the circuit as shown when using the external input adapter (PACSC36NA). (Option)
By setting SW7-1 (and SW7-2) on the control board of the outdoor unit, the energy
consumption (compared to the normal consumption) can be limited as shown
below.
PUHZ-HRP/P type
SW7-1
SW7-2
Energy consumption (SW2 ON)
OFF
OFF
0% (Stop)
ON
OFF
50%
OFF
ON
75%
MXZ-8A140VA
SW7-1
Power consumption when SW2 is on
OFF
0% (Forced compressor stop)
ON
50%
Circuit diagram example (Demand function) External input adapter (PAC-SC36NA) PUHZ-RP·HA4/KA
On-site arrangement
Outdoor unit control board
SW3
SW7-1 SW2
X, Y: Relay
Max. 10 m
OFF
OFF
Power supply for relay
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
E-224
Energy consumption
100%
75%
50%
0%(Stop)
STEP Interface
PAC-IF010/011B/012B-E
Descriptions
Photo
With Step Interface, local units can be connected with P series
heat pump outdoor units.
Applicable Models
PAC-IF010-E
PAC-IF011B-E
Model
Applicable Model
PAC-IF012B-E
PUHZ-HRP·HA2
PUHZ-HRP·HA2
PUHZ-HRP·HA4/KA
PUHZ-HRP·HA4/KA
PUHZ-P·HA3
PUHZ-P·HA3
PUH-P·HA
PAC-IF011B/012B-E
Specifications
Model
Type
Power supply
PCB only (10set)
220-240V AC,50Hz
PAC-IF010-E
PAC-IF011B-E
Cased
PAC-IF012B-E
Cased
220-240V AC,50Hz
220-240V AC,50Hz
—
Target temp.(TH1)
Pipe temp./Liquid (TH2)
Target temp.(TH1)
Pipe temp./Liquid (TH2)
Pipe temp./Cond./eva (TH2)
Thermistor
Dimensions
Unit : mm
[PAC-IF011B-E, PAC-IF012B-E]
336
313
69
Ø5
Ø12
22
(11.5)
TB61
10
11.5
2-HOLES
(FOR
INSTALLATION)
200
278
TB62
TB141
TB6
OPTIONAL
2-Ø5 HOLES
(FOR
INSTALLATION)
3-ELECTRIC WIRE INLET
E-225
PARTS
TB142
STEP Interface PAC-IF011B/012B-E
How to Use / How to Install
[PAC-IF011B-E, PAC-IF012B-E]
2. Installing the interface unit
2.1. Check the parts (Fig. 2-1)
IF011
The interface unit should be supplied with the following parts.
Part Name
Interface unit
IF011
1
IF012
1
2
3
Thermistor
2.2. Choosing the interface unit installation location
• Do not install the interface unit in outdoor location as it is designed for indoor
installation only. (The interface board and casing are not waterproof.)
• Avoid locations where the unit is exposed to direct sunlight or other sources of
heat.
• Select a location where easy wiring access to the power source is available.
• Avoid locations where combustible gases may leak, be produced, flow, or accumulate.
• Select a level location that can bear the weight and vibration of the unit.
• Avoid locations where the unit is exposed to oil, steam, or sulfuric gas.
IF012
2.3. Installing the interface unit (Fig. 2-2, Photo.2-1)
1. Remove 2 screws from interface unit and remove the cover.
2. Install the 4 screws (locally supplied) in 4 holes.
Screw Cover
Hole for installation
Fig. 2-1
Unit:mm
336
313
11.5
(11.5)
22
5
TB61
10
12
200
278
TB62
TB142
TB141
3-ELECTRIC WIRE INLET
When installed on a wall: Lower side
OPTIONAL
PARTS
E-226
Photo.2-1
Fig.2-2
TB6
69
STEP Interface PAC-IF011B/012B-E
3. Electrical work
3.1. Interface unit (Photo. 3-1)
1. Remove the cover.
2. Wire the power cable and control cable separately through the respective wiring
inlets given in the photo.
• Do not allow slackening of the terminal screws.
Inlet for control cable
Inlet for power
Clamp
Interface / Outdoor unit connecting terminals
Earth terminal
Photo.3-1
3.1.1. Interface unit power supplied from outdoor unit
The following connection patterns are available.
The outdoor unit power supply patterns vary on models.1 System
D
A
B
C
F
L
N
S1
S1
S2
S2
A
B
C
D
E
F
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Interface unit/outdoor unit connecting cables
Interface unit
S3
S3
E
Photo.3-2
Interface unit-Outdoor unit
*1
3 × 1.5 (polar)
Interface unit-Outdoor unit earth
*2
1 × Min. 1.5
Interface unit-Outdoor unit S1-S2
*2
AC 230 V
Interface unit-Outdoor unit S2-S3
*3
DC24 V
*1. Max. 80 m
*2. The figures are NOT always against the ground.
S3 terminal has DC 24 V against S2 terminal. However between S3 and S1, these terminals are not electrically insulated by the transformer or other device.
Notes: 1. Wiring size must comply with the applicable local and national code.
2. Power supply cables and interface unit/outdoor unit connecting cables shall not be lighter than polychloroprene sheathed flexible cable.
(Design 60245 IEC 57)
3. Install an earth longer than other cables.
E-227
PARTS
PAC-IF011/012B-E
OPTIONAL
Circuit
rating
Wiring
Wire No. × size
(mm²)
Interface unit model
STEP Interface PAC-IF011B/012B-E
3. Electrical work
3.1.2. Separate interface unit/outdoor unit power supplies
The following connection patterns are available.
The outdoor unit power supply patterns vary on models.1:1 System
D
A
B
C
L
N
A Outdoor unit power supply
B Earth leakage breaker
C Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
D Outdoor unit
E Interface unit/outdoor unit connecting cables
F Interface unit
G Interface unit power supply
F
G
S1
S2
S3
B
L
N
C
S1
S2
S3
E
If the interface and outdoor units have separate power supplies, refer to the table below.
Separate power supply specifications
Interface unit controller connector
(CNS2) connection change
Outdoor unit DIP switch settings (when
using separate interface unit/outdoor
unit power supplies only)
Disconnected
ON
OFF
3
1
2
(SW8)
Set the SW8-3 to ON.
CNS2
Photo.3-3
Interface unit model
Interface unit power supply
Interface unit input capacity
PAC-IF011/012B-E
~/N (Single Phase), 50 Hz, 230 V
*1
Circuit
rating
Wiring
Wire No. × size
(mm²)
Main switch (Breaker)
Interface unit power supply
2 × Min. 1.5
Interface unit power supply earth
Interface unit-Outdoor unit
16 A
1 × Min. 1.5
*2
2 × Min. 0.3
Interface unit L-N
*3
AC 230 V
Interface unit-Outdoor unit S1-S2
*3
—
Interface unit-Outdoor unit S2-S3
*3
DC24 V
Interface unit-Outdoor unit earth
—
*1. A breaker with at least 3.0mm contact separation in each pole shall be provided. Use earth leakage breaker (NV).
*2. Max. 120 m
*3. The figures are NOT always against the ground.
Notes: 1. Wiring size must comply with the applicable local and national code.
2. Power supply cables and interface unit/outdoor unit connecting cables shall not be lighter than polychloroprene sheathed flexible cable.
(Design 60245 IEC 57)
3. Install an earth longer than other cables.
3.1.3. Connecting thermistor cable
TB61
Connect the thermistor for the interface controller.
OPTIONAL
PARTS
1. Target temp. thermistor (TH1)
Connect the thermistor for the target temp. to 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB61)
on the interface controller.
2. Pipe temp. thermistor / Liquid (TH2)
Connect the thermistor for the pipe temp. to 3 and 4 on the terminal block (TB61)
on the interface controller.
3. Cond./eva. temp. thermistor (TH5): For PAC-IF012B-E only
Connect the thermistor for the cond./eva. temp. to 5 and 6 on the terminal block
(TB61) on the interface controller.
When the thermistor cables are too long, cut it to the appropriate length.
Do not bind it in the interface unit.
Caution:
Do not route the thermistor cables together with power cables.
The sensor part of the thermistor should be installed where user
must not touch.
(It is separated by the supplementary insulation from where user
may touch.)
E-228
TH1
TH2
Photo.3-4
STEP Interface PAC-IF011B/012B-E
3. Electrical work
3.1.4. Connecting external input
Demand control is available by external input.
It is possible to set the outdoor unit’s power consumption by setting the switch of the interface controller.
Switch1, Switch 6 : Input selection of inverter capacity setting
Input
Step for capacity setting
SW 1-1 SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 6-1 SW 6-2
REMOTE SWITCH
Type A (4bit-8 setting)
REMOTE SWITCH
Type B (1bit-1 setting)
4-20mA
1-5V
0-10V
0-10kΩ
No input (AUTO mode)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF/Step1/Step2/…/Step7/Auto
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF/Step1/Step4/Step7/Auto
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF/Step1/Step2/…/Step7
OFF/Step1/Step2/…/Step7
OFF/Step1/Step2/…/Step7
OFF/Step1/Step2/…/Step7/Auto
Only Auto mode
• REMOTE SWITCH Type A (4bit - 8 setting) / Type B (1bit -1 setting)
TB142
10-11
(COM-IN5)
TB142
10-12
(COM-IN6)
TB142
10-13
(COM-IN7)
TB142
10-14
(COM-IN8)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Step for capacity setting
TypeA
[OFF]
[ON]
OFF
Step1
Step2
Step3
Step4
Step5
Step6
Step7
Auto
At site
OFF∼AUTO
Remark
TypeB
{
0%
10%
20%
30%
50%
70%
80%
100%
[OFF]
[ON]
OFF
Step1
Step4
0%
10%
50%
Step7
100%
OFF
Hz fixed
mode
Auto mode
Auto
I/F
At site
I/F
10
11
12
13
14
Step1
Step4
Step7
AUTO
10
11
12
13
14
TB142
TB142
Demand control is available by connecting remote switches with terminal No.10 - 14.
Make sure to use the non-voltage switch (for the remote switch)
Remote switch cable length : Maximum 10m
Remote switch : Minimum applicable load DC12V, 1mA
• 4-20mA / 1-5V / 0-10V / 0-10kΩ
Use 4-20mA / 1-5V / 0-10V
Connect the transmission cables to No. 3 and 4 on the terminal block (TB62).
No. 3 on the terminal block(TB62) : Plus side
No. 4 on the terminal block(TB62) : Minus side (Reference side)
Use adjustable resistor (0-10kΩ)
Connect the transmission cables to No. 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB62).
TB62
TB142
Adjustable
resistor
(0-10kΩ)
0~100Ω
510Ω
1kΩ
2kΩ
3.3kΩ
4.3kΩ
5.6kΩ
7.5kΩ
10kΩ
OPEN(12kΩ~)
Photo.3-5
4-20mA
1-5V
0-10V
4~5mA
7mA
9mA
11mA
13mA
15mA
17mA
19~20mA
–
–
0~1.25V
1.75V
2.25V
2.75V
3.25V
3.75V
4.25V
4.75~5V
–
–
0~0.63V
1.88V
3.13V
4.38V
5.63V
6.88V
8.13V
9.38~10V
–
–
Step for
capacity
setting
OFF
0%
Step1
10%
Step2
20%
Step3
30%
Step4
50%
Step5
70%
Step6
80%
Step7 100%
Auto
OFF
0%
Remark
Stop
Hz fixed
mode
Auto mode
Stop
*The value of the above-mentioned table becomes the center of the input value.
Cable length : Maximum 10m
At site
I/F
This function is setting operation mode or stopping compressor, by the external signal.
ON
Forced Comp. OFF
Heating
Cable length : Maximum 10m
Remote switch : Minimum applicableload DC12V, 1mA
Remark
Available when SW2-1 and SW2-2
are ON
TB142
0-10 kΩ
4-20mA/1-5V/0-10V
Wired remote controller
(For maintenance)
1
2
3 +
4
5
6
I/F
1 2 3 4
At site
TB62
Caution:
The external input signals are separated by basic insulation from power supply for the unit.
The external input signals should be separated by supplementary insulation from where user may touch in case that it is installed where
user may touch.
Connect the terminals by using the ring terminals and also insulate the cables of adjoining terminals when wiring to terminal block.
E-229
PARTS
TB142
Item
OFF
1-2 (IN1)
Forced Comp. OFF
Normal
3-4 (IN2)Item Fixed operation mode Cooling
OPTIONAL
• External function setting
STEP Interface PAC-IF011B/012B-E
3. Electrical work
3.1.5. Connecting External Output
The signal in the following states can be output.
TB141
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
11-12
13-14
(OUT1)
(OUT2)
(OUT3)
(OUT4)
(OUT5)
(OUT6)
(OUT7)
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
–
Item
Operation Output
Error Output
Comp. Output
Defrost Output
Mode(Cool) Output
Mode(Heat) Output
–
OFF
OFF
Normal
OFF(Comp. OFF)
OFF
OFF
OFF
–
ON
ON
Error
ON
ON
ON
ON
(Comp. ON)
(Defrosting)
(Cooling)
(Heating)
–
Cable length : Maximum 50m
Output specification : Non-voltage switch 1A or less , 240V AC
*Connect the surge absorber according to the load at site.
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 TB141
Photo.3-6
At site
Note : External output signals are separated by basic insulation from other circuit of
interface.
Caution : When 2 or more external outputs are used, the power supply on the output
side should be the same.
TB141
3.1.6. Wiring specification External output / External input
Locally supplied parts
Item
Model and specifications
Name
External output function External output signal wire Use sheathed vinyl coated cord or cable.
Wire type : CV, CVS or equivalent.
Wire size : Stranded wire 0.5mm2 to 1.25mm2
External input function
Display lamp, etc.
External input signal wire
Solid wire: W0.65mm to W1.2mm
Non-voltage Contact AC220-240V (DC30V), 1A or less
Use sheathed vinyl coated cord or cable.
Wire type : CV, CVS or equivalent.
Wire size : Stranded wire 0.5mm2 to 1.25mm2
Solid wire :
Non-voltage "a" contact
Switch
W0.65mm to W1.2mm
3.1.7. Switch setting
It is possible to set the following function by setting the switch of the interface controller.
• SW2-1/2-2 : Fixed operation mode
SW2-1
SW2-2
Details
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Not FIX (Depending on Remote controller setting)
[Cooling] FIX
[Heating] FIX
External input (Depending on TB142-3, 4)
• SW2-3/2-4/2-5 : Fixed set temperature [For Auto mode only]
SW2-3
SW2-4
SW2-5
Details
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not fixed (Remote controller setting)
Cooling 19°C/Heating 17°C FIX
20°C FIX
22°C FIX
24°C FIX
26°C FIX
28°C FIX
Cooling 30°C/Heating 28°C FIX
Set switches in case of auto mode.
• SW2-6 : COND./EVA. TEMP. THERMISTOR (TH5)
SW2-6
Details
Model
OFF
ON
Effect
No effect
PAC-IF012B-E
PAC-IF011B-E
OPTIONAL
PARTS
3.1.8.Before test run
After completing installation and the wiring and piping of the local application and outdoor units, check for refrigerant leakage, looseness in the power supply or control
wiring, wrong polarity, and no disconnection of one phase in the supply.
Use a 500-volt megohmmeter to check that the resistance between the power supply terminals and ground is at least 1.0MΩ.
Warning:
Do not use the system if the insulation resistance is less than 1.0MΩ.
Caution:
Do not carry out this test on the control wiring (low voltage circuit) terminals.
E-230
STEP Interface PAC-IF011B/012B-E
Local Application Factors
* This interface is to connect Mr. Slim inverter outdoor unit of MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC to local applications. Please check the
following when designing the local system.
* MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC does not take any responsibility on the local system design.
1. Heat exchanger
(1) Withstanding pressure
Designed pressure of outdoor unit is 4.15 MPa. Following must be satisfied for burst pressure of connecting application.
Burst pressure : More than 12.45 MPa (3 times more than designed pressure)
(2) Performance
Secure the heat exchanger capacity which meets the following conditions. If the conditions are not met, it may result in
malfunction caused by the protection operation or the outdoor unit may be turned off due to the operation of protection
system.
1. Evaporate temperature is more than 4 in max. frequency operation under +1the cooling rated conditions.
2. Condense temperature is less than 60 in max. frequency operation under +2the heating rated conditions.
3. In case of hot water supply, condense temperature is less than 58 in max. frequency operation with the
outside temperature 7D.B./6W.B.
Outdoor: 35D.B./24W.B.
+1. Indoor: 27D.B./19W.B.
Outdoor: 7D.B./6W.B.
+2. Indoor: 20D.B.
(3) Heat exchanger internal capacity
Heat exchanger internal capacity must be within the capacity range shown below. If the heat exchanger below the
minimum capacity is connected, it may result in the back flow of liquid or the failure of the compressor.
If the heat exchanger above the maximum capacity is connected, it may result in the deficiency in performance due to
lack of refrigerant or overheating of the compressor.
Minimum capacity : 10 % Model capacity [)] / Maximum capacity : 30 % Model capacity [)]
e.g. When connecting to PUHZ-RP100 VHA2
Minimum capacity : 10 % 100 =1000 )
Maximum capacity : 30 % 100 =3000 )
Model capacity
35
50
60
71
100
125
140
200
250
Maximum capacity [)]
1050
1500
1800
2130
3000
3750
4200
6000
7500
Minimum capacity [)]
350
500
600
710
1000
1250
1400
2000
2500
(4) Contamination maintenance
1. Wash the inside of heat exchanger to keep it clean. Be sure to rince not to leave flux. Do not use chlorine detergent
when washing.
2. Be sure that the amount of contamination per unit cubic content of heat transfer pipe is less than the following
amount.
Example) In case of :9.52mm
Residual water : 0.6,/", Residual oil : 0.5,/", Solid foreign object : 1.8,/"
<Liquid pipe thermistor(TH2)>
1. Put thermistor (TH2) where liquid refrigerant pipe temperature can be detected.
2. It is better to protect the thermistor (TH2) with heat insulating materials not to be affected by the ambient temperature, etc.
3. In case that the refrigerant is distributed by distributor, put thermistor (TH2) before the distributor.
<Cond./Eva. temp. thermistor (TH5)>
1. Put thermistor (TH5) where Cond./Eva. temperature can be detected on the indoor HEX pipe.
E-231
PARTS
OPTIONAL
2. Thermistor position
<Target temp.thermistor (TH1)> (Used only in *auto mode (Only for Air to Air applications))
1. Put thermistor (TH1) where average intake temperature for heat exchanger can be detected.
2. It is better to put thermistor (TH1) where radiant heat from heat exchanger can be avoided.
To use this interface for manual step control, put a fixed resistor of 4~10kΩ instead of thermistor (TH1 on the terminal
block TB61).
* Auto mode: In this mode, the capacity step of the outdoor unit is controlled automatically to let the target (intake)
temperature reach the setting temperature. (Only for air to air application)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement